APOLLO
0051
Service Manual
Version 25 October 2006 (Rev. 5)
APOLLO
0051
Service Manual
This Manual belongs to Apollo equipment serial No. ……………………
Version 25 October 2006 (Rev. 5)
SERVICE MANUAL
Revision history
Revision history
Rev.
Date
Page/s
0
14.01.05
-
1
29.03.05
6-2, 6-14, 6-44, 17-5,
from 22-129 to 22-145
Modification description
Document approval.
A14 Control desk CPU PCB layout and
wiring diagram update.
Parameter 74 update in Inverter setting.
Description of basement grubs
regulation.
(Ref. RDM 6040, RDM 6078, RDM 6092)
2
27.04.05
4-6, 4-11, 6-44, 7-1, 8-1,
8-3, 9-2, 11-10, 11-13,
11-16, 11-25, 11-26, 13-6,
13-10, da 22-9 a 22-45,
22-49, da 22-69 a 22-77,
da 22-81 a 22-95
Change of min and max height of
compressor cone with respect to table
top.
Release of SW Version 1.03 (correcting
some minor bugs and introducing some
improvements).
Wiring diagrams and Drawings update.
(Ref. RDM 6008, RDM 6103, RDM 6104)
3
14.04.06
All
Release of "All Digital" version.
Release of "C-CSA-US" version.
Release flat tabletop version.
Software parameters updating.
Release of SW version 1.05 (HOLD
function active message on the display,
collimator additional filter function,
Table Top double height possibilities
from floor).
Wiring diagrams and Drawings update.
Spare Parts chapter added.
(Ref. RDM 6292, RDM 6340, RDM 6360)
4
17.07.06
from 4-2 to 4-6, 4-8,
8-1, 11-14, 11-16, 11-21,
11-25, 11-37, 11-42,
14-4, 18-3, 20-3, 22-3,
from 22-9 to 22-45,
22-49, from 22-81 to 22-95,
22-129, 22-131,
from 22-155 to 22-159, 23-6
5
25.10.06
11-5, 11-6, 11-7
11-10, 20-37,
from 22-9 to 22-49,
23-2, 23-4, 23-6, 23-7,
23-10, 23-11, 23-14,
23-16, 23-28
Release of SW version 1.06 on cabinet
CPU board and SW version 1.04 on
console CPU board (4 Tomo speed, SID
and Layers displayed in inch,
compression force displayed in lbs,
43x35 cassette division 4:1).
Additional Collimator Filters board A16
(optional) added.
Table Top Control board A17 added.
(Ref. RDM 6414, RDM 6467)
(Rev. 5)
Release of SW version 1.07 on cabinet
CPU board (added cells 244 and 245).
Wiring diagrams and Drawings update.
Spare Parts update.
(Ref. RDM 6380, RDM 6495, RDM 6497,
RDM 6503, RDM 6518, RDM 6529)
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Revision history
THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
APOLLO
(Rev. 3)
SERVICE MANUAL
Contents
Contents
1
2
3
INTRODUCTION
1.1
Symbols used in this manual .............................................................. 1-1
1.2
How to contact VILLA SISTEMI MEDICALI technical service ................ 1-2
SAFETY ASPECTS
Warnings ............................................................................................. 2-2
2.2
Radioprotection warnings .................................................................... 2-5
2.3
Environmental risks and disposal........................................................ 2-8
2.4
Used symbols ...................................................................................... 2-9
DESCRIPTION
3.2
6
3-1
ID labels .............................................................................................. 3-1
3.1.1
3.1.2
5
2-1
2.1
3.1
4
1-1
ID labels "CE" version.......................................................................3-2
ID labels "CE" plus "C-CSA-US" version ............................................3-3
Description .......................................................................................... 3-4
TECHNICAL DATA
4-1
4.1
Technical features ............................................................................... 4-1
4.2
Formats division table in centimeters .................................................. 4-8
4.3
Formats division table in inches .......................................................... 4-9
4.4
Standards and regulations................................................................. 4-10
4.5
Dimensions ....................................................................................... 4-11
PRE-INSTALLATION
5-1
5.1
Space requirements ............................................................................. 5-3
5.2
Electrical provisions ............................................................................ 5-6
5.3
Adaptation to the mains voltage........................................................... 5-7
5.4
Environmental conditions.................................................................... 5-7
INSTALLATION
6-1
6.1
Base positioning with beam and column.............................................. 6-2
6.2
Assembly of the Tube support arm ...................................................... 6-5
6.3
Spot Film Device assembly .................................................................. 6-6
6.4
Left- and right-hand tabletop support arm assembly ......................... 6-10
6.5
Machine cable connection.................................................................. 6-12
(Rev. 3)
i
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Contents
6.6
Image intensifier installation.............................................................. 6-23
6.6.1
6.6.2
6.6.3
9-12” fixed Image Intensifier (I.I.) installation.................................. 6-24
16" fixed Image Intensifier (I.I.) installation (Toshiba model) ............ 6-26
Image Intensifier (I.I.) with lift installation....................................... 6-28
6.6.3.1
9” with lift Image Intensifier (I.I.) installation ................. 6-29
6.6.3.2
12” Image Intensifier (I.I.) with lift installation ............... 6-31
6.6.3.3
16” Image Intensifier (I.I.) with lift installation ............... 6-33
6.7
Installation of the Tube - Collimator group......................................... 6-35
6.8
Mounting the covers .......................................................................... 6-39
6.9
Tabletop assembly ............................................................................. 6-45
6.9.1
6.9.2
Curved tabletop assembly .............................................................. 6-45
Flat tabletop assembly ................................................................... 6-47
6.10 Final verifications .............................................................................. 6-49
7
THE FUNCTIONING LOGIC OF THE TABLE
7.1
Functioning sequences ........................................................................ 7-3
7.1.1
7.1.2
7.2
Powering up and initialisation sequence ........................................... 7-3
Activation sequence for a movement ................................................. 7-4
Fault Conditions .................................................................................. 7-6
7.2.1
7.2.2
7.2.3
8
7-1
Generation of a condition alarm ....................................................... 7-6
Generation of a operating alarm ....................................................... 7-6
Generation of an alarm caused by the power circuit.......................... 7-7
IN/OUT INTERFACE CONNECTION
8-1
8.1
Output signals from the Apollo table.................................................... 8-1
8.2
Input signals towards the Apollo table ................................................. 8-3
9
CONFIGURATION ACCESS AND DESCRIPTION OF THE
DATA GROUPS
9-1
10
ACCESS AND ADJUSTMENT OF GROUP 100 DATA
10-1
10.1 Potmeter adjustment ......................................................................... 10-4
10.1.1
10.1.2
10.1.3
10.1.4
Cell data and list............................................................................ 10-5
ANGULATION potmeter adjustment (cells 101 – 102) ...................... 10-8
SCAN potmeter adjustment (cells 103 – 104)................................... 10-9
MAIN BEAM and MIDDLE BEAM potmeter adjustment
(cells 105 ÷ 108)........................................................................... 10-10
10.1.5 TRANSVERSAL TABLETOP potmeter adjustment (cells 111 – 112) 10-14
10.1.6 SOURCE TO FILM DISTANCE potmeter adjustment
(cells 113 – 114) ........................................................................... 10-15
10.1.7 WIDTH COLLIMATOR potmeter adjustment (cells 117 – 118) ........ 10-16
10.1.8 HEIGHT COLLIMATOR potmeter adjustment (cells 119 – 120)...... 10-17
10.1.9 IRIS COLLIMATOR (optional accessory) potmeter adjustment
(cells 121 – 122) ........................................................................... 10-18
10.1.10 COMPRESSION FORCE potmeter adjustment (cells 123 – 124) ..... 10-19
APOLLO
ii
(Rev. 3)
SERVICE MANUAL
Contents
10.1.11 GRID potmeter adjustment (cells 125 – 126) ................................. 10-20
10.1.12 CASSETTE CLOSE potmeter adjustment (cells 127 – 128) ............. 10-21
10.1.12.1 CASSETTE TIGHTENING switch adjustment ............... 10-22
10.1.13 CROSS SUBDIVISION potmeter adjustment (cells 129 – 130) ........ 10-24
10.1.14 SHUTTER potmeter adjustment (cells 131 – 132) .......................... 10-25
10.1.15 I.I. lift microswitches adjustment (Optional) (cell 133) ................... 10-26
11
ACCESS AND DATA FUNCTION OF ALL GROUPS
(EXCEPT GROUP 100)
11-1
11.1 Group 200 – Installation data ............................................................ 11-3
11.1.1
Function of the parameters of group 200 ........................................ 11-3
11.2 Group 300 – PDI controlled motor data............................................ 11-17
11.2.1
11.2.2
Theory of functioning of an axis with PID control .......................... 11-17
Motors check data function .......................................................... 11-21
11.3 Group 400 / 500 / 600 – Dimensions and runs .............................. 11-24
11.3.1
11.3.2
11.3.3
11.3.4
11.3.5
Range of runs carried out by movements with potmeter feedback .. 11-24
Equipment mechanical dimensions............................................... 11-27
Data relative to single fault potmeter controls ............................... 11-31
Spot Film Device cassette and shutters run .................................. 11-35
11.3.4.1
Calculation of the cassette run.................................... 11-36
11.3.4.2
Calculation of the shutters run ................................... 11-41
Safety aspects for PDI-controlled movements ................................ 11-43
11.4 Position 701 – EEprom copy ............................................................ 11-45
11.5 Position 711 – Clock settings and reset alarm memory .................... 11-46
11.6 Position 721 – Test Spot Film Device and table life .......................... 11-47
11.6.1
11.6.2
Spot Film Device test.................................................................... 11-48
Table test ..................................................................................... 11-50
11.7 Position 731 – Remote service function ............................................ 11-52
11.8 Position 751 – Alarms memory......................................................... 11-53
11.9 Position 850 – Table cycles memory ................................................. 11-61
12
SINGLE FAULT OPERATING LOGIC
12-1
13
FUNCTIONALITY
13-1
13.1 Collision ............................................................................................ 13-1
13.1.1
13.1.2
Anticollision barrier........................................................................ 13-5
Anti entrapment device................................................................... 13-6
13.2 Compressor ....................................................................................... 13-7
13.3 Collimator.......................................................................................... 13-8
13.4 Table automatic positioning............................................................. 13-11
(Rev. 3)
iii
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Contents
14
OPERATING MODE
14-1
14.1 Spot Film Device ................................................................................ 14-1
14.1.1
14.1.2
"Standard radiography" performance block diagram........................ 14-2
"Rapid sequence" block diagram ..................................................... 14-3
14.2 Standard tomographic ....................................................................... 14-4
14.2.1
14.2.2
"Standard tomography" block diagram............................................ 14-5
"Sequential tomography" block diagram.......................................... 14-6
14.3 Direct................................................................................................. 14-7
14.4 Digital ................................................................................................ 14-8
14.4.1
"Digital radiography" block diagram................................................ 14-9
14.5 Digital Tomography.......................................................................... 14-10
14.5.1
14.5.2
"Digital tomography" block diagram .............................................. 14-11
"Digital tomography" block diagram .............................................. 14-12
14.6 Angiographic.................................................................................... 14-13
14.6.1
"Stepping angio" block diagram .................................................... 14-14
15
EMERGENCY END RUN
15-1
16
HARDWARE ADJUSTMENT
16-1
16.1 A3 output PCB................................................................................... 16-1
16.1.1
16.1.2
Collimator axle speed adjustment ................................................... 16-1
Adjustment of collimator axle torque gain (armature reaction) ......... 16-3
16.2 Compressor PCB................................................................................ 16-4
17
THREE-PHASE INVERTER
17-1
17.1 Inverter input/output functions......................................................... 17-2
17.2 Inverter hardware setting................................................................... 17-3
17.3 Inverter software parameters setting .................................................. 17-3
17.3.1
17.3.2
Parameters with data modified by Villa Sistemi Medicali ................. 17-4
Parameters that maintain the default settings................................. 17-6
17.4 Access to parameters for writing ........................................................ 17-7
17.5 Procedure for restoring the default parameters .................................. 17-8
18
FUNCTION OF THE OUTPUTS PCB LEDS
18-1
19
CHECKING THE RADIOGRAPHIC EXPOSURE RESULTS
19-1
19.1 Spot Film Device adjustment ............................................................. 19-1
19.1.1
19.1.2
19.1.3
Checking the longitudinal positioning of the cassette ...................... 19-2
Checking the transversal positioning of the cassette ....................... 19-3
Checking the positioning of the shutters......................................... 19-3
19.2 Centering the collimator, checking the X-ray field.............................. 19-4
19.2.1
Alignment of the X-ray beam with collimator diaphragm ................. 19-4
19.3 Alignment of X-ray beam with light beam .......................................... 19-6
19.4 Collimator adjustment ....................................................................... 19-8
APOLLO
iv
(Rev. 3)
SERVICE MANUAL
Contents
20
DIAGNOSTICS AND TROUBLESHOOTING
20-1
20.1 Troubleshooting for displayed diagnoses............................................ 20-3
20.2 Troubleshooting for faults or malfunctions not recognised by
the processor ................................................................................... 20-39
20.2.1
20.2.2
20.2.3
21
Table............................................................................................ 20-39
Spot Film Device (not available on “All Digital” version) ................. 20-41
Collimator .................................................................................... 20-44
MAINTENANCE AND CLEANING
21-1
21.1 Maintenance the operator can carry out ............................................ 21-2
21.2 Maintenance that can be carried out by the Authorised Technician ... 21-3
22
WIRING DIAGRAMS AND DRAWINGS
22-1
22.1 List of wiring diagrams and drawings ................................................ 22-2
23
SPARE PARTS
23-1
No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed or
translated without the prior written consent of Villa Sistemi Medicali.
This manual is the English translation of the Italian original manual version.
(Rev. 3)
v
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Contents
THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
APOLLO
vi
(Rev. 3)
SERVICE MANUAL
Introduction
1
INTRODUCTION
G
NOTE:
This manual has been updated to reflect the state of the product with
which it is sold, to provide a proper reference while troubleshooting and
repair operations, commonly carried out by the service engineer, are
being performed.
The manual might not reflect variations to the product if they do not
affect how it works.
The remote controlled table Apollo is an X-ray equipment that allows to
perform general X-ray examinations. In particular, because of its
connected accessories, the equipment is an optimal solution for
examinations where the use of contrast liquids is required.
The present manual provides the user with instructions for a safe and
efficient use of the equipment.
The equipment must be used in accordance with the procedures
contained in the manual and shall never be used for other purposes than
those provided by the manual itself.
Apollo is an electromedical equipment and, as such, it can be used
solely under the supervision of a physician or of highly qualified
personnel with the necessary competence in matter of protection from
X-rays.
The user is responsible for the fulfilment of the legal requirements
regulating the installation and the functioning of the equipment itself.
1.1
Symbols used in this manual
G topics identified by such symbol.
Indicates a “NOTE”; please pay particular attention when reading the
Indicates a “WARNING”; topics identified by this symbol refer to the
patient and/or operator safety aspects.
(Rev. 3)
1-1
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Introduction
1.2
How to contact VILLA SISTEMI MEDICALI technical
service
For any technical queries please contact the following:
APOLLO
•
Telephone number +39 02 488591
•
Fax number +39 02 48859222
•
E-mail: service_support@villasm.com
1-2
(Rev. 3)
SERVICE MANUAL
Safety aspects
2
SAFETY ASPECTS
WARNING:
All information contained in the present chapter must be carefully read
and, where provided, must be applied in order to avoid damage to the
equipment or to people.
Villa Sistemi Medicali designs and manufactures equipment in
compliance with safety requirements; moreover, it provides all necessary
information for an appropriate use and warnings about the dangers
associated with X-ray generators.
Villa Sistemi Medicali does not take any responsibility for:
•
the use of Apollo equipment different from the one it was originally
designed for
•
damages to the equipment, to the operator, to the patient caused by
both wrong installation and maintenance not in conformity with the
procedures contained in the equipment's user and maintenance
manuals, and by incorrect operating techniques
•
mechanical and/or electrical modifications performed during or after
installation.
Only Villa Sistemi Medicali authorised personnel can provide
technical assistance for the equipment.
Only authorised personnel may remove the protections of the
electrical cabinet and of the equipment, and access the parts under
tension and the moving parts.
(Rev. 3)
2-1
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Safety aspects
2.1
Warnings
Apollo is suited for use in hospital, therefore the line connection may not
be carried out in buildings with domestic-type power supply lines.
The equipment was not designed to be used in the presence of vapours,
anaesthetic mixtures inflammable when in contact with air, oxygen or
nitrous oxide.
In order to prevent risks of short-circuit and corrosion, avoid the
infiltration of water of other liquids in the equipment.
Before cleaning the equipment, always ensure it is disconnected from the
line.
All movements are controlled by a powerful and sophisticated electronic
microprocessor system. Speeds, positions, starts and stops of these
movements are controlled and managed by the equipment's logic. Safety
aspects are fundamental in this logic in order to ensure the maximum
safety both for the patient and the operator. Nevertheless, the operator
MUST ALWAYS PAY CLOSE ATTENTION when a movement is activated.
Press the EMERGENCY red buttons located on the control console and
on the front side of the equipment in case of danger. These buttons will
immediately stop any movement and function. They are a valid
instrument for the operator in addition to the intrinsic safety devices of
the equipment.
Before activating motorised parts, such as the tilting, the tabletop,
or the angulation, ensure that the patient is correctly positioned
and that their legs and arms are positioned within the shape of the
tabletop. If possible, use the support handgrips. During the motorised
movements, no objects interfering with the movements should be in
proximity of the table.
Pay close attention to people in the X-ray room.
Although Apollo was designed with a high degree of protection from
electromagnetic interference, the equipment must be installed at a
certain distance from the electrical energy transformation cabins, from
static uninterruptible power supplies, from walkie-talkies and cellular
phones. The latter two may only be used at the distances from any
element of the equipment reported in the following page.
APOLLO
2-2
(Rev. 3)
SERVICE MANUAL
Safety aspects
R.F. source power
Distance (m)
10 mW
100 mW
1W
10 W
100 W
0.3
1
3
8
30
Instruments or systems used in close proximity to Apollo must be in
compliance with the Electromagnetic Compatibility regulations. Noncompliant instruments, with known scarce immunity to electromagnetic
fields, must be installed at a distance of at least 3 mt (9.84 feet) from
Apollo and must be powered through a dedicated electric line.
Apollo is suited for use in the following electromagnetic environment:
Electromagnetic
emissions
Conformity
EMC usage environment
Irradiated and
conducted emissions
A class
CISPR 11
Group I
Emitted harmonic
EN 61000-3-2
Complying
Flicker EN 61000-3-3
tension/emission
fluctuations
EN 60601-1-2 immunity
(EN 61000-4-2 /3 /4 /5
/6 /8 /11)
Complying
Apollo can be connected to a power
supply line different from the domestic
line.
Apollo generates Radio Frequency
energy only for internal functioning. The
generated R.F. level does not cause
interference with the electrical devices
used nearby.
Apollo can be connected to a power
supply line different from the domestic
line.
Apollo can be connected to a power
supply line different from the domestic
line.
Apollo can be connected to a power
supply line different from the domestic
line.
Complying
In case of line voltage dips that last longer than what can be sustained by
the table electronic control system, the examination in progress may be
cancelled. As a consequence, the tabletop and scan movements, as well
as the angulation, that may cause damage to the patient become
inhibited. The Spot Film Device will be initialised and, in case the
cassette is loaded, on the display a warning will ask the operator to
remove it before proceeding.
(Rev. 3)
2-3
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Safety aspects
Apollo cannot be installed in operating theatres.
Apollo must be powered off when using the electrosurgery cutter or
similar devices.
Clean and, when necessary, disinfect the parts that may come into
contact with the patient by following the procedures provided in the
chapter 21.
APOLLO
2-4
(Rev. 3)
SERVICE MANUAL
Safety aspects
2.2
Radioprotection warnings
Villa Sistemi Medicali designs and manufactures equipment in
compliance with safety requirements; moreover, it provides all necessary
information and warnings about the dangers associated with equipment
connected to X-ray generators.
The personnel authorised to perform X-ray examinations must observe
all regulations regarding the protection against ionizing radiation as
reported below:
•
Use dedicated protections (leaded clothing) to protect the patient from
X-rays diffused in the areas adjacent to the one to be X-rayed.
•
During X-ray examinations, only the patient is allowed to stay in the
room. Medical and paramedic personnel or specifically authorised
personnel, if required by the examination, may also be present only if
wearing radioprotective clothing. The personnel in the room, during
the examination in progress, must stay in the areas indicated in the
figures below.
8
7
6
Occupation area
(see Figure 2-2)
5
4
3
2
1
Figure 2-1: Horizontal table, front view
G
(Rev. 3)
NOTE:
The front view shows a 600x600x2000 mm (23.6"x23.6"x78.7")
occupation area as specified by the applied regulations. In reality,
because the I.I. Spot Film Device, tube group has an excursion of
1600 mm (62.9"), the total occupation zone is the one showed in Figure
2-2. Such area takes into account the above-mentioned excursion.
2-5
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Safety aspects
Occupation area
600x2380 mm
(23.6"x93.7")
H = 2000 mm (78.7")
Figure 2-2: Horizontal table, plan view
Occupation area
(see Figure 2-4)
G
F
E
D
C
1400 mm
(55.1")
B
A
Figure 2-3: Vertical table, front view
APOLLO
2-6
(Rev. 3)
SERVICE MANUAL
Safety aspects
450 mm
(17.7")
Occupation area
600x600 mm (23.6"x23.6")
H = 1700 mm (66.9")
Figure 2-4: Vertical table, plan view
The maximum values of the radiation diffused in the indicated areas are
reported in the following table.
Such values have been detected as reported in the safety regulation
IEC 601-1-3 and, in particular, for technique factors of 120 kV, 3 mA
continuative emission.
(Rev. 3)
Figure
Ref.
H from the ground
Dosage
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
350 mm (13.8")
600 mm (23.6")
1000 mm (39.4")
1200 mm (47.2")
1400 mm (55.1")
1600 mm (63.0")
1800 mm (70.9")
2000 mm (78.7")
350 mm (13.8")
600 mm (23.6")
1000 mm (39.4")
1200 mm (47.2")
1400 mm (55.1")
1600 mm (63.0")
1700 mm (66.9")
0.06 mGy/h
0.09 mGy/h
2.75 mGy/h
10.5 mGy/h
13.9 mGy/h
13.4 mGy/h
9.6 mGy/h
6.2 mGy/h
1.1 mGy/h
1.9 mGy/h
3.3 mGy/h
4.1 mGy/h
4.4 mGy/h
4.1 mGy/h
3.5 mGy/h
2-7
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Safety aspects
2.3
Environmental risks and disposal
Some of Apollo components contain material and liquid that, at the end
of the equipment life-cycle, must be disposed of at the recycling centres
appointed by the Local Health Units.
In particular, the equipment contains the following materials and/or
components:
APOLLO
•
•
“Reducers”: lubricating oil, steel, aluminium
Motor: iron, copper, hard plastic material casings
•
Electric cabinet: iron, aluminium, copper, non-biodegradable
plastics, vetronite for printed circuits.
2-8
(Rev. 3)
SERVICE MANUAL
Safety aspects
2.4
Used symbols
Symbol
Description
Equipment with Type B applied parts
Some components contain material and liquid
that, at the end of the equipment life-cycle, must
be disposed of at the recycling centres appointed
by the Local Health Units
∼
N
R S T
Alternating current
Neutral conductor connection point
Three-phase line conductors connection point
Ground-fault protection
Warning: consult the accompanying
documentation
Dangerous voltage
(Rev. 3)
2-9
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Safety aspects
THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
APOLLO
2-10
(Rev. 3)
SERVICE MANUAL
Description
3
DESCRIPTION
3.1
ID labels
7
3
4
5
1b
2
(Rev. 3)
3-1
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Description
3.1.1
ID labels "CE" version
1a
Apollo features label
(located on the electric cabinet)
1b
Apollo ID label
(located on the equipment)
2
Spot Film Device
features label
3
Collimator
features label
5
"Mechanical moving parts"
label
4
"Total Filtration"
label
6
"Connect TV chain only" label
(inside the electric cabinet)
7
Compression coupling ID
label
APOLLO
3-2
(Rev. 3)
SERVICE MANUAL
Description
3.1.2
ID labels "CE" plus "C-CSA-US" version
1a
Apollo features label
(located on the electric cabinet)
1b
Apollo ID label
(located on the equipment)
1c
C-CSA-US certification plate
(located on the electric cabinet)
2
Spot Film Device
features label
3
Collimator
features label
4
"Total Filtration"
label
5
"Mechanical
moving parts"
label
6
"Connect TV
chain only" label
(inside the electric
cabinet)
7
Compression coupling ID
label
(Rev. 3)
3-3
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Description
3.2
Description
The remote controlled Apollo table is the latest development of remote
controlled tables produced by Villa Sistemi Medicali.
Apollo table is available in the traditional configuration with a Spot Film
Device or in the "All Digital" version, where the Spot Film Device is not
present and the table necessarily has to be completed by Digital Image
acquisition system.
The most recent features applied to this type of table have been
incorporated and further improved. In particular:
•
the mechanical construction
•
the cassette's loading/unloading inside the SFD
•
the removal of components' numerous supporting frames, so that the
components become "self-supporting".
The fundamental functional concepts of the Apollo table are:
•
smallest possible space occupied
•
patient coverage simply through the longitudinal movement of the U
arc
•
elevating tabletop with parts rotation system as opposed to sliding
system
•
modern, concept winning appearance and design
•
operator's rear access without barriers towards the patient
•
reduced skin-to-film distance or skin-to-I.I. entrance distance in the
"All Digital" version
•
carbon fibre or plastic tabletop, with slight curvature or flat surface
and integrated accessories holder profiles
•
reduced I.I.-film distance to avoid the parallax correction
•
reduced-dimension console with new functional concepts.
Movements and complex functions are controlled by the remote-control
console located in the protected X-ray area.
The main table movements are replicated on the control panel on the side
of the table.
All electric and electronic control and logic elements, except for the
console, are grouped in a single electric cabinet, which also houses the
control modules for the system accessories.
The Apollo table, in its traditional configuration, is equipped with a Spot
Film Device that permits the use of commonly used cassettes of any type.
The format division program is very complete and is described in another
paragraph.
APOLLO
3-4
(Rev. 3)
SERVICE MANUAL
Description
An automatic collimator, controlled by a central logic, sets the limits for
the irradiated area.
The collimator can be of square-rectangular collimation type or iris type,
which has circular field collimation in addition to square rectangular
collimation. The "All Digital" version is equipped always with an iris type
collimator.
To meet the requirements of fluoroscopic modality and image acquisition
by means of digital systems, the table is setup to accept image
intensifiers from a minimum of 9" (nominal) maximum input field up to a
maximum of 16" (nominal).
The intensifier is fixed by default by docking it to the Spot Film Device or
to an equivalent support in the "All Digital" version, by means of an
upper mount anchor plate. As an option, a device called "elevating I.I." is
available. This allows to raise the input surface of the I.I. closer to the
patient when the cassette is not in the exposure position.
In "All Digital" version, the II is located closer to table top, consequently
I.I. lift is not available in this configuration.
All movement controls are of "dead man" type.
Apollo was designed and built in compliance with European directives
for obtaining the CE mark as specified in the European Directive 93/42
for Medical Devices, guaranteeing the highest safety for both the operator
and the patient.
Apollo is a universal table for radiological diagnosis, built to satisfy all
needs. It can be employed for the examination of the digestive tract, of
the cranium, and of the skeleton, urographies, myelographies, vascular
and lungs examinations, bronchography. When fitted with a digital
acquisition system, it can also be used for angiographies.
The ID code of the equipment varies according to the type of collimator
and to the voltage.
Apollo is available with both standard and optional accessories. The
following table lists all the accessories and divides them as standard, i.e.
those usually coming with the equipment, and optional accessories,
which must be specifically requested when ordering the equipment.
(Rev. 3)
3-5
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Description
Ref.
Description
Type of
accessory
A
B
C
D
E
F
Block patient footrest
Headrest
Patient support handgrip (N. 2 pieces)
Leg support (N. 2 pieces)
Band-tensioner with compression band
Lateral cassette holder
Standard
Standard
Standard
Optional
Optional
Optional
B
C
A
F
E
D
Figure 3-1: Curved Tabletop accessories
B
C
A
F
D
E
Figure 3-2: Flat Tabletop accessories
All accessories are easily applied as they are mounted directly on the
tabletop's profile.
APOLLO
3-6
(Rev. 3)
SERVICE MANUAL
Technical data
4
TECHNICAL DATA
4.1
Technical features
General features
Type of equipment
Apollo
Manufacturer
Villa Sistemi Medicali S.p.A.
20090 Buccinasco (MI) Italy
Type of equipment and classification in
compliance with IEC 60601-1 standard
regulation
Grade of protection in compliance with
IEC 60529 standard regulation
class I with Type B applied
parts
equipment non protected against
penetration of liquids
Operating mode
continuous functioning
Use
equipment not suitable for use in
presence of inflammable
anaesthetic mixtures
Electric features
Available voltage
3N~ 380-400 Vac ±10%
3N~ 415-480 Vac ±10%
Frequency
50-60 Hz
Maximum current
7 A @ 380-400 Vac ±10%
6 A @ 415-480 Vac ±10%
Fuses on safety isolating transformer
8 AT @ 380-400 Vac
7 AT @ 415-480 Vac
Equipment protection
8 A with magnetothermic
Power
6 kVA
Line impedance
< 1.0 Ω @ 380-400 Vac ±10%
< 1.0 Ω @ 415-480 Vac ±10%
Load voltage drop
< 2 % @ 380-400 Vac ±10%
< 2 % @ 415-480 Vac ±10%
(Rev. 3)
4-1
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Technical data
Mechanical features
Weight
Height vertical table
Height horizontal table and max SID
Width from the front end of the Spot Film
Device to the rear end of the main beam
Total width completely retracted
Length (horizontal table)
Total length with +90 /-90 max SID
Setup for I.I.
I.I. max size
Minimum curved tabletop height from the
ground (with Spot Film Device)
Minimum flat tabletop height from the
ground (with Spot Film Device)
Minimum curved tabletop height from the
ground (All Digital version)
895 Kg (1973 lbs) – SFD version
830 kg (1830 lbs) – All Digital
2500 mm (98.4")
3180 mm (125.2")
1590 mm (62.6")
1920 mm (75.6")
2420 mm (95.3")
4960 mm (195.3")
standard fixed mount
optional lift
16 inch
CENTRE
EDGE
minimum
600 mm
668 mm
(23.6")
(26.3")
with 9" I.I.
600 mm
668 mm
(23.6")
(26.3")
with 12" I.I. 695 mm
763 mm
(27.4")
(30.0")
with 16" I.I. 775 mm
843 mm
(35.0")
(33.2")
minimum
618 mm (24.3")
with 9" I.I.
618 mm (24.3")
with 12" I.I.
713 mm (28.1")
with 16" I.I.
793 mm (31.2")
minimum
with 9" I.I.
with 12" I.I.
with 16" I.I.
CENTRE
EDGE
600 mm
668 mm
(23.6")
(26.3")
600 mm
668 mm
(23.6")
(26.3")
637 mm
705 mm
(25.1")
(27.7")
717 mm
785 mm
(28.2")
(30.9")
618 mm (24.3")
618 mm (24.3")
655 mm (25.8")
735 mm (28.9")
Minimum flat tabletop height from the
ground (All Digital version)
minimum
with 9" I.I.
with 12" I.I.
with 16" I.I.
Max height tabletop centre from the ground
1400 mm (55.1") – curved tabletop
1418 mm (55.8") – flat tabletop
185 mm (7.3") – curved tabletop
203 mm (7.9") – flat tabletop
117 mm (4.6")
Distance tabletop centre – upper side beam
Distance upper tabletop edge –
upper side beam
APOLLO
4-2
(Rev. 4)
SERVICE MANUAL
Technical data
Mechanical features
Distance rear side beam –
internal tabletop edge (with centered tabletop)
Distance rear side beam –
internal tabletop edge (with internal tabletop
end run)
Electric cabinet containing all electric and
electronics controls, including the TV-chain
control or the digital module
Max patient weight with all movements
765 mm (30.1")
605 mm (23.8")
520 x 550 x 1950 mm
(20.4" x 21.6" x 76.8")
284 kg (626.1 lbs)
Runs
Tilting
+ 90° / - 90°
Lift
800 mm (31.5")
Longitudinal tabletop
fixed
Transversal tabletop
320 mm (12.6")
Scan
1600 mm (62.9")
Source-to-film distance
1000 - 1500 mm (39.4" – 59.1")
Angulation
+ 40° / - 40°
Compressor (cone run in X-ray field)
250 mm (9.8")
Tube rotation
+ 180° / - 90°
I.I. lift
38 mm (1.5")
Speed
Tilting
slow 4.5 °/sec
fast 6.5 °/sec (adjustable)
Lift
25 mm/sec (1"/sec) (adjustable)
Transversal tabletop
50 mm/sec (2"/sec) ± 10% (fixed)
Scan
from 30 mm/sec (1.2"/sec) to
200 mm/sec (7.9"/sec) (adjustable)
with speeding step for small or
wide movements
Source-to-film distance
25 mm/sec (1"/sec) ± 10% (fixed)
Angulation
11.2 °/sec (adjustable)
Compressor
25 mm/sec (1"/sec) (adjustable)
I.I. lift (optional)
40 mm/sec (1.6"/sec) ± 20% (fixed)
(Rev. 4)
4-3
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Technical data
Features data and measures
Distance X-ray field centre /
table head extremity
390 mm (15.4")
Distance X-ray field centre /
table feet extremity
390 mm (15.4")
Skin-to-film distance
65 mm (2.6") for curved tabletop
83 mm (3.3") for flat tabletop
Film-to-fixed I.I. distance
19 mm (0.7") (without parallax correct.)
Skin-to-I.I. distance with fixed I.I.
(SFD versions)
84 mm (3.3") for curved tabletop
102 mm (4.0") for flat tabletop
Skin-to-I.I. distance with fixed I.I.
(All Digital versions)
26 mm (1.0") for curved tabletop
44 mm (1.7") for flat tabletop
Skin-to-I.I. distance with I.I. lift
completely lowered
84 mm (3.3") for curved tabletop
102 mm (4.0") for flat tabletop
Skin-to-I.I. distance with I.I. lift
completely lifted
choice of 45-65 mm (1.7"-2.5") for
curved tabletop
choice of 63-83 mm (2.5"-3.3") for flat
tabletop
Minimum distance compressor cone –
tabletop
138 mm (5.4") for curved tabletop
133 mm (5.2") for flat tabletop
Max distance compressor cone –
tabletop
388 mm (15.3") for curved tabletop
383 mm (15.1") for flat tabletop
Compression force
from 3 kg (6.6 lbs) to 15 kg (33.1 lbs)
with 0.5 kg (1.1 lbs) step
Tabletop
Size
2379 x 750 mm (93.7" x 29.5") for
curved tabletop
2356 x 738 mm (92.7" x 29.0") for flat
tabletop
Radio-transparent area size
2214 x 650 mm (87.2" x 25.6") for
curved tabletop
2214 x 554 mm (87.2" x 21.8") for flat
tabletop
Standard material
policarbonate
Optional material
(for curved tabletop only)
carbon fibre with Rohacell filler
Filtration for standard model
< 0.5 mm Al eq @ 100 kVp SEV
2.7 mm Al
Filtration for carbon fibre model
(for curved tabletop only)
< 0.3 mm Al eq @ 100 kVp SEV
2.7 mm Al
Accessories holder guides
integrated
Surface
smooth with curvature
smooth flat
APOLLO
4-4
(Rev. 4)
SERVICE MANUAL
Technical data
Accessories for curved tabletop
Footrest (standard)
support surface 400 x 600 mm
(15.7" x 23.6") ca
Headrest and shoulder rest (standard)
with cushions and shaped shoulder
stoppers integrated
Handgrips (standard)
ergonomic
Compression band (optional)
with winder
Legs support (optional)
adjustable
Lateral cassette holder (optional)
adjustable for lateral projections
Accessories for flat tabletop
Footrest (standard)
support surface 300 x 550 mm
(11.8" x 21.6") ca
Headrest and shoulder rest (standard)
with shoulder stoppers
Handgrips (standard)
ergonomic
Compression band (optional)
with winder
Legs support (optional)
adjustable
Lateral cassette holder (optional)
adjustable for lateral projections
Spot Film Device (NOT present on All Digital version)
Accepted cassette sizes
from 13x18 (5"x7") to 35x43 (14"x17")
Divisions on a line
from 1 to 4
Crossed divisions
in 4 and in 6
Spot Film Device movement
with feed belts without tray
Operating mode
standard program and rapid sequence
Minimum fluoro-to-exposure switching
time
0.8 sec
Maximum fluoro-to-exposure switching
time
Average speed in rapid sequence
≤ 1.2 sec
2 im/sec
Leaded shutters
integrated
Grid
vibrating, parkable
Head I.I. fixing
pre-set
AEC
pre-set
(Rev. 4)
4-5
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Technical data
Collimator
2 axis collimator
3 axis collimator
Additional filtration (optional) for both
models
rectangular and square
rectangular, square and iris
with additional filters movement
(2 mm Al / 1 Al + 0.1 mm Cu / 1 Al + 0.2
mm Cu) manual or motorized
– automatic
Limitation
– manual: by means of joystick on
console and buttons on collimator
Operating mode
– automatic with / without Hold mode
– manual
Light for centering
with timed 100W lamp (min 160 lux @ 1
m) or with on-demand switching off
Minimum dimension X-ray field @ 1m < 1 cm2 (0.39 inch2)
X-ray field coverage @ 1 m
> 43 cm2 (17 inch2)
Stray radiation
≤ 45 mR/h @ 150 kVp 350W
Total filtration rectangular collimator 0.5 mm Al eq @ 100 kVp SEV 2.7 mm Al
Total filtration iris collimator
1.0 mm Al eq @ 100 kVp SEV 2.7 mm Al
Tomography
Type
Layer max height
Layer increment
Layer automatic increment
Speed
Angles
Tomography exposure times (sec)
Direction
Sequential tomography
Scan movement range
APOLLO
semiarc / plane with electronic algorithm
350 mm (13.8")
with 1 mm (0.04") step
selectable with automatic increment
depending on the tomo angle
11.2 – 22.4 °/sec (adjustable)
7° - 20° - 30° - 45°
1st
2nd
3rd
4th
Grades
speed speed speed speed
7°
0.6
0.5
0.4
0.3
20°
1.8
1.3
1.0
0.9
30°
2.6
2.0
1.6
1.3
45°
4.0
3.0
2.4
2.0
from right to left or vice versa (adjustable)
sequential program with forward and back
exposures until divisions are completed
with continuous layer automatic increment
and return to the vertical position at the
end of each exposure without stops
tomography is allowed for variable scan
positions depending on the selected angle
and layer
4-6
(Rev. 4)
SERVICE MANUAL
Technical data
Stepping angio (optional)
Modality
only with digital acquisition system
Automatic
–
–
step length: depending on the
selected I.I.
manual: adjustable with 1 mm step
Direction
selectable
Interface
integrated with digital generator and
scan
Controls
Console movements
controls with joystick on table side with
buttons
Console functions
controls
User interface
with graphic display, function keys and
LED signalling
Controls type
"Dead man"
Safety on movements
single fault on the HW chain driving
movement and feedback
Environmental conditions
Operating conditions
Temperature:
Humidity:
Pressure:
from +10 to +40°
from 30 to 75 %
from 700 to 1060 hPa
Conditions for transport and storage
Temperature:
Humidity:
Pressure:
from -20 to +70°
≤ 95% non condensing
> 630 hPa
(Rev. 3)
4-7
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Technical data
4.2
Formats division table in centimeters
G
APOLLO
13x18
18x13
18x24
9x24
9x12
24x24
12x24
12x12
24x30
12x30
30x24
30x30
15x30
10x30
18x43
43x18
21x18
14x18
15x40
40x15
20x15
13x15
10x15
20x40
10x40
40x20
20x20
13x20
10x20
30x35
15x35
10x35
35x30
17x30
12x30
30x40
15x40
10x40
40x30
20x30
13x30
10x30
35x35
17x35
12x35
35x43
17x43
12x43
43x35
21x35
14x35
11x35
24x18
12x18
15x24
15x12
10x24
10x12
NOTE:
The first number of the format refers to the tabletop transversal direction
(patient right-to-left). The measure indicated on the various divisions is
nominal.
4-8
(Rev. 4)
SERVICE MANUAL
Technical data
4.3
Formats division table in inches
G
(Rev. 3)
5x7
7x5
8x10
4x10
4x5
10x8
5x8
10x12
5x12
12x10
6x10
6x5
9.5x9.5
4.7x9.5
3x9.5
7x17
17x7
8.5x7
5.7x7
4.3x7
11x14
5.5x14
3.7x14
14x11
14x14
7x14
4.7x14
14x17
7x17
4.7x17
17x14
4x10
4x5
7x11
4.7x11
3.5x11
8.5x14
5.7x14
NOTE:
The first number of the format refers to the tabletop transversal direction
(patient right-to-left). The measure indicated on the various divisions is
nominal.
4-9
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Technical data
4.4
Standards and regulations
Apollo was designed and built in compliance with the following
regulations:
IEC/EN 60601-1
Medical Electrical Equipment – Part 1: General requirements for safety 1:
collateral standard: safety requirements for Medical Electrical Systems
IEC/EN 60601-1-2
Medical Electrical Equipment – Part 1: General requirements for safety 2:
collateral standard: electromagnetic compatibility – requirements and
test
IEC/EN 60601-1-3
Medical Electrical Equipment – Part 1: General requirements for safety collateral standard: general requirements for radiation protection in
diagnostic X-ray equipment
IEC/EN 60601-2-32 (with exclusion of clause 22.4.5)
Medical Electrical Equipment – Part 2: Particular requirements for the
safety of associated equipment of X-ray equipment.
0051
The EC symbol certifies the conformity of Apollo to
Directive 93/42/EEC.
Versions C-CSA-US, knowable by the identification code with last digit
"1" (ex 9784xxxxx1), are produced in compliance, more than above listed
standards, also with as indicated below:
CFR 21
Code Federal Regulation. Sub Chapter J
CAN/CSA C22.2 No 60601-1-M90
Safety of Medical Electrical Equipment, Part 1, General requirements for
safety
UL Std No 60601-1 (2nd edition)
Safety of Medical Electrical Equipment, Part 1, General requirements for
safety.
APOLLO
4-10
(Rev. 3)
SERVICE MANUAL
Technical data
4.5
Dimensions
A: with IB 9” min. 600mm (23.6") – max 1400mm (55.1")
with IB 12” min. 695mm (27.4") – max 1400mm (55.1")
with IB 16” min. 775mm (30.5") – max 1400mm (55.1")
B: with IB 9” min. 1880mm (74.8") – max 2680mm (105.5")
with IB 12” min. 1975mm (77.8") – max 2680mm (105.5")
with IB 16” min. 2055mm (80.9") – max 2680mm (105.5")
Figure 4-1
(Rev. 3)
4-11
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Technical data
THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
APOLLO
4-12
(Rev. 3)
SERVICE MANUAL
Pre-installation
5
PRE-INSTALLATION
The instructions on the following pages guarantee that the installation
performed will ensure the remote-controlled Apollo table will work
properly.
The Manufacturer can provide any technical consultancy and assistance
necessary right from the pre-installation stage (if requested, to check the
positioning of the equipment inside the X-ray room).
The room should be prepared for the installation of the Apollo table
according to the choice of the most suitable floor plate (Figure 5-1 and
Figure 5-2).
The standard floor fixing plate (Figure 5-1) is suitable for slabs with a
bearing capacity of more than 2400kg/m2 (499lbs/feet2) (weight of
machine fitted with 16" IB and considering a patient of 150kg / 330.7lbs
= 1160kg / 2557.5lbs on a support surface of 0.48m2 / 5.16feet2).
G
NOTE:
The "All Digital" version is only slightly lighter than the Spot Film Device
version so it’s not convenient to differentiate the calculation of the
bearing capacity needed for installation.
Remove the surface of the floor in an area measuring 420x1310 mm
(16.5"x51.6") until you reach the concrete of the slab, so that the top
surface of the plate is flush with the floor.
The concrete surface of the slab, under the plate, must be rough enough
to ensure the concrete to be poured adheres properly. Position the plate
and carefully level it so that the surface obtained is as level as possible.
The plate already has threaded holes and M16 bolts for the anchorage of
the base; these holes must be protected (e.g. by inserting the fixing bolts)
so that they are not blocked up during installation; pour the concrete
with a cement/sand ratio of 1:2.5, remove the surplus and let it dry for
six hours.
Figure 5-1: Standard floor fixing plate
(Rev. 3)
5-1
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Pre-installation
If the bearing capacity of the slab is not sufficient (less than
2400 kg/m2 / 499 lbs/feet2), a weight distribution plate is available and
must be requested at the time of the order (purchase code 5584902500 Figure 5-2).
Figure 5-2: Weight distribution plate
This plate can be installed on the floor in two different ways:
1. Sunk into the floor
2. Fixed to the floor.
In the first case (1) follow the instructions given above for a plate of a
smaller size and be sure to remove the upper surface of the floor over an
area of 2700x1600 mm (106.3"x63").
In the second case (2), the plate must be fixed to the floor taking
advantage of the relative fixing holes and masked through the
construction of raised section that covers the structure of the plate itself.
G
APOLLO
NOTE:
The weight distribution plate is not symmetrical, so it’s important to
position it in the correct way (Figure 5-2).
5-2
(Rev. 3)
SERVICE MANUAL
Pre-installation
5.1
Space requirements
G
NOTE:
In order to unload the main body of the device from the truck, it is
necessary either that the truck has an elevating lift or to use an elevating
fork cart.
When performing the overview of the location (installation room, aisles,
doors ecc.) please remind that the main body of the device after having
removed the wood box has dimensions given in Figure 5-3.
Figure 5-3
The minimum height of the installation room must be greater than
2550 mm (100.4"); operating room on the front is advised to be 1000 mm
(39.4"); on the sides leave room as detailed in Figure 5-5.
(Rev. 3)
5-3
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Pre-installation
Under floor conducts (Figure 5-4) must meet the following requirements:
• C: suggested section: 20x10 cm (7.9"x3.9") / max distance between
the pit and the cabinet: 9 m (29.53 feet).
• D: suggested section: 10 cm (3.9") / max distance between the
cabinet and the control panel 14 m (45.93 feet).
G
NOTE:
If distances are larger than those indicated above (C and D) ask adequate
length of connecting cables at order.
WARNING:
The electrical cabinet is fitted with two wheels so that the rear can be
more easily accessed during installation and maintenance.
(*)
The minimum distance with cabinets in position A (inside the Apollo tilting
area) = 800 mm (31.5")
The minimum distance with cabinets in position B (outside the Apollo tilting
area) = 600 mm (23.6")
Figure 5-4: Minimum dimensions necessary for Apollo installation
without any limit on table movements
APOLLO
5-4
(Rev. 3)
SERVICE MANUAL
Pre-installation
Figure 5-5: Minimum dimensions necessary for Apollo installation
with Chest Stand without any limit on table movements
(Rev. 3)
5-5
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Pre-installation
5.2
Electrical provisions
G
• POWER SUPPLY
380-400Vac 3 phase +Ground
415-480Vac 3 phase +Ground
• FREQUENCY
50-60Hz
• ABSORBED POWER (table only)
5kVA
• ABSORBED CURRENT (table only)
7A
• APPARENT LINE RESISTANCE
< 1Ω
NOTE:
Generally the power required for the fitting out of one complete X-ray
room including the Apollo table equals 25-30kVA.
WARNING:
The equipment can be connected directly to the mains or in cascade with
the ray generator, a preferable alternative because, when the generator is
powered down, the table and the accessories connected to it (e.g. the
image capturing system or chest stand) are turned off as well. In both
cases the wires of the three-phase power supply must have a crosssection of at least 4.0 mm².
•
Connection directly to the mains:
Make provision for an automatic switch with fuse as per the current
regulations in the country of installation.
•
Connection to the generator:
Check the generator manual to make sure that the connection points
are right for the load and insulation values.
The general grounding must respond to the standards in force. If the
grounding of the equipment is not good enough, it might jeopardise the
safety of the operator and/or cause the malfunctioning of the electronic
equipment.
APOLLO
5-6
(Rev. 3)
SERVICE MANUAL
Pre-installation
5.3
Adaptation to the mains voltage
The insulation and power feed transformer (T1) of the Apollo table is
fitted with two sets of (R S T) primary winding power supply terminals.
One group is for connecting the 380V power supply, the other 400V.
The equipment can be supplied with provision for a 380V or 400V
connection. This pre-disposition must be specified on ordering and will
be incorporated in the factory before shipment.
Before powering up the equipment, make sure that the mains voltage
corresponds with the predisposition of the equipment by checking that:
•
the rating plate shows the right voltage (the position of the rating
plate is described in paragraph 3.1)
•
the primary main power supply insulation transformer T1 connection
corresponds with the mains voltage.
5.4
Environmental conditions
The data in paragraph 4.1 must be complied with for the environmental
operating and transport/storage conditions.
(Rev. 3)
5-7
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Pre-installation
THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
APOLLO
5-8
(Rev. 3)
SERVICE MANUAL
Installation
6
INSTALLATION
WARNING:
During the mechanical installation of the equipment and the electrical
connection described below, the safety regulations in force must be
respected and the precautions described below must be taken:
•
wear accident prevention clothing (boots, gloves, goggles when
necessary)
•
always work in conditions of utmost safety and avoid carrying out
procedures that put you or others at risk
•
make sure that no electricity is supplied to the equipment unless the
installation is completed or said electricity is required for installation
purposes.
•
when the unit is ready to be powered up and while the installation is
in the final phases of completion, make sure the power supply is cut
off by means of a switch before accessing any of the parts that can be
a danger.
G
NOTE:
The instructions present on this chapter are referred to a standard unit
versions (with Spot Film Device).
For "All Digital" versions, all instructions relevant to SFD must be
intended to the I.I. support frame assy. This I.I. support frame has
mechanical characteristics equal to the SFD one, but any devices for
cassettes, grid and shutters are not present.
For delivery, handling and assembly purposes, the machine is broken
down into units that must be put together:
v
Base with beam and column (Assembly 1)
v
Tube and collimator support arm (Assembly 2)
v
Spot Film Device (Assembly 3)
v
Left- and right-hand tabletop support arm (Assembly 4)
v
Tabletop (Assembly 5)
Assemble the units by following the instructions below.
(Rev. 3)
6-1
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Installation
6.1
Base positioning with beam and column
The base assembly with beam and column are shipped in a crate as
shown in Figure 6-1.
WARNING:
Before positioning the assembly on the anchorage plate, check that this
is flat with respect to both axes.
Do not use the grubs positioned on the left side of the basement to
achieve horizontal alignment of the table; these grubs may be used in the
final stages of installation to correct possible elastic deformations of the
basement when the table is loaded (see paragraph 6.5).
G
NOTE:
The operations described below require the use of a transpallet.
1. Remove lid "A" and walls "B" of the crate.
2. Remove the wooden beams "C" holding the pallets together, from the
pallet.
3. Remove bolts "D" and "E" holding the base assembly to the pallets.
A
B
B
C
D
E
C
B
D
B
Figure 6-1
APOLLO
6-2
(Rev. 3)
SERVICE MANUAL
Installation
4. Position the transpallet under one of the 2 side pallets "D", raise the
base assembly and remove the central pallet "E". Lower the
transpallet.
5. Referring to Figure 6-2, insert the transpallet centrally under the
base assembly and lift it to free the two side pallets "D". Rest one side
of the base on two supports (e.g. the pallets positioned on the corner)
leaving the centre part free; suspend the other side, inserting one of
the two main beams "C" parallel to the transpallet fork, allowing the
side of the base to protrude as much as possible.
Main beam
“C”
Figure 6-2
6. Referring to Figure 6-3, remove the transpallet and position it on the
side of the base assembly. Exert leverage on the shoulder and lift the
base assembly enough to remove the central pallet "C" and reposition
it under the base, in such a way that it is parallel to the long side of
the base and subsequently allows the transpallet to be inserted to lift
the group. Lower the transpallet.
Main beam
“C”
Figure 6-3
(Rev. 3)
6-3
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Installation
7. Leaving the transpallet in its present position, slide it under the base
in such a way that it is possible to lift the assembly and free the two
supports. With the greatest of care, suspend the base assembly on
the central main beam "C"; slide the transpallet in completely under
the base.
8. Bring the base assembly into the room and follow the above
procedure in reverse, positioning the transpallet perpendicularly to
the base assembly. Take the base assembly to the fixing plate and try
to align the base-plate fixing holes as well as possible.
9. Position the two main wood beams "C" at the side of the base, parallel
to the transpallet forks. Lower the base assembly and remove the
transpallet.
10. Exerting leverage on one of the two side iron brackets, raise the base
assembly enough to remove one of the wooden beams. Gently lower
the base assembly until it is resting on the ground. Repeat the
operation to remove the remaining wooden beam.
11. Check that the holes in the base assembly line up perfectly with
those in the anchorage plate. If it is necessary, to move the base
assembly to align the fixing holes, use the transpallet.
G
NOTE:
Moving the base while it is resting on the ground by applying
leverage to the structure is not advised under any circumstances.
This operation could damage the actuators.
12. Close the two fixing holes on head side, 2 grubs are present to adjust
the base position in order to avoid interferences during
trendelenbourg movement, between middle beam and plastic guides
present on the base. Unlock the 2 grubs and fix the base on the floor
plate. The grubs adjustment is explained on paragraph 6.5 , items
from 10 to 15. At this moment only it is allowed to remove the
transport wood frame and lateral iron plate for main beam.
APOLLO
6-4
(Rev. 3)
SERVICE MANUAL
Installation
6.2
Assembly of the Tube support arm
1. Remove the front plate from the column stand.
2. Move the tube support arm towards the top of the column and, at the
same time, position the front plate in such a way that the nine fixing
holes on the parts to assemble (front plate – tube support arm column section) are aligned (Figure 6-4).
3. Make sure that the tube support arm is aligned properly with the
column before tightening the fixing screws.
4. Position on the frontal part of the X-ray tube arm the microswitch for
0° position setting it in such a way that it is not activated when the
X-ray tube rotation pin reaches position 0°.
Column
section
Tube
support arm
Front
plate
Micro 0°
Figure 6-4
(Rev. 3)
6-5
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Installation
6.3
Spot Film Device assembly
WARNING:
A plate is provided with the Spot Film Device. This must be assembled
with the four Spot Film Device support wheels and it will constitute a tool
necessary for the installation of the Image Intensifier (paragraph 6.6).
The Spot Film Device is fitted on the relevant adjustable supports and
fitted with wheels to make it easier to move and position.
1. Position the Spot Film Device assembly mounted on the transport
pallet, near the machine.
2. Free the four Spot Film Device supports from the safety blocks fixing
them to the transport pallet.
3. Remove the Spot Film Device from the pallet being careful to pay the
utmost attention not to damage it.
4. Remove all screws fixing the Spot Film Device, the two safety rods
holding the inclination motor support on the end wall and remove the
protection of the inclination potmeter (Figure 6-5). Remove the two
top hooks from the Spot Film Device (one per side) (Figure 6-6) so
that positioning can be carried out.
Safety
rod
Protection of the
inclination potmeter
Safety
rod
Figure 6-5
APOLLO
6-6
(Rev. 3)
SERVICE MANUAL
Installation
5. Position the Spot Film Device assembly near the end wall and make
sure that it is possible to align the fixing holes on the shoulders and
on the inclination motor support. If it is necessary to lift or lower the
Spot Film Device to align the fastening holes, use the adjustable
supports while being careful to avoid forcing the Spot Film Device on
the angulation motor's fusion attachment (Figure 6-6).
6. Once the alignment of the holes on both the fixing shoulders has
been checked, it is possible to fix, without tightening, the Spot Film
Device assembly with the twenty-two bolts supplied (eleven bolts per
side).
If the Spot Film Device is imagined as a plane, it must be at right
angles to the end wall where it is fixed. Check that the two elements
are at right angles to each other using a bubble level. If it is
necessary to make an adjustment to obtain perfect right angles
between the Spot Film Device and the end wall, adjust the adjustable
supports of the Spot Film Device support until the position required
is reached (Figure 6-6).
7. Insert the two centering pins into their holes (Figure 6-6), one on
each side, taking care that the threaded part can be accessed from
outside, and then tighten the twenty-two fastening screws. Remount
the two top hooks removed at point "4" above.
Centering
pin
90°
Top hook
Figure 6-6
8. Remove the four Spot Film Device assembly adjustable supports.
(Rev. 3)
6-7
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Installation
9. Carry out the Spot Film Device wiring pre-arranged on the right-hand
side of the end wall.
The wiring must be routed using the relevant cable clips to be found
on the right-hand wall of the Spot Film Device. The wires must be
routed in such a way that they are parallel to and not on top of each
other (Figure 6-7).
The X16 wire, fixed to an anchoring plate, must be placed on the
right-hand wall of the Spot Film Device, interfacing with the flat cable
(X16) installed in the factory.
The following table is an aid in the identification of the cables and
where they must be connected (see also Figure 6-7).
Connector/Cable
Point of connection
X101
Spot Film Device PCB A10
X68
Spot Film Device PCB A10
X44
Spot Film Device PCB A10
X19
Spot Film Device PCB A10
X14
Spot Film Device PCB A10
X16
Interface connector X16
Ground cable Nr 8
A10 PCB fixing plate
A.E.C. chamber cable
A.E.C. chamber cable
X68
X14
X19 X44
X101
X16
Cable clip
Ground cable
Figure 6-7
APOLLO
6-8
(Rev. 3)
SERVICE MANUAL
Installation
G
NOTE:
The automatic exposimeter device is an optional and consequently the
A.E.C. chamber cable is only present when the automatic exposimeter
chamber is fitted to the Spot Film Device.
10. Position the front panel of the Spot Film Device and fix it with the
hinge on the left-hand wall.
Connect the free end of the flat cable (X16) to the PCB of the key pad
fitted on the machine A8.
Loosen the fixing screws of the hinge on the Spot Film Device's lefthand wall; shut the panel and do up the bolts on both sides (Figure
6-8).
X16
Figure 6-8
(Rev. 3)
6-9
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Installation
6.4
Left- and right-hand tabletop support arm assembly
The tabletop support arms are different from each other with regard to
the table fixing pin position and the reference lines for fixing the
respective belts. For this reason there are two labels indicating the lefthand and right-hand arms.
G
NOTE:
Both the table top support arms are fitted with blocking bolts for the
transport. Remove these blocks only after the arms have been assembled,
the relative belts have been tensioned and before mounting the tabletop
and moving the arms.
Right-hand arm assembly (Figure 6-9):
1.
2.
3.
4.
Remove the beam side protection used for transport purposes.
Remove the small plate from the beams.
Loosen the three external attachment fixing bolts.
Place the arm into its seat in such a way as to allow the assembly of
the belt on the relative pulleys, following the route indicated in the
figure. Check that the phasing reference lines marked above the belts
of the arm and the co-ordinator correspond; otherwise correct the
position of the belt of the arm.
5. Position the arm in such a way as to be able screw up the small plate
removed at point "2" using the three bolts. At this point the belt is
properly tensioned.
Belt aligment
reference
Arm belt
Coordination
belt
Outside support
Small plate
Beam side
protection
Figure 6-9
APOLLO
6-10
(Rev. 3)
SERVICE MANUAL
Installation
6. Do up all the six arm blocking bolts.
7. Remove the blocking bolts used to immobilise the arm during
transport.
For the assembly of the left-hand arm proceed as for the assembly of the
right-hand arm.
(Rev. 3)
6-11
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Installation
6.5
Machine cable connection
The machine is partially factory wired, while the rest of the wires are
provided separately; all have to be wired up to the machine as described
below.
G
NOTE:
The wire chains "A" and "B" (Figure 6-10) are made in such as way that
they can be opened to permit the wires to be inserted. Take care to note
when opening the chains the location of the individual covers. As these
are not all the same, they will have to be put back properly when the
chains are closed.
At this stage only the machine wires can be set up so as to permit
powering the table and to make the remaining installation process stage
easier, or the system wires can also be connected (high tension cables,
anode, etc.). How to proceed in this regard is a matter for the installer's
own discretion. When you decide also to connect the system wires it is
advisable to refer to paragraph 6.7 for tube-collimator group installation.
A
B
Figure 6-10
1. Fix the "B" chain to the upper locking bracket.
APOLLO
6-12
(Rev. 3)
SERVICE MANUAL
Installation
G
NOTE:
To easily identify the end to fix to the upper bracket, check as follow: on
the external side of the link the code number is present.
The end must be fixed on upper bracket is with 1 link code
157.150.100.1 and the following with code 158.150.100.1.
The end must be fixed on lower bracket has all links with code
157.150.100.1.
2. To avoid cable-braiding, is suggested to position the cable chain as
showed in Figure 6-10.
House the group of cables leaving chain "A" in chain "B". Some of
these wires are much shorter than others. The shorter ones should
be connected to the A11 base connector board and the longer ones in
the table's electrical cabinet and that of the generator if you wish also
to connect up the system cables.
3. Before you start, chain "B" should be positioned as in Figure 6-11.
4. It is advisable at this stage not to close the wiring chain but just to
install some covers so as to secure the wires inside them. Connect
wires X20, X46, X75, X77, X88, X96, X97 and X98 to the A11 base
connector board (Figure 6-12), threading them through "C" (Figure
6-11). The base connector board has a dust guard that has to be
removed when connecting the wires and then replaced. Connect
ground cables 5, 7, 8, 9 and 11 (lift I.I. - optional) to the ground bar
(W2) in the base unit (Figure 6-13).
A
B
C
Figure 6-11
5. Connect ground cable 10 between the ground connection W2 on the
machine base unit and the ground rod (W1) in the cabinet.
(Rev. 3)
6-13
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Installation
6. Connect all the output cables in "C" and from chain "B" to the
machine cabinet: X68, X19, X14, X16, X44, X101, X73, E4, X71, E2,
X106 (lift I.I. – optional), X70, E3, X20, X46, X99.5, X99.6, X74, E1,
X99.1, X99.2, X105 and X45 as indicated in the following table (see
also Figure 6-13).
7. Connect the console cable (X8) to the cabinet; connect the foot
control (cable X41) to the console.
8. Connect the power cable to the R-S-T clamps on the insulation
transformer inside the cabinet. Connect the ground cable to the rod
(W1) in the cabinet.
9. Connect the system cables to the rest of the accessories when it is
decided wire them up during the procedures described above.
G
NOTE:
To avoid insurgence of an alarm condition at switch ON it is necessary to
install the collimator (see paragraph 6.7) and connect it by cable X45 or
simulate collimator presence; in this case it is possible for example to use
a male CANNON 37 pin connector with two voltage partitions built by a
resistor of 4.7kΩ between pins X45-18 and X45-32, a resistor of 4.7kΩ
between pins X45-16 and X45-32, a resistor of 4.7kΩ between pins X4519 e X45-33 and a resistor of 4.7kΩ between pins X45-17 and X45-33.
At this point the machine can be turned on and perform movements. In
this stage the mechanical alignment of the moving beams with respect to
the basement must be checked and possibly corrected. In order to do so
proceed as follows:
10. Move de equipment up/down and tilt it in both directions; if the
middle beam during same movements is in touch with parts of the
basements, proceed as by the following step, otherwise will be not
necessary other adjustments.
11. Release the two screws fixing the basement to the ground on the left
side of the basement, i.e. close to the regulation grubs.
12. Act on the regulation grubs to correct deformations of the side wall of
the basement: the process is of the trial and error type. Usually it is
advisable to screw in the grub on the opposite side where the
interference is present in the up-down movement of the beam.
13. Tight again the screws holding the basement to the ground.
14. Check again the movements following the procedure from step 10.
15. Make a few tilting movements to verify the correct situation and stop
the procedure.
This procedure should be repeated at the end of installation when the
table is loaded with all its accessories (II, X-ray tube, table top, ecc.)
APOLLO
6-14
(Rev. 3)
SERVICE MANUAL
Installation
Location on the Table
Spot Film Device PCB A10
Cabinet side
cable code
Location on the Cabinet
Description
X34
Spot Film Device
motor cable
X35
Spot Film Device
motor cable
X36
Spot Film Device
motor cable
X68
Spot Film Device activation PCB A4
X37
Spot Film Device
motor cable
X38
Spot Film Device
motor cable
X39
Spot Film Device
motor cable
Spot Film Device PCB A10
X19
X19
Input PCB A2
Spot Film Device
potmeter cable
Spot Film Device PCB A10
X14
X14
Input PCB A2
Spot Film Device cable
Button pad PCB A8
X16
X16
Input PCB A2
Button Pad Cable
Spot Film Device PCB A10
X44
X44
Cabinet connector PCB A12
Spot Film Device 24Vac
power supply
X0.10
Terminal block X0.10
X0.11
Terminal block X0.11
Spot Film Device PCB A10
(Rev. 3)
Table side
cable code
X101
Emergency stop button cable
6-15
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Installation
Location on the Table
Table side
cable code
Cabinet side
cable code
Location on the Cabinet
Description
Base unit connector PCB A11
X20
X20
Input PCB A2
Machine potmeter cable
Base unit connector PCB A11
X46
X46
Cabinet connector PCB A12
PCB connection cable X46
X99.5
X0.1
Terminal block X0.1
X99.6
X0.2
Terminal block X0.2
X0.5
Terminal block X0.5
X0.6
Terminal block X0.6
Angulation connectors PCB A13
Angulation connector PCB A13
SID motor cable
X74
X99.1
X99.1
X99.2
X99.2
Angulation connector PCB A13
X105
Collimator
X45
Angulation connector PCB A13
APOLLO
Emergency micro switch
cable
Compressor PCB A15
Compressor motor cable
X105
Cabinet connector PCB A12
PCB connection cable
X45
Cabinet connector PCB A12
Collimator cable
6-16
(Rev. 3)
SERVICE MANUAL
Installation
Location on the Table
Control panel - CPU PCB A14
Table side
cable code
Cabinet side
cable code
Location on the Cabinet
X8
Cabinet CPU PCB A1
X22
Input PCB A2
X0.7
Terminal block X0.7
X8
Control panel
X0.8
Terminal block X0.8
X0.9
Terminal block X0.9
X0.10
Terminal block X0.10
X106.1
X0.3
Terminal block X0.3
X106.2
X0.4
Terminal block X0.4
10
10
Cabinet ground rod (W1)
Ground cables 10
Beam motor
X70
Inverter box
Power supply cable
Main beam motor
Angulation motor
X71
Inverter box
Power supply cable
Angulation motor
Middle beam motor
X72
Inverter box
Power supply cable
Middle beam motor
I.I. lift (optional)
Base unit ground rod (W2)
(Rev. 3)
Description
Lift motor cable I.I.
6-17
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Installation
Location on the Table
Table side
cable code
Location on the Cabinet
Description
X73
Inverter box
Power supply cable
Scan motor
10
Cabinet ground rod (W1)
Ground cables 10
Angulation motor
E2
Terminal block X0.E2
Angulation motor
ground cable
Scan motor
E4
Terminal block X0.E4
Scan moto
ground cable
Main beam motor
E1
Terminal block X0.E1
Main beam motor
ground cable
Middle beam motor
E3
Terminal block X0.E3
Middle beam motor
ground cable
Scan motor
Base unit ground rod (W2)
APOLLO
Cabinet side
cable code
10
6-18
(Rev. 3)
SERVICE MANUAL
Installation
ANGULATION CONNECTOR CARD - A13
2
4
1
X90
2
1
3
2 1
2 1
2 1
4
4
X86
3
2 1
X91
2
2
X80
X79
X76
X74
1
V3
1
X82
2
1
3
2 1
X87
2
1
3
4
X85
3
4
X100
X105
4
2 1
X89
1
3
X97
1
1
V4
2
2
X94
X95
1
1
1
X98
8
X99
1
3
4
4
3
4
2
1
X83
1 2
2
1
3
X84
2
2
X88
1
2
1
X78
X81
2
1
1
X98
X97
X46
1
X93
V2
2
1
X92
1
V1
X77
1
X75
1
2
1
2
X20
X96
BASE UNIT CONNECTOR CARD - A11
Figure 6-12: Connector points diagram for machine connector board
(Rev. 3)
6-19
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Installation
X20
X19
X14
X16
7
X22
X12
1
X21
X17
X15
X13
X18
X10
2
X11
1
2
INPUT CARD - A2
X4
X12
X3A
9
5
X3B
A2
1
2
X4
X1
A4
8
X34
1
2
X2
X7
X3A
X9
CPU CARD - A1
X3B
X8
A1
S1
X5A
X5B
X5A
1
2
A3
1
X30 X107
R, S, T
CABINET
GROUND ROD (W1)
X5B
X27
2
1
X36
X39
X38
X37
X25
1
X23
3
X33
3
X6
2
4
2
X6
X35
SFD ACTIVATION CARD - A4
X70, X71,
X72, X73
OUTPUT CARD - A3
X17
X29
X26
X12
A12
X46
X15
5
9
X105
COMPRESSOR CARD - A15
X21
X25
X28
X31
X29
X24
1
2
X32
X26
1
X49
X47
1
2
3
4
5
6
9
7
8
9
1
2
1
2
1
2
X45
X48
1
8
4
CABINET CONNECTOR CARD - A12
10
(to the cabinet)
7
X44
10
N
N
S3
S3
E4
E3
E2
E1
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
11
10
10
47
46
45
44
43
42
41
40
39
38
37
36
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
64
63
62
61
60
59
58
57
56
55
54
53
52
51
50
49
48
BASE UNIT
GROUND ROD (W2)
1
X99
X0
TERMINAL BLOCK X0
X42 X41 X8
A15
X0.11 X0.10 X0.9 X0.8 X0.7 X0.6 X0.5 X0.4 X0.3 X0.2 X0.1
Figure 6-13: Cable and ground connection points diagram
(Rev. 3)
6-21
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Installation
6.6
Image intensifier installation
G
NOTE:
Assemble the I.I. trolley with the four Spot Film Device support wheels,
using the nuts supplied, in such a way as to get a trolley like the one
shown in the Figure, for the purposes of the I.I. installation.
Figure 6-14
(Rev. 3)
6-23
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Installation
6.6.1
9-12” fixed Image Intensifier (I.I.) installation
1. Place the I.I. on the trolley (Figure 6-14). Place the remote-controlled
table high enough to allow the I.I. to be positioned under the Spot
Film Device. Move the I.I. to the table and position it in such a way
that the cable outlet on the I.I. power unit side is towards the base of
the machine.
2. Use the lift control to lower the table until the I.I.'s fastening holes
are aligned with those on the plates. You should proceed cautiously
at this stage to avoid any damage occurring to the I.I. It is therefore
advisable to lower the table in small steps.
Figure 6-15
3. Fasten the I.I. to the plates with the screws, and tighten.
APOLLO
6-24
(Rev. 3)
SERVICE MANUAL
Installation
4. Check transversal and longitudinal alignment between the Spot Film
Device and the I.I. If any alignment between the two parts is
necessary, slacken screws "A" (Figure 6-16) on both sides to get
sideways I.I movement relative to the Spot Film Device, or screws "B"
(Figure 6-16) for longitudinal movements; once the desired position
has been obtained, tighten the screws.
A
B
Figure 6-16
5. Connect the I.I. wiring and the angulation motor wiring on the left
side of the end wall of the Spot Film Device using the cable clip
provided (Figure 6-17). The cables must be wired up so that they run
"parallel" to each other, following the path of the cables already in the
machine.
Cable clip
Figure 6-17
(Rev. 3)
6-25
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Installation
6.6.2
16" fixed Image Intensifier (I.I.) installation (Toshiba model)
1. Using the bolts supplied fix the two I.I. fixing plates as indicated in
Figure 6-18 taking into consideration the 530 mm (20.9") distance
between the two guides. Any adjustments to this distance may be
made with the plate-guide fixing screws.
530 (20.9")
Figure 6-18
2. Place the I.I. on the trolley (Figure 6-14). Place the remote-controlled
table high enough to allow the I.I. to be positioned under the Spot
Film Device. Move the I.I. to the table and position it in such a way
that the cable outlet on the I.I. power unit side is towards the base of
the machine.
3. Use the lift control to lower the table so that the I.I. fixing plates run
inside the Spot Film Device's walls and that the holes "A" (6 per side Figure 6-19) on the walls are aligned with the fastening holes on the
I.I. support guides. It is advisable to proceed cautiously at this stage
to prevent any damage to the I.I. occurring. It is therefore best to
lower the table by small steps.
4. Fasten the plates to the Spot Film Device's shoulders by means of the
screws provided.
5. Check transversal and longitudinal alignment between the Spot Film
Device and the I.I. If any alignment between the two parts is
necessary, slacken the I.I. guide-plate support fastenings screws to
get sideways I.I movement relative to the Spot Film Device or screws
"A" (6 per side - Figure 6-19) for longitudinal movements; once the
desired position has been obtained, tighten the screws.
APOLLO
6-26
(Rev. 3)
SERVICE MANUAL
Installation
A
Figure 6-19
6. Connect the I.I. wiring and the angulation motor wiring on the left
side of the end wall of the Spot Film Device using the cable clip
provided (Figure 6-20). The cables must be wired up so that they run
"parallel" to each other, following the path of the cables already in the
machine.
Cable clip
Figure 6-20
(Rev. 3)
6-27
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Installation
6.6.3
Image Intensifier (I.I.) with lift installation
WARNING:
The I.I. lift movement can produce collision between I.I. and inner SFD
parts, proceed with maximum attention to the actions indicated in the
following paragraphs.
The positioning of the I.I. lift is obtained by a motor which movement is
stopped by 2 microswitches: S28 for upper position, S29 for lower
position. The I.I.-lift end run positions can be adjusted modifying the
microswitches activating cams.
APOLLO
6-28
(Rev. 3)
SERVICE MANUAL
Installation
6.6.3.1
9” with lift Image Intensifier (I.I.) installation
1. Check that:
− measuring chamber is removed
− grid in park position
− cassettes jaws completely open.
2. Connect the I.I. lift cable to X106 terminals.
3. Select cell 133 (group 100 paragraph 10.1.15) and by the compressor
joystick move the I.I. lift up to the upper and limit. Get out from
set-up.
4. Fix the I.I. anchorage plate as indicated in the Figure.
Spacer
Anchorage
plate
Figure 6-21
5. Place the I.I. on the trolley (Figure 6-14). Place the remote-controlled
table high enough to allow the I.I. to be positioned under the Spot
Film Device. Move the I.I. to the table at the point of the lift assembly.
6. Lower the table by sliding the I.I. inside the walls of the Spot Film
Device until the 4 fixing holes on the I.I. anchorage plate are in line
with the corresponding four in the lift plate (Figure 6-22). You should
proceed cautiously at this stage to avoid any damage occurring to the
I.I. It is therefore advisable to lower the table in small steps. Screw
the anchorage plate to the lift plate without tightening using the
screws provided.
7. Insert the 4 spacers provided (2 each side - Figure 6-22) between the
I.I. anchoring plate and the lift plate. this enables proper alignment of
the two plates.
(Rev. 3)
6-29
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Installation
8. Check longitudinal alignment between the Spot Film Device and the
I.I. Longitudinal alignment is obtained with the supplementary
spacers that are inserted where there are those already present.
Tighten the screws at the slots' midline; this ensures correct
sideways alignment between the I.I. and the Spot Film Device.
Spacer
Figure 6-22
9. The distance between cassette jaw lower side and I.I. must be never
less than 5 mm (0.2"); if necessary adjust the lower end run cam.
10. Check that the conditions on item 1 are the same, set cell 133 again
and move by joystick the I.I. lift on the upper end limit. Check that
during the I.I. lift movement does not happens any collision between
I.I. and internal SFD parts.
11. Connect the I.I. wiring, the angulation motor wiring and the lift
wiring on the left side of the end wall of the Spot Film Device using
the cable clip provided (Figure 6-17). The cables must be wired up so
that they run "parallel" to each other, following the path of the cables
already in the machine.
APOLLO
6-30
(Rev. 3)
SERVICE MANUAL
Installation
6.6.3.2
12” Image Intensifier (I.I.) with lift installation
1. Check that:
− measuring chamber is removed
− grid in park position
− cassettes jaws completely open.
2. Connect the I.I. lift cable to X106 terminals.
3. Select cell 133 (group 100 paragraph 10.1.15) and by the compressor
joystick move the I.I. lift up to the upper and limit. Get out from
set-up.
4. Fix the I.I. anchorage plate as indicated in the Figure.
Spacer
Anchorage
plate
Figure 6-23
5. Place the I.I. on the trolley (Figure 6-14). Place the remote-controlled
table high enough to allow the I.I. to be positioned under the Spot
Film Device. Move the I.I. to the table at the point of the lift assembly.
6. Lower the table by sliding the I.I. inside the walls of the Spot Film
Device until the 4 fixing holes on the I.I. anchorage plate are in line
with the corresponding four in the lift plate (Figure 6-24). You should
proceed cautiously at this stage to avoid any damage occurring to the
I.I. It is therefore advisable to lower the table in small steps. Screw
the anchorage plate to the lift plate without tightening using the
screws provided.
7. Insert the 4 spacers provided (2 each side - Figure 6-24) between the
I.I. anchoring plate and the lift plate. This enables proper alignment
of the two plates.
(Rev. 3)
6-31
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Installation
8. Check longitudinal alignment between the Spot Film Device and the
I.I. Longitudinal alignment is obtained with the supplementary
spacers that are inserted where there are those already present.
Tighten the screws at the slots' midline; this ensures correct
sideways alignment between the I.I. and the Spot Film Device.
Spacer
Figure 6-24
9. The distance between cassette jaw lower side and I.I. must be never
less than 5 mm (0.2"); if necessary adjust the lower end run cam.
10. Check that the conditions on item 1 are the same, set cell 133 again
and move by joystick the I.I. lift on the upper end limit. Check that
during the I.I. lift movement does not happens any collision between
I.I. and internal SFD parts.
11. Connect the I.I. wiring, the angulation motor wiring and the lift
wiring on the left side of the end wall of the Spot Film Device using
the cable clip provided (Figure 6-17). The cables must be wired up so
that they run "parallel" to each other, following the path of the cables
already in the machine.
APOLLO
6-32
(Rev. 3)
SERVICE MANUAL
Installation
6.6.3.3
16” Image Intensifier (I.I.) with lift installation
1. Check that:
− measuring chamber is removed
− grid in park position
− cassettes jaws completely open.
2. Connect the I.I. lift cable to X106 terminals.
3. Select cell 133 (group 100 paragraph 10.1.15) and by the compressor
joystick move the I.I. lift up to the upper and limit. Get out from
set-up.
4. Fix the I.I.'s two anchoring brackets as indicated in the Figure.
Anchoring
brackets
Figure 6-25
5. Place the I.I. on the trolley (Figure 6-14).Place the remote-controlled
table high enough to allow the I.I. to be positioned under the Spot
Film Device. Move the I.I. to the table at the point of the lift assembly.
6. Use the lift control to lower the table by sliding the I.I. inside the
walls of the Spot Film Device until the 4 fixing holes on the anchoring
brackets are in line with the corresponding four holes in the lift plate
(Figure 6-26). You should proceed cautiously at this stage to avoid
any damage occurring to the I.I. It is therefore advisable to lower the
table in small steps. Screw the anchorage plate to the lift plate
without tightening using the screws provided.
(Rev. 3)
6-33
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Installation
7. Check longitudinal alignment between the Spot Film Device and the
I.I. longitudinal alignment is obtained with the supplementary
spacers that are inserted where the bracket fastening screws are
(Figure 6-26). Tighten the screws at the slots' midline; this ensures
correct sideways alignment between the I.I. and the Spot Film Device.
Spacer
Figure 6-26
8. The distance between cassette jaw lower side and I.I. must be never
less than 5 mm (0.2"); if necessary adjust the lower end run cam.
9. Check that the conditions on item 1 are the same, set cell 133 again
and move by joystick the I.I. lift on the upper end limit. Check that
during the I.I. lift movement does not happens any collision between
I.I. and internal SFD parts.
10. Connect the I.I. wiring, the angulation motor wiring and the lift
wiring on the left side of the end wall of the Spot Film Device using
the cable clip provided (Figure 6-20). The cables must be wired up so
that they run "parallel" to each other, following the path of the cables
already in the machine.
APOLLO
6-34
(Rev. 3)
SERVICE MANUAL
Installation
6.7
Installation of the Tube - Collimator group
G
NOTE:
International regulations require that the total filtration of the X-ray
beam must be greater than 2.5 mm Al.eq.
The Villa collimators have 0.5 mm Al.eq. filtration; The Ralco collimators
have 1.0 mm Al.eq. filtration;
Taking into consideration the filtration in the ray tube, as shown on its
technical plate, add the necessary filtration with the aluminium disks
provided with the tube or with the collimator kit; these disks can be
inserted into the ray output window.
G
NOTE:
The collimator kit consists of the following:
• collimator fastening cone H=17 mm (0.7")
• additional 0.5 mm Al filters
• collimator installation spacers of 1.5 mm (0.06") and of 3 mm (0.1")
• 6x25 and 6x30 fastening screws
1. Position the tube support in the corresponding fastening pin so as to
join together the two tube rotation release levers (Figure 6-27). Insert
the support screw onto the pin and tighten in the position that it is
best for the installation of the tube.
Fastening
pin
Support
screw
Release
levers
Tube
support
Figure 6-27
(Rev. 3)
6-35
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Installation
G
NOTE:
Point 2 only applies where the system is supplied with the Villa or the
Ralco collimator.
2. Position the tube on the support and at the same time apply the
collimator fastening cone (Figure 6-28). When doing this take due
account of the distance between the tube focus and the
cone/collimator plane; to ensure proper correspondence between the
field of the rays and the collimator light field, this distance must be
80±1 mm (3.15"±0.04"). To do this the collimator kit's spacers have to
be used (refer to the technical data that comes with the X-ray tube to
determine the point of focus). Fix in position with the collimator's
screws, taking account of the fact that the choice of screw length is
determined by the number of spacers employed.
WARNING:
Incorrect choice of screw length may lead to inadequate fastening of the
X-ray tube group where short screws are used or possible damage to the
casing if the screws used are too long.
3. Install the collimator on the cone using the four fastening hooks and
connect it to the X45 cable.
The collimator cable length is calculated to permit machine servicing
even when the collimator is out of beam. With the group at 0°
rotation, the corresponding micro safety switch inside the arm must
be in n.a. condition.
X-ray tube
Spacer
Collimator
fastening cone
Collimator
Figure 6-28
APOLLO
6-36
(Rev. 3)
SERVICE MANUAL
Installation
4. Wire up the cables inside the arm (Figure 6-29).
The cables must be arranged so that the tube can rotate without
them getting damaged. The abundance required for that to be
permitted will be hidden inside the arm's top cover. Make sure the
micro safety switch's cable with the tube at 0° is anchored to the arm
so that it is independent from the rest of the cables. These must be
as far as possible free from clamps, with just the minimum
indispensable, to prevent damage on tube rotation. It is advisable
only to use the fastening points indicated for the machine.
Figure 6-29
5. Once the cabling inside the X-ray tube support arm and checked its
functionality, after having tested the rotation of the X-ray tube
proceed to mount the arm cover (Figure 6-30 – 4 screws preset on the
column stand + 8 screws on the arm). To complete this operation it is
necessary to power the SID and remove the chain and its right side
support (Figure 6-31) gaining access to the fixing screws on the
column stand.
6. Join the cover to the X-ray tube support by the two front half circles
(Figure 6-30).
Only at this point proceed to the cabling of the cables inside the
column.
(Rev. 3)
6-37
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Installation
Figure 6-30
7. Open the chain, previously removed, and insert all cables coming
from the X-ray tube collimator group, making them run parallel.
8. Close and mount back the chain on its supports and then on the
column, having the cables coming out from the left side , on the back
of the chain (Figure 6-31).
9. Tighten the cables on the dedicated fixing point on the column,
following the routing of the cables already present; insert them in the
back chains.
Chain support
Figure 6-31
APOLLO
6-38
(Rev. 3)
SERVICE MANUAL
Installation
6.8
Mounting the covers
When installation is complete, mount the covers, referring to Figure 6-32
and Figure 6-33.
Install the compressor arm with the cup.
(Rev. 3)
6-39
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Installation
THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
APOLLO
6-40
(Rev. 3)
SERVICE MANUAL
Installation
*
(*) Cover supplied only where there is I.I. lift
Figure 6-32: Covers installation diagram (front view)
(Rev. 3)
6-41
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Installation
Figure 6-33: Covers installation diagram (rear view)
(Rev. 3)
6-43
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Installation
6.9
Tabletop assembly
6.9.1
Curved tabletop assembly
The tabletop is symmetric and can be assembled in either directions.
On each support arm there are four locking pins that coincide with the
relative holes on the tabletop head mounts.
1. Remove the two iron beams at the extremities of the tabletop,
generally used to avoid possible plane deflections during transport.
2. Unscrew the eight nuts from the locking pins and the relative eight
washers.
3. Position the tabletop on the arms till the locking pins fit into the
relative holes (Figure 6-34).
4. Screw on all the eight pins the relative nuts and washers; lock tight.
Spacer "B"
Nuts and washers
Spacer "B"
Pins
Figure 6-34
(Rev. 3)
6-45
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Installation
WARNING:
The distance between table top and upper SFD cover, could require an
adaptation to avoid any collision risk between SFD cover and accessories
fixation device.
Proceed as follow:
a.
By moving table top and scanning, put the patient handle at the
centre of the external part of upper SFD cover (Figure 6-35).
b. Put the table in vertical position and check the distance between
upper SFD cover and fixation handle device: it must be not less than
2/3 mm (Figure 6-35). If distance is less than indicated, insert spacer
"B" as shows in Figure 6-34 up to obtain the desiderate size.
2/3mm
Figure 6-35
c.
APOLLO
Move the table up to horizontal position. The gap between table top
and accessories fixation increases because of the SFD small flexion
caused by the I.I. weight. Charge the table top in horizontal position
with a medium patient weight (70-100 kg / 154.3-220.5 lbs) and
check that distance between SFD and accessories fixation is not less
than 4/5 mm. Otherwise insert other spacers "B" up to obtain as
indicated.
6-46
(Rev. 3)
SERVICE MANUAL
Installation
6.9.2
Flat tabletop assembly
The tabletop is symmetric and can be assembled in either directions.
On each support arm there are four locking pins that coincide with the
relative holes on the tabletop fixing plates.
1. Remove from the tabletop the four fixing plates "A".
2. Unscrew the eight nuts from the locking pins and the relative eight
washers.
3. Lock the fixing plates "A" on the support arms by the pins and
relevant nuts (Figure 6-36).
4. Lock the tabletop to the fixing plates by the eight screws removed on
item 1.
Nuts and washers
Spacer "B"
Fixing plates "A"
Pins
Spacer "B"
Figure 6-36
(Rev. 3)
6-47
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Installation
WARNING:
The distance between table top and upper SFD cover, could require an
adaptation to avoid any collision risk.
Proceed as follow:
a.
Put the table in vertical position and check the distance between
upper SFD cover and tabletop profile: it must be not less than
2/3 mm. If distance is less than indicated, insert spacer "B" as shows
in Figure 6-36 up to obtain the desiderate size.
b. Move the table up to horizontal position. The gap between table top
and tabletop profile increases because of the SFD small flexion
caused by the I.I. weight. Charge the table top in horizontal position
with a medium patient weight (70-100 kg / 154.3-220.5 lbs) and
check that distance between SFD and tabletop profile is not less than
4/5 mm. Otherwise insert other spacers "B" up to obtain as
indicated.
APOLLO
6-48
(Rev. 3)
SERVICE MANUAL
Installation
6.10
Final verifications
Once the mechanical installation has been completed, it is necessary to
configure the Apollo table and check its functionality.
To do so proceed as follows:
(Rev. 3)
•
Check that the beam movement does not interfere with the basement
and if necessary implement the corrective actions described in the
procedure at the end of paragraph 6.5, point from 8 to 13
•
Centre the middle beam into plastic sliding parts of the base when
tilting angle is negative (trendelembourg) as described on
paragraph 6.5, items from 10 to 15
•
Enter the room dimension data (see paragraph 11.1)
•
Enter configuration parameters (see paragraph 11.1)
•
Measure the current real speed of the movements (see paragraph
11.1); this operation is fundamental in case the power line is 60Hz
•
Check the functionality of all movements for the different functional
modalities (Spot film device, Tomography, Angiography, Digital) and
verify the anticollision safeties
•
After having completing the calibration of the X-ray tube, implement
centering procedures for X-ray tube – Collimator - Serial Changer - II
(see chapter 19)
•
Check that the cassette pusher position is correctly adjusted in
function of the cassette type used.
It must press in such a way the cassette position is maintained also
with table in vertical position, but without create a critical condition
for cassette ejection. The check must be done with minimum 18x24
(8"x10") and 35x43 (14"x17") cassettes size. If the pusher adjustment
is not optimized, unlock the 6 fixing screws and slide the pusher
plate "A" in the required direction (Figure 6-37).
6-49
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Installation
Pusher plate "A"
Figure 6-37
•
APOLLO
Check centering for the different cassette format (see chapter 19); if
necessary correct as needed.
6-50
(Rev. 3)
SERVICE MANUAL
The functioning logic of the table
7
THE FUNCTIONING LOGIC OF THE
TABLE
The Apollo table has been designed with an electronic leading-edge
management and control circuit.
The circuit is based on PCB’s called:
•
A1 CPU PCB
•
A2 "input" PCB
•
A3 "output" PCB
•
A4 Spot Film Device motor "power driver" PCB (not present in "All
Digital" version)
•
A14 "control panel" PCB
•
A15 "compressor motor command" PCB (not present in the version
without compressor).
•
A16 "additional collimator filters control" PCB (for collimator with
motorized additional filters movement version only).
It is easy to deduce what the function of the PCB’s listed above is from
their names and they are situated in the electrical cabinet with exception
of the control panel PCB.
Some information about the characteristics of the system's CPU that
could come in useful, is given below.
The "control panel" A14 PCB is fitted with a Motorola MC68332
processor and a 128K x8 Eprom.
The job of the program contained in this Eprom is to decode the state of
the joystick and the keys and send this information to the CPU on the
CAN BUS.
Moreover, its job is also to receive the status of the led and the graphic
and alphanumeric strings to show on the display, again from the CPU.
The A1"CPU" PCB is also equipped with a Motorola MC68332 processor
the job of which is to act as the main processor and a 512K x8 Eprom.
The incorporated program manages the entire functioning logic of the
equipment including, as said before, dialoguing with the control panel.
Also present are:
•
a flash eprom containing the alarm history and the machine cycle
times
•
an EEprom containing the equipment set up data and the positions
related to MODE 1-2-3 keys.
•
a Ram containing the date and time. Furthermore, the data regarding
the alarm history and the machine cycles are initially deposited in
the Ram and every ten minutes they are transferred to the flash
eprom.
(Rev. 3)
7-1
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
The functioning logic of the table
There is also an AT89C2051 processor on the CPU that functions as a
Supervisor microprocessor with an internal eprom containing the
supervision and serial and parallel control program for the channels
responsible for the movements.
The release of the equipment management software contained in the
Eprom on the CPU is shown on the control panel display for three
seconds when the equipment is powered up.
APOLLO
7-2
(Rev. 3)
SERVICE MANUAL
The functioning logic of the table
7.1
Functioning sequences
7.1.1
Powering up and initialisation sequence
On powering up the electronics of the CPU, the control panel, the input
PCB and part of the output PCB is powered through the T2 transformer.
At this point the main processor and the controller begin to perform the
checks that can make sure all the conditions are regular.
If that is the case, both the main processor and the controller activate the
respective "ready" relay after an interval of three seconds.
The open contacts of these two relays are connected in series.
One phase of the coil of the power remote switch K1L is interrupted by
the series of these two relays.
When they are activated, they therefore permit the energising of the K1L
that, through the closure of its contacts, will power the table's power
circuits.
At this point, the procedure for the initialisation of the Spot Film Device
begins the purpose of which is to move the inside parts of the Spot Film
Device to the default positions.
While this is happening, i.e. from the time the power circuits have been
powered up and when the organs of the Spot Film Device have reached
the positions defined, all the movements of the table are disabled and the
control panel's display shows the flashing message.
"Initialisation. Please wait"
When the initialisation procedure is successfully completed, the control
panel display changes and shows the data for the active mode.
All the table movements and the functions will, at this point, be enabled.
(Rev. 3)
7-3
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
The functioning logic of the table
7.1.2
Activation sequence for a movement
When a joystick, enabled to activate a movement is pressed, 2
microswitches are activated simultaneously.
The first sends the movement activation signal, along the CAN BUS line,
from the control panel to the main PCB.
The second opens the single fault circuit (SF) that is controlled either
from the main processor or the controller.
If all the conditions are in order, the processor will activate the circuits
that control the engines.
Once the feedback potmeter is launched it informs the processor about
the position and speed of the movement itself.
In order to indicate the working conditions, all the outputs are fitted with
a signalling led that lights up when an output, whether a movement
output or a controlling output for an external accessory, is active.
As a block diagram of the sequences described above, the below is useful
for explaining the functioning logic in even clearer terms.
APOLLO
7-4
(Rev. 3)
SERVICE MANUAL
The functioning logic of the table
BLOCK DIAGRAM
POWERING UP SEQUENCE
BLOCK DIAGRAM
SIMPLE MOVEMENT
Table power up
Electronics power
supply
T2 ON
Check
electronics OK
YES
↓
3 sec.
READY relay ON
K1L ON
Hardware electronics
check
OK
YES
↓
End of message
"Initialisation"
SW table motor
movement enabling
NO
→
Movement Joystick
activation
SF OK
YES ↓
Send SF circuit
Hardware Opening
Data serial
SF OK
YES ↓
Movement or
logic output
activation
SF OK
YES ↓
HW power activation
SF OK
Signalling
ALARMS
↑
NO
→
Turning off
READY relay
YES ↓
Motor movement
SF OK
YES ↓
Potmeter feed back
SF OK
NO
→
↓
NO
→
↓
NO
→
NO
→
↓
READY relay
power down
Signalling
ALARMS
NO
→
↑
NO
→
YES ↓
Joystick release
output power down
Movement stop
SF reclosure SF OK
(Rev. 3)
7-5
↑
NO
→
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
The functioning logic of the table
7.2
Fault Conditions
Three different anomaly conditions can arise while the equipment is in
operation:
•
Condition fault
•
Operating fault
•
Power circuit faults.
These three different situations cause the consequences that are
analysed below.
7.2.1
Generation of a condition alarm
While the equipment is in operation a fault can occur in the table or one
of the accessories connected to it.
If this fault does not compromise the functioning of the system (Example:
the generator is not "ready" within the set time), a few movements are
disabled by the SW and the relative alarm flashes on the display of the
control panel accompanied by an intermittent "beep".
To remove the alarm and re-enable all the movements it will be necessary
to push the reset joystick downwards twice.
The first time silences the "beep", the second resets the alarm and
restores the normal conditions.
7.2.2
Generation of a operating alarm
If the processor recognises an abnormal situation caused by the SF
control or by other components interacting with the processor, that could
seriously compromise the functioning of the equipment, the READY
relays are deenergised and a flashing alarm appears on the control panel.
This condition cannot be reset as it is a serious fault.
A search must be made to see what the cause of this effect is.
To remove the alarm and re-enable the movements the equipment must
be turned off.
APOLLO
7-6
(Rev. 3)
SERVICE MANUAL
The functioning logic of the table
7.2.3
Generation of an alarm caused by the power circuit
If a movement of the table or the Spot Film Device should for any reason
go over the SW run determined by the potmeter, an emergency end of run
will be intercepted.
This will entail the turning off of the power remote switch K1L with the
consequent opening of the power control input (X15 pin 10).
This will mean the main processor will turn off the READY relays and the
controller and generate flashing alarm 080 on the control panel display.
It will therefore be necessary to turn off the equipment to remove the
alarm situation.
After removing the cause of the failure, the powering up procedure after
the power cutting out must be followed in order to restore the normal
operating conditions described in the relevant chapter.
As a block diagram of the sequences described above, the one below is
useful for explaining the functioning logic in even clearer terms.
(Rev. 3)
7-7
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
The functioning logic of the table
CONDITION
ALARM
FUNCTIONAL
ALARM
POWER
ALARM
Malfunction that is:
resettable
Malfunction that is:
- Single Fault
- Component
Malfunction that is:
Table emergency
Flashing
alarm
on display
Deenergising:
K1L
←
Turning off
READY relay
Joystick reset:
- 1st beep OFF
- 2nd beep alarm
OFF
↑
Alarm
on display:
flashing
NON resettable
Alarm on display:
080 flashing
Cause of
malfunction:
removed
YES ↓
Restore
normal operating
conditions
NO
→
Turning off
equipment
Turning off
equipment
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
APOLLO
7-8
Input opening
X15 pin 10
(Rev. 3)
SERVICE MANUAL
The functioning logic of the table
8
IN/OUT INTERFACE CONNECTION
All the input and output signals towards the accessories such as:
generator, TV chain etc. are connected to the input and output PCB’s by
means of the X0 terminal clamp.
The hardware characteristics of these signals are listed below.
8.1
Output signals from the Apollo table
The outputs shown below are dependent on an open collector circuit
(ULN2803) NPN active at 0 V. No circuits with pull up resistances of over
30 Vdc with maximum current not exceeding 100 mA may be connected
to these outputs.
(Rev. 4)
X0
Connector
Description
34
X27 pin 5
Digital reconstruction
35
X27 pin 24
2nd tomographic speed set
36
X27 pin 6
3rd tomographic speed set
37
X27 pin 25
Request for fluoro
38
X27 pin 7
Exposure request
39
X27 pin 26
Preparation request
40
X27 pin 8
Digital preparation request
41
X27 pin 27
Request for second snap to be taken
42
X27 pin 9
1st tomographic speed set
43
X27 pin 28
4th tomographic speed set
44
X27 pin 10
7° tomography angle set
45
X27 pin 29
20° tomography angle set
46
X27 pin 11
30° tomography angle set
47
X27 pin 30
45° tomography angle set
48
X27 pin 12
Rays ON without request
49
X27 pin 31
Man/auto fluoro Kv selection
52
X27 pin 14
Angio steps
53
X27 pin 33
Motion detection
54
X27 pin 15
Recursive filter x0 /
Collimator additional filter 2 mm Al
55
X27 pin 34
Recursive filter x4 /
Collimator additional filter 1 mm Al +
0.1 mm Cu
56
X27 pin 16
Recursive filter x8 /
Collimator additional filter 1 mm Al +
0.2 mm Cu
8-1
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
The functioning logic of the table
The manual fluoro Kv control output is dependent on an analogical
circuit (TLC271) with a range of voltages from 1.8 Vdc to 6.5 Vdc. It is
possible to apply a maximum load of 5 mA.
X0
Connector
59
X27 pin 19
Description
Man. Fluoro Kv control analogue
The control outlets for the room monitor depend on an analogue circuit
(TLC274) with a resistance range from 0 Ω to 4.7 KΩ. It is possible apply
a max load of 3 W.
X0
Connector
Description
61
X28 pin 1
Mon. Brightness control analogue
62
X28 pin 2
Mon. Contrast control analogue
The following outputs are part of an optoisolator circuit (LH1520) that
must be polarised. The maximum voltage and current applied must not
exceed 25 Vac with 70 mA.
APOLLO
X0
Connector
Description
28
X27 pin 3
Common for im. Scan reverse circuit
26
X27 pin 4
Right/left image scan reverse
27
X27 pin 22
Up/Down image scan reverse
32
X27 pin 1
Common for Zoom I.I. circuit
31
X27 pin 20
Maximum Zoom (minimum field)
30
X27 pin 2
Medium zoom (medium field)
29
X27 pin 21
Minimum Zoom (maximum field)
8-2
(Rev. 3)
SERVICE MANUAL
The functioning logic of the table
8.2
Input signals towards the Apollo table
The inputs below depend on an open collector circuit (74HC245) NPN
active at 0 V. This circuit formed with 24Vdc-referred pull-up resistors.
The typical absorption of these circuits is equal to 10 mA max.
X0
Connector
Description
12
X13 pin 1
Generator ready for rays
13
X13 pin 2
X-ray on
14
X13 pin 3
Digital work station
15
X13 pin 4
Spot Film Device work station
16
X13 pin 5
Ceiling stand safety (*)
17
X13 pin 6
External safety barrier (*)
18
X13 pin 7
Collimator additional filters out of position
(*) Jumpered to ground by default to disable the feature.
(Rev. 3)
8-3
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
The functioning logic of the table
THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
APOLLO
8-4
(Rev. 3)
SERVICE MANUAL
Configuration access and description of the data groups
9
CONFIGURATION ACCESS AND
DESCRIPTION OF THE DATA GROUPS
All the data necessary for the configuration, operation and adjustment of
the Apollo table, including the Checksum that is updated every time the
data varies, are contained in the EEprom.
When powering up, the data are compared, the Checksum of the data is
verified again and it is compared with that currently in the EEprom. If
there is no correspondence between the two pieces of data the alarm 090
is generated.
The data contained on the EEprom are sub-divided into "groups".
There can be up to 99 position "cells" inside each of these groups.
A storage position will therefore be configured with three figures of which:
0
↓
Number of the group
00
↓
Position of the cell
To access the read only function of the data contained in these cells it
will be enough to position the switch of the group of dip-switches on the
CPU at ON.
In order to be able to edit, therefore write new data in the cells, as well as
activating the switches, it will be necessary to key in an access code.
In the table below the subdivisions of groups of data and their functions,
the dip-switches to activate and the access codes to be keyed-in are
listed.
WARNING:
The Authorised Technician is recommended not to communicate these
codes so that non-authorised persons are prevented from entering the
memory cells and changing them, thereby causing the equipment to
malfunction.
The version of the installed software in the Eprom on the CPU is shown
on the display for 3 seconds every time the machine is turned on:
Software rel. X.XX
DD – MM – YY
HH.MM
where:
•
Row 1 = version of the software also shown on the label on the
Eprom
•
Row 2 = date and time of the compilation of the operating files.
(Rev. 3)
9-1
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Configuration access and description of the data groups
For any reporting of a malfunction or request for technical help, always
indicate the version of the software on the equipment.
The four access codes are :
C1 = 9006
C2 = 2573
C3 = 8425
C4 = 1541
The following table shows the dip switch combinations – access code and
the functions of the various groups.
Dip switch
Code
Group
Subroutine
1
2
3
4
1+2
C1
C2
C1
C2
C1
101
201
301
711
401
1+3
1+4
2+3
2+4
3+4
C3
701
751
721
731
850
Potmeter adjustment
Installation data
PDI controlled motor setting data
“time” setting -Reset alarm memory
Equipment dimension setting
Run shutters and cassette
Eeprom copying
Alarm history visualisation
Spot Film Device and table life test
Remote service function
Equipment cycles and time display and resetting
C3
C4
C4
The above mentioned groups are divided into positions.
The function of the various positions inside the groups is shown below.
Group
Position and function
Potmeter adjustment
From 101 to 133 setting of the maximum and
minimum of the various potmeters
From 201 to 262 typical settings linked to the
installation and the equipment
From 301 to 400 setting data for control of motors
with PDI function
711 = Time and date display
712 = Year setting
713 = Month setting
714 = Day setting
715 = Hour setting
716 = Minute setting
717 = Second setting
718 = Clock correction
719 = Reset alarm memory
Installation data
PDI controlled motor setting data
“Time” setting
Reset alarm memory
APOLLO
9-2
(Rev. 3)
SERVICE MANUAL
Configuration access and description of the data groups
Group
Position and function
Equipment dimension setting
Run shutters and cassette
Eeprom copying
From 401 to 686 dimensions and run setting
701 = Copy from EEprom to Ram
702 = Copy from Ram to EEprom
Alarm history visualisation
Extended diagnosis (from 1 to 20)
751 = Position and alarm data display
Spot Film Device part position and function display
753 = Joystick display
754 = Digital input display
755 = Digital output display
Reduced diagnosis (from 21 to 100)
800 = Alarm data display (2 alarms)
Spot Film Device and table life
721 = Life test choice
test
722 = Spot Film Device life test (not available on "All
Digital" version)
723 = Table life test
Remote service function
731 = Remote service function
Equipment cycle and time display 850 = Cycle and time display
and resetting
851 = Time display
852 = Time display
From 853 to 867 resetting cycles one field at a time
(Rev. 3)
9-3
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Configuration access and description of the data groups
THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
APOLLO
9-4
(Rev. 3)
SERVICE MANUAL
Access and adjustment of group 100 data
10
ACCESS AND ADJUSTMENT OF GROUP
100 DATA
To access the data contained in group 100 the procedures described
below must be followed.
v
Reading data
1. Turn off the equipment, turn switch 1 in the dip-switch assembly
in the CPU PCB to ON.
2. Turn on the equipment. The control panel display will show:
101
where:
101
(369)
-40.0°
2090/
Angulation…
(369)
-40.0°
2090 / 4096
Angulation min (head side)
= number of the group and the position
= value presently in the memory
= position that the organ has to reach
corresponding to the value at minimum
= current value of the potmeters expressed on
a scale with a maximum value of 4096
= brief description of the function of the
selected cell.
The following will only be shown for the cells referring to the
adjustment of collimator movements (from 117 to 122 included ):
117
where:
117
(492)
1178 mm
000 mm
2090/
Collimator…
(Rev. 3)
(492) 1178 mm 000 mm 2090 / 4096
Collimator width min (closed)
= number of the group and the position
= value presently in the memory
= current position of the SID
= position to reach
= current value of the potmeters expressed on
a scale with a maximum value of 4096
= brief description of the function of the
selected cell.
10-1
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Access and adjustment of group 100 data
WARNING:
The SID value must be 980 mm (38.6") during adjustment. If the value is
different when the MODE2 acceptance of storage to memory key is
pressed, the value is not accepted in the memory and alarm "088 Wrong
SID" will be shown on the display.
The value of the position to reach varies as the SID varies so the SID
value is only correct when it is 980 mm (38.6"). This value is the
dimension that the ray field (and light field for the convenience of the
measurement) must have at tabletop level.
3. By pressing the MODE3 and TEST keys it is possible to increase
and decrease the number of cells to be displayed, respectively. As
said beforehand, it is not possible in this phase to edit any
setting or perform any movement.
v
Data editing
1. Press key MODE1 and hold it down for 1 sec. When this time has
elapsed, the display will show:
002
0000
Key in access code
where:
002 = number of the position for the input of the access codes
0000 = position for the access code (see chapter 9).
2. Press key MODE2. The display will show the flashing message
CORR that indicates it is possible to write the access code.
3. Set the code relative to this data group (see chapter 9) by means
of the keys that, in this condition, become numbers in
accordance with the schematic below.
This setting will appear by scrolling from right to left on the
position for the inputting of the code.
APOLLO
10-2
(Rev. 3)
SERVICE MANUAL
Access and adjustment of group 100 data
4. Press key MODE2 to confirm.
If the confirmation key is not pressed within 15 sec. of the inputting
of the last digit, the flashing CORR message disappears, what is
written disappears from the displays and the non-edited data
remains in the memory.
However, if the confirmation key is pressed within the specified time,
the display will show the message:
Access to groups 101 – 301 – 401
that indicates that it is possible to access groups 100-300-400,
thanks to the use of the code that has just been keyed in, in function
of which switches are positioned at ON.
If the code keyed in is wrong, the following message appears on the
screen, instead:
Code incorrect: access denied
In this case, the operations must repeated from number 2.
5. If the code is correct, hold key MODE1 down for one second.
The display returns to the position of the group 100 abandoned on
entry to position 002.
(Rev. 3)
10-3
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Access and adjustment of group 100 data
10.1
Potmeter adjustment
As said before, the Apollo table bases the control of its movements on
the feedback generated by the potmeters.
These potmeters must therefore be adjusted, the reference value of the
maximum and end run voltages must, that is to say, be stored in the
corresponding cells in the EEprom.
At this point it will be possible to edit the data of the cells making up this
group.
It will also be possible to perform the movements for the adjustment of
the potmeters by using the compressor movement joystick.
In this program, only this joystick will be active (with the exception of the
adjustment of the beam and middle beam movements and collimator as
described further on) and the motor that is activated will depend on the
cell that is set.
If the joystick is pushed upwards, the direction of the set movement will
be towards its maximum and the potmeter value shown on the display
will increase.
If the joystick is pushed downwards, the direction of the movement will
be the opposite, towards its minimum, and the potmeter value will
decrease.
In this program the speed of the PDI movements are set permanently in
the adjustment software and cannot be modified.
To carry out the adjustment, and therefore memorise the new potmeter
value, key MODE2 must be pressed.
The display will show the following for three seconds:
**** ACCEPTED ****
to confirm that the memorisation has been successful.
At the same time, the data in brackets at the side of the group number
and position is updated with the new value.
WARNING:
During the adjustment phase, the anticollision program is not active so,
before performing any movement, make sure that that there is not risk of
collision during it.
Furthermore, since the software end runs are set in this program no
stopping on them is activated.
If the set run is exceed, the movement will hit the emergency switch
causing the equipment to stop.
APOLLO
10-4
(Rev. 3)
SERVICE MANUAL
Access and adjustment of group 100 data
10.1.1
Cell data and list
The limits of the movements are set by default during the factory's
predelivery testing of the equipment.
These limits are shown on the display depending on the cell that is set.
It is possible to vary these limits by modifying the data in the cells of
group 400, but in practice this operation is never performed. In fact this
modifies the functional characteristics of the table.
Furthermore, in order to ensure maximum safety also in cases where
there is a malfunction in the movement electronics control, there are
hardware emergency switches positioned in such a way as to cut in when
the software end run does not stop the movement. These positions break
the power supply to the hardware circuits (they determine the opening of
the K1L remote switch). Thus any modification of the run limits also
entails the mechanical repositioning of these switches.
In the table below the functions of group 100 cells are shown.
Cell Movement
Joyst.direct.
Value
Movement direction
Default.lim
101 Angulation
LOW
min
Anticlockwise (head
end)
-40.0°
102 Angulation
HIGH
max
Clockwise (feet side)
+40.0°
103 Scan
LOW
min
Left (head end)
-800 mm
104 Scan
HIGH
max
Right (feet side)
+800 mm
105 Main beam
LOW
min
Withdrawal / decrease
135 mm
106 Main beam
HIGH
max
Extension/ increase
683 mm
107 Middle beam
LOW
min
Withdrawal / decrease
135 mm
108 Middle beam
HIGH
max
Extension/ increase
740 mm
111 Transversal
tabletop
LOW
min
Inside
-160 mm
112 Transversal
tabletop
HIGH
max
Outside
+160 mm
113 SID
LOW
min
LOW
1016 mm
114 SID
HIGH
max
HIGH
1516 mm
Square
Iris
117 Collimator width
LOW
min
Closed
000 mm
000 mm
118 Collimator width
HIGH
max
Open
490 mm
415 mm
119 Height collim.
LOW
min
Closed
000 mm
000 mm
120 Height collim.
HIGH
max
Open
490 mm
415 mm
121 Optional
Iris collim.
LOW
min
Closed
N.A.
85 mm
122 Optional
Iris collim.
HIGH
max
Open
N.A.
570 mm
123 Compressor
LOW/HIGH
min
Descent/Rise
00.0 kg
124 Compressor
LOW/HIGH
max
Descent/Rise
15.5 kg
(Rev. 3)
10-5
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Access and adjustment of group 100 data
Cell
Movement
Joyst.direct.
Value
Movement direction
125
Grid
LOW
min
Park direction
000 mm
126
Grid
HIGH
max
Field direction
560 mm
127
Cassette close
LOW
min
Closes
146 mm
128
Cassette close
HIGH
max
Opens
463 mm
129
Cross
subdivision
LOW
min
Left (head end)
-65.0 mm
130
Cross
subdivision
HIGH
max
Right (feet side)
+65.0 mm
131
Shutters
LOW
min
Towards opening
000.0 mm
132
Shutters
HIGH
max
Towards overlap
(cross subdiv.)
455.0 mm
133
Optional
I.I. lift
LOW/HIGH
G
min/max Descent/Rise
Default.Lim
Switch high=ON
Switch low=ON
NOTE:
Position 133 does not refer to a potmeter but is used for the adjustment
of the switches of the end runs of the I.I. lift assembly when fitted. When
one switch is active on the display the ON value is shown, while the other
has the OFF value.
As said before, the default value that the movement must reach at the
minimum and maximum is shown on the display.
Once this position has been reached, the potmeter must indicate a near
value (a tolerance of up to 100 units can be reached) as shown in the
following table.
If not, release the potmeter, reach the position required with the
movement then turn the potmeter until reaching the indicated value.
Lock the potmeter in position and store the value to memory.
Compliance with this value makes it possible to ensure that the potmeter
is not damaged mechanically as a result of a position that leads to exceed
its mechanical stop, and the potmeter is used in the central area, thus
avoiding using the limits that often turn out to be critical.
As far as the position to reach to carry out the adjustments of the
minimum and maximum positions, it will be shown how to measure the
value to reach, on the next few pages by means of pictures and
descriptions.
In some cases, this measurement is different from what is shown on the
display, as shown in the last column of the proceeding table.
This is because the indicated value is the result of software calculations
having table points of origin as a reference but, in some case, it is
intricate and difficult to make these measurements in practice.
This is why points other than those shown in the figures have been
chosen to facilitate the calibration.
APOLLO
10-6
(Rev. 3)
SERVICE MANUAL
Access and adjustment of group 100 data
Cell
Movement
Value
Movement direction
101
Angulation
min
Anticlockwise (head end)
approx.334
102
Angulation
max
Clockwise (feet side)
approx.3762
103
Scan
min
Left (head end)
approx.117
104
Scan
max
Right (feet side)
approx.3979
105
Main beam
min
Withdrawal / decrease
approx.350
106
Main beam
max
Extension/ increase
approx.3745
107
Middle beam
min
Withdrawal / decrease
approx.360
108
Middle beam
max
Extension/ increase
approx.3735
111
Transversal
tabletop
min
Inside
approx.232
112
Transversal
tabletop
max
Outside
approx.3863
113
SID
min
LOW
approx.341
114
SID
max
HIGH
approx.3754
117
Collimator width
min
Closed
approx.790
118
Collimator width
max
Open
approx.3160
119
Height collim.
min
Closed
approx.880
120
Height collim.
max
Open
approx.3050
121
Optional
Iris collim.
min
Closed
approx.950
122
Optional
Iris collim.
max
Open
approx.3370
123
Compressor
min
Descent/Rise
approx.1880
124
Compressor
max
Descent/Rise
approx.3520
125
Grid
min
Park direction
approx.205
126
Grid
max
Field direction
approx.3710
127
Cassette close
min
Closes
approx.360
128
Cassette close
max
Opens
approx.3730
129
Cross
subdivision
min
Left (head end)
approx.1430
130
Cross
subdivision
max
Right (feet side)
approx.2640
131
Shutters
min
Towards opening
approx.330
132
Shutters
max
Towards overlap (cross
subdiv.)
approx.3740
(Rev. 3)
10-7
Potmeter value
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Access and adjustment of group 100 data
10.1.2
ANGULATION potmeter adjustment (cells 101 – 102)
To carry out this adjustment, it is necessary to remove the covers of the
scan group.
At this point, the Spot Film Device support plate can be seen showing the
column tilting reference marks.
The limits of the angulation are obtained by bringing the upper edge of
the column to correspond to reference lines on the Spot Film Device
support.
With a level goniometer it will be possible to carry out a further check of
the soundness of the min and max positions reached.
Take the column towards the minimum (head side), select cell 101 and
store to memory.
Repeat the operation for the maximum (feet side) and memorise in cell
102.
-40°
+40°
Reference
marks
Figure 10-1: ANGULATION potmeter adjustment (cells 101 – 102)
APOLLO
10-8
(Rev. 3)
SERVICE MANUAL
Access and adjustment of group 100 data
10.1.3
SCAN potmeter adjustment (cells 103 – 104)
Before starting the adjustment of this movement, you must:
1. Move the table into a horizontal position with the lift higher than the
minimum position. This ensures that when the scan is moved over its
full travel it does not create risks of collision between the II and the
floor.
2. Remove the left-hand cover of the scan group.
3. Remove the main beam's left-hand side cover.
Move the scan towards the minimum position (head side) that must be
found between the outer left-hand limit of the main beam and the side of
the Spot Film Device base plate. The point to be reached is 52 mm (2.0").
Select cell 103 and memorise the minimum value.
Move the carriage to the maximum position (feet side) and find the
1652 mm (65.0") measurement among the same references used for the
minimum.
Store the value in the cell 104.
1652mm
(65.0")
52mm
(2.0")
Figure 10-2: SCAN potmeter adjustment (cells 103 – 104)
(Rev. 3)
10-9
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Access and adjustment of group 100 data
10.1.4
MAIN BEAM and MIDDLE BEAM potmeter adjustment
(cells 105 ÷ 108)
When the main beam movement cells are select, as for all the other
adjustments, the movement is enabled by the compressor joystick.
Since just the main beam movement would make it impossible to reach
some positions, it is possible also to activate the middle beam movement
by means of the SID joystick.
The movements cannot take place at the same time, but the activation of
one excludes the other.
To carry out the minimum main beam and middle beam adjustment, it is
necessary to remove the II and, if a lift is present, bring the II attachment
plate to the high position.
Move the main beam in such a way that there is access to the verification
of the middle beam position. Move the middle beam downwards until it
ends up flat, while checking it with a bubble level (Figure 10-3); select
cell 107 and memorise the minimum middle beam value.
Bubble level
Figure 10-3: Minimum middle beam position (cell 107)
APOLLO
10-10
(Rev. 3)
SERVICE MANUAL
Access and adjustment of group 100 data
At this point bring the main beam downwards, in such a way as it ends
up flat, while checking with a bubble level (Figure 10-4).
Select cell 105 and memorise the minimum main beam value.
Bubble level
Figure 10-4: Minimum main beam position (cell 105)
At this point, take the main beam towards the maximum until it is
perpendicular to the ground, using a bubble level to check it is at right
angles (Figure 10-5); select the cell 106 and store the maximum value to
memory.
Bubble level
Figure 10-5: Maximum main beam position (cell 106)
(Rev. 3)
10-11
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Access and adjustment of group 100 data
WARNING:
In the main beam and middle beam adjustment phase, there are risks
that could damage the equipment very seriously.
In fact the combination of the main beam and middle beam movements
carried out incorrectly could cause a collision between the structure of
the main beam and the structure of the middle beam or a collision
between the main beam motor tube and the structure of the middle
beam. While in the first case the main beam-middle beam collision safety
switch protects the equipment, in the second a manoeuvring error would
cause irreparable damage to the main beam motor tube by bending it.
It is therefore fundamental, in addition to paying the utmost attention
before and during the activation of the movements, to follow the
instructions below to the letter.
At this point take the main beam towards the bottom until the extension
of the mechanical tube reaches 430 mm (16.9") (Figure 10-6) to be
measured between the extreme limit of the actuator and the upper edge
of the outside tube of the actuator.
430mm
(16.9")
Figure 10-6
APOLLO
10-12
(Rev. 3)
SERVICE MANUAL
Access and adjustment of group 100 data
Select cell 108 and take the middle beam towards the maximum until it
is perpendicular to the ground, using a bubble level to check it is at right
angles; at this point store the maximum value to memory.
Bubble level
Figure 10-7: Maximum middle beam position (cell 108)
(Rev. 3)
10-13
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Access and adjustment of group 100 data
10.1.5
TRANSVERSAL TABLETOP potmeter adjustment
(cells 111 – 112)
Remove the main beam's left-hand side cover.
Take the tabletop towards the minimum (inner) position that must be
measured between the aluminium tabletop support arm fixing block and
the horizontal surface of the tabletop movement tube.
The distance to be reached is 270 mm (10.6"). Select the cell 111 and
memorise the minimum value.
Move the tabletop to the maximum position (feet side) and find the
590 mm (23.2") measurement between the same references used for the
minimum.
Store the value 112 in the cell.
270mm
(10.6")
590mm
(23.2")
Figure 10-8: TRANSVERSAL TABLETOP potmeter adjustment
(cells 111 – 112)
APOLLO
10-14
(Rev. 3)
SERVICE MANUAL
Access and adjustment of group 100 data
10.1.6
SOURCE TO FILM DISTANCE potmeter adjustment
(cells 113 – 114)
Remove the rear SID cover.
Take the tube holding arm towards the minimum position (low) that has
to be found between the upper surface of the mobile aluminium column
and the upper edge of the swinging column. The height to be reached is
42 mm (1.6"). Select cell 113 and memorise the minimum value.
Move the tube holding arm to the maximum position (high) and find the
542 mm (21.3") measurement between the same references used for the
minimum.
Store the value in cell 114.
542mm
42mm (21.3")
(1.6")
Figure 10-9: SOURCE TO FILM DISTANCE potmeter adjustment
(cells 113 – 114)
(Rev. 3)
10-15
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Access and adjustment of group 100 data
10.1.7
WIDTH COLLIMATOR potmeter adjustment (cells 117 – 118)
The WIDTH limitation of the collimator means the limitation
corresponding to the right and left of the patient.
Using the SID joystick, that allows this movement only when cells 117 to
122 are selected, bring X-ray spot at 980 mm (38.6") from table top
surface (dimensions shown on the display).
Select cell 117 and using the compressor joystick, close the collimator
until the measurement displayed by the software is reached, that can be
detected by measuring the illuminated field projected on the tabletop.
The displayed measurement can vary according to the focus position.
Repeat what has been described for the adjustment of the maximum that
must be stored in position 118.
G
NOTE:
The minimum value must always be adjusted before the maximum value
otherwise alarm "089: The minimum has not been adjusted" will
appear.
When cells 117 to 122 are selected, the collimator light will come on
automatically when the collimator movement joystick is pushed.
980mm
(38.6")
Focus
min = cell 117
max = cell 118
Figure 10-10: COLLIMATOR WIDTH potmeter adjustment
(cells 117 – 118)
APOLLO
10-16
(Rev. 3)
SERVICE MANUAL
Access and adjustment of group 100 data
10.1.8
HEIGHT COLLIMATOR potmeter adjustment
(cells 119 – 120)
The HEIGHT limitation of the collimator means the limitation
corresponding to the head and feet of the patient.
Using the SID joystick, that allows this movement only when cells 117 to
122 are selected, bring X-ray spot at 980 mm (38.6") from table top
surface (dimensions shown on the display.
Select cell 119 and using the compressor joystick, close the collimator
until the measurement displayed by the software is reached, that can be
detected by measuring the illuminated field projected on the tabletop.
The displayed measurement can vary according to the focus position.
Repeat what has been described for the adjustment of the maximum,
that must be stored in position 120.
G
NOTE:
The minimum value must always be adjusted before the maximum value
otherwise alarm "089: The minimum has not been adjusted " will
appear.
When cells 117 to 122 are selected, the collimator light will come on
automatically when the collimator movement joystick is pushed.
980mm
(38.6")
Focus
min = cell 119
max = cell 120
Figure 10-11: HEIGHT COLLIMATOR potmeter adjustment
(cells 119 – 120)
(Rev. 3)
10-17
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Access and adjustment of group 100 data
10.1.9
IRIS COLLIMATOR (optional accessory) potmeter
adjustment (cells 121 – 122)
Iris potmeters will only be adjusted if the table is fitted with collimator to
limit the square-rectangular and circular fields.
Using the SID joystick, that allows this movement only when cells 117 to
122 are selected, bring X-ray spot at 980 mm (38.6") from table top
surface (dimensions shown on the display).
Select cell 121 and using the compressor joystick, close the collimator
until the measurement displayed by the software is reached, that can be
detected by measuring the illuminated field projected on the tabletop.
The displayed measurement can vary according to the focus position.
Repeat what has been described for the adjustment of the maximum that
must be stored in position 122.
G
NOTE:
The minimum value must always be adjusted before the maximum value
otherwise alarm "089: The minimum has not been adjusted " will
appear.
When cells 117 to 122 are selected, the collimator light will come on
automatically when the collimator movement joystick is pushed.
980mm
(38.6")
Focus
min = cell 121
max = cell 122
Figure 10-12: IRIS COLLIMATOR potmeter adjustment
(cells 121 – 122)
APOLLO
10-18
(Rev. 3)
SERVICE MANUAL
Access and adjustment of group 100 data
10.1.10 COMPRESSION FORCE potmeter adjustment
(cells 123 – 124)
To perform this adjustment a compression dynamometer with a range of
0 to 20 kg (0 to 44.1 lbs) is required.
Move the tabletop into the centred position and rest the dynamometer on
it.
The minimum must be adjusted with no force applied to the cone; store
the value in position 123.
Bring the cone down until a pressure of 15.5 kg (34.2 lbs) as shown on
the dynamometer is exerted; store the value in position 124.
(Rev. 3)
10-19
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Access and adjustment of group 100 data
10.1.11 GRID potmeter adjustment (cells 125 – 126)
Remove the upper cover of the Spot Film Device.
Move the grid holding frame towards the minimum position (park) that
must be found between the grid centre and Spot Film Device centre line
notch on the upper edge of the shoulders. The point to be reached is
460 mm (18.1").
Select cell 125 and memorise the minimum value.
Move the small frame to the maximum position (field) and find the
50 mm (1.9") measurement among the same references used for the
minimum.
Store the value in cell 126.
460mm
(18.1")
50mm
(1.9")
Grid centre
(park position)
Centre line notch
Grid centre
(field position)
Figure 10-13: GRID potmeter adjustment (cells 125 – 126)
APOLLO
10-20
(Rev. 3)
SERVICE MANUAL
Access and adjustment of group 100 data
10.1.12 CASSETTE CLOSE potmeter adjustment (cells 127 – 128)
Remove the upper lid of the Spot Film Device.
Select cell 127 and operate the compressor joystick until the cassette
close guides are fully closed and the gripping switch is not activated.
Store the value.
Select position 128 and widen the guides until the required
measurement indicated on the display is achieved.
Store the value.
WARNING:
The adjustment of the cassette tightening guide potmeter must be carried
out with the scanning assembly for the cross subdivision perfectly
centred.
When the maximum is adjusted the greatest care must be taken to
ensure the guides do not violently strike the walls of the Spot Film Device
but just brush them slightly.
Forcing the guides causes damage to the protection fuse F22 on the Spot
Film Device PCB A4.
(Rev. 3)
10-21
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Access and adjustment of group 100 data
10.1.12.1 CASSETTE TIGHTENING switch adjustment
The gripping switch's job is to ensure a certain contact between the
cassette and the driving belts.
This switch is ideally adjusted in order to get a pressure on the cassette
guides of approximately 6 kg (13.2 lbs).
Insert a cassette with height side 24 cm (10") to make visible the
reference scale when the switch is activated.
To comply with this value, the scale on the cam must coincide with the
position 40° ±10° to be read from the graded scale on the volute.
Graded
scale
Reference
scale
Figure 10-14: CASSETTE TIGHTENING switch adjustment
Perform the following to check the correct functioning of the gripping
system:
1. Move the table into a vertical position.
2. Insert a 35x43 (14"x17") cassette (35/14" height side direction)
resting it on the lower guide.
G
APOLLO
NOTE:
The cassette to use must be one of those the radiology room is equipped
with. This is because the check must be done under the worst operating
conditions (maximum weight in the lifting mode).
If the 35x43 (14"x17") size is not used, perform the test with the heaviest
format among those which are in use.
10-22
(Rev. 3)
SERVICE MANUAL
Access and adjustment of group 100 data
3. Operate the cassette insertion control.
If the adjustment is correct, the switch must never cut in while the
cassette is moving upwards until both the guides are touching the
cassette and an approximately 10° movement scale movement seen on
the graded scale has been performed.
If this is not the case, work on the switch activating cam to bring its
intervention forward or delay it.
WARNING:
An adjustment that is not high enough (< 5 kg / 11.0 lbs) causes the
switch to cut in early during the test described above.
An adjustment that is too high (> 7 kg / 15.4 lbs) causes pressure that is
to great between the drive belts and cassette meaning the cassette has
difficulty moving.
(Rev. 3)
10-23
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Access and adjustment of group 100 data
10.1.13 CROSS SUBDIVISION potmeter adjustment (cells 129 – 130)
Insert a cassette between the guides with height side 24 cm (10") on
which there is a centre line and grip it.
Select cell 129 and push the compressor joystick until the centre line of
the cassette is 65 mm (2.6") away from the centre of the cassette resting
surface; store the value.
Select position 130 and repeat the operation in the opposite direction
with respect to the centre line; store the value.
Figure 10-15: CROSS SUBDIVISION potmeter adjustment (cells 129 – 130)
APOLLO
10-24
(Rev. 3)
SERVICE MANUAL
Access and adjustment of group 100 data
10.1.14 SHUTTER potmeter adjustment (cells 131 – 132)
Remove the upper cover of the Spot Film Device.
Take the shutters towards the minimum position (fully open) that
corresponds with an opening equal to 475 mm (18.7") (Figure 10-16);
select cell 131 and memorise the minimum value.
475mm
(18.7")
Figure 10-16: SHUTTER potmeter adjustment (cell 131)
Take the shutters towards the maximum position (overlapping) and read
the measurement of 9 mm (0.3") (Figure 10-17); store the value in cell
132.
9mm
(0.3")
Figure 10-17: SHUTTER potmeter adjustment (cell 132)
(Rev. 3)
10-25
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Access and adjustment of group 100 data
10.1.15 I.I. lift microswitches adjustment (Optional) (cell 133)
Check that:
• measuring chamber is removed
• grid in park position
• cassettes jaws completely open.
By the compressor joystick move the I.I. lift up to lower end run.
The distance between cassette jaw lower side and I.I. must be never less
than 5 mm (0.2"); if necessary adjust the lower end run cam (switch
S29).
Move the I.I. lift to the upper end limit (switch S28). Check that during
the movement does not happens any collision between I.I. and internal
SFD parts.
The cams for end run microswitches position can be modified to obtain:
• minimum distance between skin and I.I.
• the coincidence between input I.I. plain and film level to avoid
parallax error due by oblique projections.
APOLLO
10-26
(Rev. 3)
SERVICE MANUAL
Access and data function of all groups (except group 100)
11
ACCESS AND DATA FUNCTION OF ALL
GROUPS (EXCEPT GROUP 100)
To access the reading of the data contained in the various groups (except
for group 100) the following procedure must be followed.
v
Reading data
1. Turn off the equipment, position the switch or switches of the
dip-switch group on the CPU PCB, relating to the data group for
which access is required, at ON.
2. Turn on the equipment. The control panel display will show:
XXX
YYYYYY
Description of the cell set
where:
XXX
YYYYYY
= number of the group and the position
= value currently in the memory.
3. By pressing the MODE3 and TEST keys it is possible to increase
and decrease the number of cells to be displayed, respectively. As
said previously, it is not possible to modify any settings.
v
Data editing
1. Press key MODE1 and hold it down for 1 sec. When this time has
elapsed, the display will show:
002
0000
Key in access code
where:
002
0000
= number of the position for the input of the
access codes
= position for the access code (see chapter 9).
2. Press key MODE2. The display will show the flashing message
CORR that indicates it is possible to write the access code.
(Rev. 3)
11-1
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Access and data function of all groups (except group 100)
3. Set the code relative to this data group (see chapter 9) by means
of the keys that, in this condition, become numbers in
accordance with the schematic below.
This setting will appear by scrolling from right to left on the
position for the inputting of the code.
4. Press key MODE2 to confirm.
If the confirmation key is not pressed within 15 sec. of the
inputting of the last digit, the flashing CORR message
disappears, what is written disappears from the displays and the
non-edited data remains in the memory.
However, if the confirmation key is pressed within the specified
time, the display will show the message:
Access to groups XXX – YYY - ZZZ
that indicates that it is possible to access groups, thanks to the
use of the code that has just been keyed in, to the relative groups
in function of which switches are positioned at ON.
If the code keyed in is wrong, the following message appears on
the screen, instead:
Code incorrect: access denied
In this case, the operations must repeated from number 2.
5. If the code is correct, hold key MODE1 down for one second.
The display returns to the position of the group abandoned on
entry to position 002.
At this point it will be possible to edit the data of the cells making up
this group.
To modify the data, press the MODE2 key, the flashing message
CORR will appear on the display. By using the numeric keys key in
the data required and press the MODE2 key again within 15 sec. to
confirm the correction.
APOLLO
11-2
(Rev. 3)
SERVICE MANUAL
Access and data function of all groups (except group 100)
11.1
Group 200 – Installation data
The values of this group is related to the installation of the equipment.
Default data input during factory testing is present in the various cells.
To ensure the installation functions properly the correct values must be
input.
11.1.1
Function of the parameters of group 200
As the data contained in the cells of this group can be modified to render
the machine fit for the installation requirements, the default data set
during the table adjustment in the factory is shown in the second to last
column in the table. The last column is for the service technician to take
note any variations from the default data.
(Rev. 3)
11-3
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Access and data function of all groups (except group 100)
THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
APOLLO
11-4
(Rev. 3)
SERVICE MANUAL
Access and data function of all groups (except group 100)
Cell
Display
Function description
Unit
Default
201
Left wall - table center distance
The distance between the left wall and the table centre must be included
in this data. The table centre corresponds to the centre of the tabletop
measured when flat.
mm
-4000
202
Right wall – table center distance
The distance between the right wall and the table centre must be
included in this data. The table centre corresponds with the centre of the
tabletop measured when flat.
mm
4000
203
Floor - ceiling distance
Measure the distance between the floor and the ceiling bearing in mind
the lowest point in the movement of the X-ray tube.
mm
5000
204
Floor-tube safety distance
The value inserted in this field will determine the minimum distance from
the floor that the X-ray tube can reach.
mm
200
205
Ceiling safety distance
The value inserted in this field will determine the minimum distance from
the ceiling that each component of the table can reach.
mm
200
206
Walls safety distance
The value inserted in this field will determine the minimum distanced
from the left and right walls that each element of the table can reach.
mm
200
207
II-floor safety distance
This data determines the minimum distance that the II will be able to
reach from the floor.
mm
100
208
The ascend band II-floor collision
The ascent band is ideally positioned over the value stored in cell 207.
During tilting, when one side of the II enters this band, the movement is
modified with respect to the way it operates normally to ensure the II gets
out of the ascent band preventing it from reaching the safety zone (cell
207) by causing the machine to stop.
mm
60
209
I.I. vertical dimension
The size measured between the upper surface of the II (input screen zone)
and the more distant lower part (TV camera coverage zone or angulation
motor cover in case of 9” I.I.)
mm
650
210
I.I. bottom half size
The value to be stored must be that which corresponds to half of the
measurement of the lower part of the II (typically the measurement of the
television camera radius must be input).
mm
250
(Rev. 5)
11-5
Setting
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Access and data function of all groups (except group 100)
Cell
Display
Function description
Unit
Default
211
Tube equivalent radius at 0°
The half width of the hood value must be stored to memory. Remember
however that since the rear end of the tube holding arm is 340 mm
(13.4") from the tube attachment shaft, the minimum data that can be
put in is 340 mm (13.4").
mm
340
212
Casing/collimator eq. radius if not at The height to key into this cell must be that which was measured
0°
between the tube attachment shaft and the furthest point from the tubecollimator assembly. Typically the point corresponds with the collimator
sharp edge furthest from the shaft.
mm
350
213
Focus - tube shaft distance
Input the vertical distance between the focus position and the tube fixing
pin.
mm
0
214
I.I. minimum field
Include the nominal measurement of the minimum II field (maximum
enlargement).
mm
158
215
I.I. medium field
Include the nominal measurement of the medium II field (medium
enlargement).
mm
250
216
I.I. max field
Insert the rated value of the I.I. rated field in the case of a three-field
intensifier. If a four-field II is installed the field value must be input
with minimum enlargement.
mm
314
217
I.I. max field for 4 fields
This data is only used by the software when cell 252 is set at 1 (four-field
II). In this case insert the value of the nominal II field.
mm
410
218
Width-height collimator format
correct
This data makes it possible to modify the opening of the collimator in the
radiography collimations. It has no influence on the opening of the
minimum, of the maximum and on the II formats.
mm
0
219
Cassette exposure position correction If it is necessary to modify the exposure positioning runs of cassettes of
the same number, the correction value required must be input into this
cell.
mm
0
220
0 – MAX position distance by grid
mm
50
APOLLO
This data makes it possible to centre the grid on the rays perfectly. The
data inserted determines the distance between the potmeter maximum
and the 0 grid position.
11-6
Setting
(Rev. 5)
SERVICE MANUAL
Access and data function of all groups (except group 100)
Cell
Display
Function description
Unit
Default
221
Park – MIN distance by grid
This data makes it possible to position the grid properly in the park. The
data inserted determines the distance between the potmeter minimum
and the grid parking position.
mm
10
222
Total grid oscillation length
Since the grid performs an oscillation during the exposure, the value in
this cell makes it possible to determine the total value of this oscillation.
Since the grid oscillates symmetrically around point 0, the total
oscillation has a value that is equal to double the half run calculated
from the 0 point.
mm
20
223
Exposure delay after grid start
This data makes it possible to synchronise the movement of the grid with
X-rays exposure. The data depends on the generator characteristics and
it is advisable to use the smallest possible values to avoid delays between
X-ray request and the response.
sec.
0.00
224
Transversal tabletop dead band
The dead band is the "the window" around the set point, that once
reached turns off the movement. The smaller this value is, the more
precise the positioning with relation to the end runs (min, max and
centering) but the risk of movement oscillations increases around the set
point when the stop is requested. A compromise value must be inserted
between these two effects to optimise the movement of the transversal
tabletop.
mm
8
225
SID dead band
See the description of cell 224 for the definition of the dead band.
The value to be input into this cell will be activated for the SID movement
at the min and the max.
mm
2
226
Compression force dead band
See the description of cell 224 for the definition of the dead band.
The value to be input in this cell will be activated for the set point of the
compression force, set by means of the control panel keys, when applied
to the patient.
kg
0.5
(Rev. 5)
11-7
Setting
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Access and data function of all groups (except group 100)
Cell
Display
Function description
Unit
Default
227
Grid dead band
See the description of cell 224 for the definition of the dead band.
The value to be input into this cell will be active for the grid movement at
the min, max, 0 and the limits of the movement in oscillation.
mm
2
228
Gripping dead band
See the description of cell 224 for the definition of the dead band.
The value to be inserted in this cell will be active for the cassette guide
movement only at the maximum opening. This data must be input with
maximum care because too small a value will determine a collision
between the guides and the walls of the Spot Film Device risking a
breakage of the motor protection fuse while too great a value will make
the loading of the 43 size cassette difficult.
mm
6
229
Width collimator dead band
See the description of cell 224 for the definition of the dead band.
The value to insert in this cell shall be active for the movement of the
base axis of the collimator for all the automatic collimation positions on
cassette sizes, on II sizes and at the min and the max.
mm
2
230
Collimator height dead band
The description for cell 229 is valid but applied to the height collimation
axis.
mm
2
231
Iris collimator dead band
The description for cell 229 is valid but applied to the iris collimation
axis.
mm
2
232
Width collimator slow down band
The slow down band is positioned around the dead band of collimator
width axis. This data determines the change of movement speed of the
movement in the axis before the dead band is reached. Thanks to this
slowing down (implemented by a hardware circuit) it will be possible to
set very small dead bands (thereby enhancing position precision) thereby
avoiding oscillations caused by speed of high positions. The data to be
inserted in this cell is therefore intimately bound to the data of the dead
band.
mm
15
APOLLO
11-8
Setting
(Rev. 3)
SERVICE MANUAL
Access and data function of all groups (except group 100)
Cell
Display
Function description
Unit
Default
233
Height collimator slow down band
The description for the width collimation applies (cell 232).
mm
15
234
Iris collimator slow down band
The description for the width collimation applies (cell 232).
mm
15
235
Transversal tabletop average speed
Since the transversal tabletop is not controlled by PDI logic but by an
on/off movement with potmeter feedback only for position monitoring,
the logic is not able to correct the speed. It will therefore be possible for
the logic to monitor an excessive position error caused by a mechanical
defect (movement /potmeter coupling etc.). To recognise such an error
however the logic must know the average speed of the tabletop movement
in all its conditions. The average value of this speed must be inserted in
this cell after having calculated it as described in cell 262.
mm/s
54
236
SID average speed
What is described for cell 235 applies.
mm/s
25
237
SID height after tomo
This value sets the SID position automatically readed when the
Tomography function is completed.
cm
100
238
Angio table lift default position
If the table is used for stepping angiograph tests, the data inserted in this
cell determines the height of the tabletop for m the ground when the
stepping angio mode entrance procedure is finished.
mm
1100
239
II diam percentage per angio step
The length of the step in angio step mode depends on the II field selected.
However to get a slight overlap between one step and the next, that helps
in the reconstruction of the contrast liquid passage, it is necessary for
the length of the step is lightly shorter with regard to the II diameter. The
length of the step can be reduced in percentage terms through the data
that is placed in this cell.
%
90
240
Min height with tilt joystick
This datum define the table height increment from the floor in
comparison with the minimum position, when tilt or centre joystick are
activated. With datum 0 the table height is the same when horizontal
position is reached by acting tilt or lift down joystick.
mm
0
(Rev. 3)
11-9
Setting
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Access and data function of all groups (except group 100)
Cell
Display
Function description
Unit
Default
241
Shutters corr. pos. for fluoro
reduction
This setting is used to correct the shutters position from the width
collimator when a reduction by joystick is activated. This correction is not
present on:
− I.I. size
− cassettes subdivision.
mm
0
244
0=1st speed 1=2nd speed 2=3rd speed This setting define the default speed for Tomo modality
3=4th speed
Tomo default speed
0
245
0 = 7° 1 = 20° 2 = 30° 3 = 45°
Tomo default angle
This setting define the default angle for Tomo modality
3
246
0=disab 1=filters 2=puls 3=zone
4=f.coll
Dependent on the TV chain installed on the table or at the presence of a
collimator with motorised additional filters selection and the
requirements of the operators, it is possible to configure the dedicated
key function and the relative outputs. There are five functions:
0
247
APOLLO
0=I - 1=GB - 2=F - 3=E - 4=D 5=RU¤
Setting
0 = disabled function
1= filter display (CCDx0 – CCDx2 – CCDx4 – CCDx8). Activation of the
three relative outputs.
2 = mode display (pulsed – continuous). Activation of the output
corresponding to CCDx0 when “pulsed” is displayed
3 = ROI display (large – small). Activation of the output corresponding
to CCDx0 when "large" is displayed.
4 = collimator additional filters visualisation (+0 - +1Al - +0.1Cu +0.2Cu). Activation of the three relative outputs.
Depending on the country where the system is installed, it is possible to
choose what language the messages will be displayed in. This applies to
all the messages that are displayed during the regular operation of the
equipment. With regard to the display of the service programs (functions
that can be accessed through the dip-switches) there are two languages:
Italian with selection = 0, English for all the other selections.
11-10
0
(Rev. 5)
SERVICE MANUAL
Access and data function of all groups (except group 100)
The cells in group 200 after those already listed are used to make the
setting choices and not introduce numerical data like the previous ones.
In these fields a choice is requested between values 0 or 1 to establish
the setting choice.
Do the following to modify the input data:
1. Press the MODE2 key to enable the correction. The display will show
the flashing message CORR.
2. Press key F3. The data present is automatically replaced with the
alternative.
After this operation, the writing CORR disappears and the data is
confirmed in EEprom.
(Rev. 3)
11-11
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Access and data function of all groups (except group 100)
THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
APOLLO
11-12
(Rev. 3)
SERVICE MANUAL
Access and data function of all groups (except group 100)
Cell
Display
Function description
250
0 = no 1 = yes
Collimator hold mode default
This setting determines whether when the equipment is turned on or
each time the "automatic collimator" mode is selected, the Hold function
is active by default or whether it must be activated by the operator by
pushing the relative key.
0
251
0=foot-head 1=head-foot
Cross subdivision sequence
This determines the succession of radiograms for the cross subdivisions.
0
-
0=
-
1=
1
2
3
4
3
4
1
2
Default
252
0=3 fields 1=4
II fields I.I. field selection
The data depends on the II installed. Typically the 4 field selection is for
16” II.
0
253
0 = no 1 = yes
Iris collimator
This depends on the configuration of the table configuration that can
make provision for a collimator with square/rectangular filed or
square/rectangular field with iris.
0
254
0 = no 1 = yes
Anti entrapment device
The table is designed to allow the implementation of a safety device to
prevent the entrapment of parts between internal tabletop profiles and
SFD rear side and between column and SFD lateral side. If this circuit is
installed it will be necessary to activate the relative input software control
using this setting. The C-CSA-US versions are always equipped with this
circuit.
0
255
0=pres. 1=abs.
I.I. lift
As an option, the table can be fitted with an II lift device to bring it
towards the tabletop in digital fluoroscopic mode (dependent on the
setting of cell 256). When this option is present the value must be 0.
All Digital version does not carry I.I. lift.
1
(Rev. 3)
11-13
Setting
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Access and data function of all groups (except group 100)
Cell
Display
Function description
256
0 = no 1 = yes
I.I. lift go up in fluoro
If the I.I. lift option is present (cell 255) the II is always brought towards
the table when the digital mode is selected. The value to be keyed in this
cell determines whether the approach also occurs when the fluoro is
requested. The mode enhances the quality of the image but delays the
fluoro-exposure passage time.
0
257
0 = cm 1 = inch
Cassette type
The selection depends on the cassettes that are available.
0
258
0 = right side 1 = left side
Table vertical position
Depending on the room where the table is installed, the "vertical position"
can be on the right or left side. The angulation motor will be mounted on
the left side when the vertical position will be on the right side and viceversa. Selecting 0 (vertical on the right – Trendelenbourg on the left) the
display will show positive angles when tilting to the right. The scanning
will have a run limited to 350 mm (13.8") from the centre instead of
800 mm (31.5") when the tilting angle is between –5° and –80°.
Selecting 1, the above will be reversed.
The setting of this parameter must always be consistent with the
angulation motor. If this setting is not consistent the motor will hit the
floor during tilting with the scanning close to its range limit.
0
259
0=off-off 1=off-on
Horizontal image scan reverse
Dependent on the type of TV chain installed, it might be necessary to
activate the horizontal image scan reverse output by default. Selection 0
determines that when the table is turned on both the dedicated key led
and the relative output are Off. By pressing the key the led is turned on
and the output is activated.
When the table is on, selection 1 determines the automatic activation of
the output with the led of the relative key off. When the horizontal image
scan reverse key is pressed the led comes on and the output is turned off.
1
APOLLO
Default
11-14
Setting
(Rev. 4)
SERVICE MANUAL
Access and data function of all groups (except group 100)
Cell
Display
Function description
260
0=off-off 1=off-on
Vertical image scan reverse
What was described for cell 259 is valid here applied to the vertical image
scan reverse function.
0
261
0=enable 1=disable
Spot Film Device disabling
To be set at 1 in "All Digital" version
It disables the Spot Film Device controls. The initialisation functions and
all the relative modes are no longer performed. This override is present
when the table is in the “All digital” version.
This can be activated if the Spot Film Device breaks down to exclude
alarms and any disabling.
0
262
0=normal 1=Technical service function In standard operating mode this function must always be deactivated.
The activation determines the display of the message "SERVICE
FUNCTION ACTIVE" and enables the following procedures that can be
used for service and control operations.
-
Default
Setting
0
Display of the instant speeds
By activating the movement of the tabletop or the SID the speed is
visualised thanks to the potmeter feedback. The speed in all load
conditions and position of the equipment must be checked, the
various values noted and the average obtained. The values that can
be obtained in this way must be inserted in cell 235 for transversal
tabletop and 236 for the SID. The measurement of the speeds only
must to be done if the movement potmeters have already been
adjusted. Otherwise the value shown is not real.
-
Exclusion of the collimator limitation and the Spot Film Device
shutters
The collimator and the Spot Film Device shutters do not perform the
limitation on the II or cassette size thereby permitting any checks and
measurements to be made on the Spot Film Device or the exposed
films.
(Rev. 3)
11-15
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Access and data function of all groups (except group 100)
Cell
Display
Function description
263
0=high –high 1=high -low
It reverses the image on the monitor high-low when the function ‘monitor
orienting’ is selected.
0
264
0=right-right 1=right left
It reverses the image on the monitor right-left high-low when the function
‘monitor orienting’ is selected.
0
265
0=cm–kg 1=inch-lbs
Parameters visualization
Sets the SID, layer and compression force data visualization in cm-kg or
inch-lbs.
0
APOLLO
Default
11-16
Setting
(Rev. 4)
SERVICE MANUAL
Access and data function of all groups (except group 100)
11.2
Group 300 – PDI controlled motor data
This group contains the values linked to the operation of the motors
controlled using the PDI (proportional, derived, integral) method.
Default data input during factory testing is present in the various cells.
This data is essential for the proper functioning of the equipment.
Before varying any data of this program whatsoever it is important to
understand its meaning, its function and the possible consequences,
thoroughly.
The brief explanation given below is useful to better understand the
function of the various cells present for each of the motors controlled
using this system.
11.2.1
Theory of functioning of an axis with PID control
To move an axis, the control software must know:
•
the departure point of the movement
•
the point of arrival.
The departure point is known because it corresponds with the position in
which the axis is.
The arrival point is determined by the choice made when a movement is
selected.
To reach the arrival point it is therefore necessary to describe a
trajectory.
This trajectory will be created thanks to the data inserted in the cells
containing the speed and acceleration values.
To perform the movement it will therefore be necessary for the software to
carry out two separate functions:
•
the generation of the trajectory
•
following the trajectory.
•
Generation of the trajectory
The software constructs a variable that represents the point where
the movement should be moment by moment.
This variable is called the theoretical trajectory.
Having the departure point as the origin, the generation of the
theoretical trajectory consists of:
–
a ramp, i.e. a stretch of acceleration that rises steadily linearly
–
a stretch of constant speed
–
a deceleration ramp with acceleration equal to the acceleration
ramp but with a negative sign.
The speed and acceleration values used for the generation of the
theoretical trajectory are those inserted in the relative cells.
(Rev. 3)
11-17
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Access and data function of all groups (except group 100)
•
Following the trajectory
The following of the theoretical trajectory constructs a variable that
generates the real trajectory.
This variable will then be translated into the reference signal (Vref),
sent to the activation that controls the axis motor.
This signal will be modulated in such a way as to approximate the
theoretical trajectory as closely as possible.
This variable is the sum of three components:
–
Proportional
The proportional part is product of the multiplication:
"instantaneous error" X "proportional gain"
where:
–
the instantaneous error is given by the difference between
the real position (monitored by the feed back of the potmeter
or encoder) and that theoretical (calculated by the generation
of the trajectory)
–
the proportional gain is inserted in the dedicated cell.
–
Integral
The integral part is product of the multiplication:
"sum of the errors" X "integral gain"
where:
–
the sum of the errors is obtained by the sampling conducted
every millisecond that calculates the positioning error
between the real trajectory and the theoretical one.
The error can take a negative and positive value according to
whether the real trajectory is before or after the theoretical
one.
The sum of all these errors sampled will be algebraic, that is
to say, it will take the error's negative or positive sign into
account.
The sum of the errors will therefore be a number that is
accumulated during the accomplishment of the whole
trajectory.
–
the integral gain is inserted in the dedicated cell.
APOLLO
11-18
(Rev. 3)
SERVICE MANUAL
Access and data function of all groups (except group 100)
–
Derivative
The derivative part is the product of the multiplication:
"error difference between 2 samplings" X "derivative gain"
where:
–
the error difference between samplings, is calculated on
the basis of an interval time that must be set in the dedicated
cell.
This interval expressed in msec. is called "derivative sampling
period".
The position error, i.e. the difference between the real and the
theoretical trajectories, is calculated at each sampling.
The difference between the error detected in a sampling and
the error detected in the next sampling shows the extent to
which the actual trajectory has changed its position with
respect to the theoretical one.
–
the derivative gain is inserted in the dedicated cell.
So far the following fields have been analysed:
•
Proportional gain
•
Integral gain
•
Period of derivative sampling
•
Derivative gain
Here below is a brief analysis of the remaining fields responsible for the
control of a PDI axis.
(Rev. 3)
•
Integration limit
This is the maximum value that the sum of the integral action errors
can assume.
If the sum of the errors exceeds the value set in this cell, it will be
limited in accordance with the limit set.
If the data set in this cell is 0 no limitation will be performed.
This parameter avoids action that is too extreme in the case that the
sum assumes values that are considerable.
•
Motor STOP error
When the difference between the actual and the theoretical position
of a movement reaches a value that is equal to the one set in the cell,
the movement will be stopped.
11-19
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Access and data function of all groups (except group 100)
APOLLO
•
Delay motor turning off
This delay is the time after which, at the end of the run, the motor is
turned off.
This time allows to make up for a possible real positioning error as
opposed to a theoretical one.
This allows the integral action to complete its function.
By inserting the value 0 the movement is never stopped.
•
Braking time
This value permits to ramp down the motion independently of the
acceleration ramp. The time inserted into these cells is equal to the
time the motion employs to pass from the actual speed to 0 in a
linear way. This occurs regardlessly of the real position with respect
to the theoretical one. In this case, the integral position recovery
actions are not carried out and the motor turning off delay does not
have effect. This braking modality is used for the following
movements: main beam, middle beam, scan and angulation.
11-20
(Rev. 3)
SERVICE MANUAL
Access and data function of all groups (except group 100)
11.2.2
Motors check data function
The following tables, divided by motor, contain the data relative to the
various PDI-controlled motors.
Angulation movement
Cell
Function
Default
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
Period derivative sampl.
Proportional gain
Integral gain
Derivative gain
Integration limit (°)
1st (°/sec) joystick and tomo speed
2nd (°/sec) tomo speed
3rd (°/sec) tomo speed
4th (°/sec) tomo speed
1st (°/sec) joystick and tomo acceleration
2nd (°/sec) tomo acceleration
3rd (°/sec) tomo acceleration
4th (°/sec) tomo acceleration
Error stop motor (°)
Braking time (sec)
0.001
200
0
200
20
11.5
15.0
19.0
23.0
29.0
33.0
42.0
60.0
5
0.3
Set
Scan movement
Cell
Function
Default
317
318
319
320
321
322
323
324
325
326
327
328
329
332
Period derivative sampl.
Proportional gain
Integral gain
Derivative gain
Integration limit (mm)
Joystick initial speed (mm/sec)
Joystick final speed (mm/sec)
Angio step speed (mm/sec)
Angio return speed (mm/sec)
Joystick acceleration and angio return (mm/sec2)
Angio step acceleration (mm/sec2)
Joystick speed increment (mm/sec2)
Error stop motor (mm)
Braking time (sec)
0.001
600
0
800
20
5
150
300
300
250
300
30
100
0.5
(Rev. 4)
11-21
Set
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Access and data function of all groups (except group 100)
Main beam and middle beam movement (tilting and lift)
(*)
Cell
Function
Default
335
336
337
338
339
340
341
342
343
344
345
346
349
Period derivative sampl.
Proportional gain
Integral gain
Derivative gain
Integration limit
Low tilting speed (°/sec)
High tilting speed (°/sec)
Lift manual speed (mm/sec)
Slow tilting speed acceleration (°/sec2)
High tilting speed acceleration (°/sec2)
Lift acceleration (mm/sec2)
Error stop motor (mm)
Braking time (sec)
0.001
(*)
(*)
(*)
10
(*)
6.0
25
(*)
6.0
70
80
0.4
Set
The data inserted into the cells can be with different values in function of the mechanical
characteristics of the unit. As default data can be set 3 different groups:
Cell
Group 1
Group 2
Group 3
336
337
338
340
343
600
10
400
4.5
4.0
500
7
350
4.2
3.8
400
5
300
4.0
3.5
Shutters movement
Cell
Function
Default
353
354
355
356
357
358
360
361
362
363
364
Period derivative sampl.
Proportional gain
Integral gain
Derivative gain
Integration limit (mm)
Initialisation speed (mm/sec)
Work speed (mm/sec)
Initialisation speed acceleration (mm/sec2)
Working speed acceleration (mm/sec2)
Error stop motor (mm)
Delay turning off motor (sec)
0.001
2000
50
3000
50.0
100.0
300.0
100.0
1200.0
100
0.50
APOLLO
11-22
Set
(Rev. 3)
SERVICE MANUAL
Access and data function of all groups (except group 100)
Cassette movement
Cell
Function
Default
365
366
367
368
369
370
Period derivative sampl.
Proportional gain
Integral gain
Derivative gain
Integration limit (mm)
Access speed (until cassette size photosens.)
(mm/sec)
IN-OUT speed (mm/sec)
Work speed (mm/sec)
Access and IN-OUT speed acceleration (mm/sec2)
Working speed acceleration (mm/sec2)
Error stop motor (mm)
Delay turning off motor (sec)
0.001
2000
50
4000
50.0
600.0
371
372
373
374
375
376
Set
400.0
950.0
300.0
8000
200
0.50
Cross subdivision movement
Cell
Function
Default
389
390
391
392
393
395
396
397
398
399
400
Period derivative sampl.
Proportional gain
Integral gain
Derivative gain
Integration limit
Initialisation speed (mm/sec)
Work speed (mm/sec)
Initialisation speed acceleration (mm/sec2)
Working speed acceleration (mm/sec2)
Error stop motor (mm)
Delay turning off motor (sec)
0.001
1100
50
2500
10.0
30.0
90.0
12.0
2000.0
35.0
0.50
(Rev. 3)
11-23
Set
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Access and data function of all groups (except group 100)
11.3
Group 400 / 500 / 600 – Dimensions and runs
This group contains data that have various functions.
The function of the various cells is listed in the following tables divided
by groups.
11.3.1
Range of runs carried out by movements with potmeter
feedback
As explained in the chapter about potmeters adjustment, the limit to
reach for the calibration is shown on the display.
This limit is set in this block of data.
To vary the value of the set default data means to adjust the movement
run range.
This will entail:
•
the variation of the equipment specification
•
the adjustment of the potmeter minimum and maximum calibration
•
the adjustment of the emergency switches position.
Moreover, it will be necessary to check if the movement mechanics can
sustain such variation.
The software will divide the new run range by the number of potmeter's
points that are going to be sampled between the minimum and maximum
value of the new run.
WARNING:
Do not modify the data in this group as they are linked to the operative
characteristic of the equipment.
APOLLO
11-24
(Rev. 3)
SERVICE MANUAL
Access and data function of all groups (except group 100)
Cell
View
Function description
Unit
Default
401
Angulation: minimum position
Software minimum end of run position for angulation movement
°
-40.0
402
Angulation: maximum position
Software maximum end of run position for angulation movement
°
40.0
403
Scan: minimum position
Software minimum scan position for angulation movement
mm
-800
404
Scan: maximum position
Software maximum scan position for angulation movement
mm
800
405
Main beam: minimum position
Software minimum main beam position for angulation movement
mm
135
407
Middle beam: minimum position
Software minimum end of run position for middle beam movement
mm
135
409
Maximum Trendelembourg position
The main beam and middle beam potmeters adjustment determines the
minimum Trendelembourg position equal to –90°. It might be necessary
to modify such limit to increase the comfort for the patient or to limit the
tilting range. Data selectable is between –20° and –90°; if data sets is
between –87° and –90°, the display will shows, when end limit is reached,
alwais –90°. For all the others selections, due to the stop dead band, the
value displayed at the end limit could be different then the stored one.
°
-88
410
Maximum vertical position
It holds the same as for cell 409 with the difference that this value has an
influence on the vertical position with positive tilting angles.
°
88
411
Transv. tabletop: minimum position
Software minimum end of run position for tabletop movement
mm
-160
412
Transv. tabletop: maximum position
Software maximum end of run position for tabletop movement
mm
160
413
Tube shaft - film dist.: minimum pos. Software minimum end of run position for SID movement
mm
1016
414
Tube shaft - film dist.: max position
mm
1516
(Rev. 4)
Software maximum end of run position for SID movement
11-25
Setting
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Access and data function of all groups (except group 100)
Cell
View
415
Minimum main beam forced setting
416
417
418
423
424
425
426
427
428
429
430
431
432
APOLLO
Function description
Unit
In this cell is it is possible to force-set the minimum value of the main
beam movement potmeter. This avoids removing the I.I. to perform the
calibration. To correctly perform this calibration procedure, it will be
necessary to calculate the data to input by checking the difference
between the previously stored minimum and maximum values and the
value corresponding to the maximum of the new calibration. The same
previous difference between the two values shall be applied.
Example: previous Mx = 3600 min = 500 difference = 3100
New max value = 3450 new val to input = 350 obtained applying the
3100 difference to the new max value.
Maximum main beam forced setting
In this cell is it is possible to set manually the maximum value of the
main beam movement potmeter, in the case that it is not possible to
reach the normal maximum position due to limitations of the room.
Calibration is similar to what described in cell 415.
Minimum middle beam forced setting It holds the same as for the main beam movement (cell 415)
Maximum middle beam forced
It holds the same as for the main beam movement (cell 416)
setting
Compression force: minimum
Software minimum end of run position for compression force
Compression force: maximum
Software maximum end of run position for compression force
Grid: minimum position
Software minimum end of run position for grid movement
Grid: maximum position
Software minimum end of run position for grid movement
Gripping: minimum size
Software minimum end of run position for gripping movement
Gripping: maximum size
Software maximum end of run position for gripping movement
Cross subdivision: minimum position Software minimum end of run position for cross subdivision movement
Cross subdivision: maximum
Software maximum end of run position for cross subdivision movement
position
Shutters: minimum position
Software minimum end of run position for shutters movement
Shutters: maximum position
Software maximum end of run position for shutters movement
11-26
Default
Setting
(XXX)
(XXX)
(XXX)
(XXX)
kg
kg
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
01.5
15.5
000
510
146
463
-65.0
65.0
mm
mm
0.0
495.0
(Rev. 3)
SERVICE MANUAL
Access and data function of all groups (except group 100)
11.3.2
Equipment mechanical dimensions
This block of data contains some mechanical dimensions characteristic of
this equipment.
The software uses these dimensions to perform calculations of the
various functions' management algorithms (anti-collision, tomography,
lifting and tilting functions, etc.).
WARNING:
These data are closely linked to the equipment and therefore should
never be modified in order to avoid modifications to the equipment
functioning.
(Rev. 3)
11-27
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Access and data function of all groups (except group 100)
THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
APOLLO
11-28
(Rev. 3)
SERVICE MANUAL
Access and data function of all groups (except group 100)
Cell
View
Function description
Unit
Default
433
Dist. tube shaft-angulation shaft
(SID=1000)
It refers to the distance between the mount shaft of the right tube and
the rotation pin of the column. This data must be input with the SID on
the minimum. It is used to calculate the collision.
mm
1016
434
Distance vert. main beam shaft – I.I.
sensor
It is the distance on the vertical axis between the main beam fixing pin
and the input I.I. sensor. The value is used to calculate the collision.
mm
83
435
Distance main beam shaft - main
beam left side distance
It is the distance between the main beam fixing pin and the main beam
left limit. The value is used to calculate the collision.
mm
500
436
Distance main beam shaft - main
beam right side distance
It is the distance between the main beam fixing pin and the main beam
right limit. The value is used to calculate the collision.
mm
1920
437
Dist. vert. main beam shaft - upper
main beam
It refers to the distance on the vertical axis between the main beam fixing
pin and the main beam upper limit.
mm
206
Distance curved tabletop – film
mm
64
Distance flat tabletop – film
It is the distance between the tabletop and the film. The data is used to
calculate the layer in the tomo modality.
mm
82
439
Distance main beam shaft angulation shaft
It is the distance between the main beam fixing pin and the column
rotation pin. The value is used to calculate the collision.
mm
64
441
Dist. I.I.-film (lift.up)
This value is used only in the presence of the I.I. lift and it is the distance
between the film and the I.I. sensor when the lift is in the upper position.
The value is used for the collimation and for the calculation of the scan
run for inclined projections and for the tomography.
mm
-19
(see
NOTE)
442
Dist. I.I.-film (fixed or lift.down)
This value is used both in the presence of the I.I. lift and for fixed I.I.
equipment and it represents the distance between the film and the I.I.
sensor. The value is used for the collimation and for the calculation of the
scan run for inclined projections and tomography.
mm
18
(see
NOTE)
443
Distance film - shutters
It is the distance between the film and the shutters inside the Spot Film
Device. The value is used to correctly perform the collimation.
mm
12
438
NOTE:
(Rev. 3)
Setting
These values will need to be modified in accordance with the dimension and the type of installed I.I.. The correct value will ensure the
correspondence between the set layer and the real one in the Digital tomo modality and for the inclined projections.
11-29
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Access and data function of all groups (except group 100)
Cell
View
Function description
Unit
Default
444
Distance park - cass. size photosens.
The present value corresponds to the distance between the parking and
the cassette size photosensor. It is used to correctly position the cassette
in the parking position.
mm
472
445
Distance vert. middle beam shaft floor
It is the distance on the vertical axis between the middle beam mount
shaft and the floor. The value is used to calculate the collision.
mm
605
446
Distance between the middle beam
shafts
It is the distance between the base-middle beam and main beam-middle
beam mount shafts.
The value is used to calculate the collision.
mm
1420
APOLLO
11-30
Setting
(Rev. 3)
SERVICE MANUAL
Access and data function of all groups (except group 100)
11.3.3
Data relative to single fault potmeter controls
This block of data is used to check the potmeters and the functions
linked to single faults.
A detailed description of the functions is reported in each cell.
(Rev. 3)
11-31
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Access and data function of all groups (except group 100)
THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
APOLLO
11-32
(Rev. 3)
SERVICE MANUAL
Access and data function of all groups (except group 100)
Cell
View
Function description
Unit
Default
447
Max error for transversal tabletop
The value in cell 235 represents the average speed for the transversal
tabletop movement (see paragraph 11.1.1). As the real speed will never be
identical to the stored speed, during the movement, an error will indicate
the discrepancy between the real and the theoretical position. This error
will be reset once the movement is stopped. If the error takes on a value
equal to the one stored in this cell, alarm 218 is issued.
mm
200
448
Max error for SID
It holds the same as for the transversal tabletop movement.
With respect to the SID movement, the average speed is stored in cell 236
and in case the error value is reached, alarm 220 will be displayed.
mm
200
449
Max error for stopped potmeters
n/4096
The processor checks that the movements' potmeters do not undergo
variations if the same movements are not active. This is done in order to
guarantee the Single Fault safety.
The number to store in this cell must take into account possible
movements caused by the momentum of inertia after the movement
arrest.
The measurement unit is expressed in "potmeter points", in other words,
a value corresponding to the unit after the AD conversion.
The greater this value the wider the movement carried out with request
prior to the processor displaying the alarm. For potentially "dangerous"
movements potmeters, a cell is available for each movement (see following
cells).
In this cell the collimator, Spot Film Device and compressor movements
potmeters are checked.
(Rev. 3)
11-33
Setting
300
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Access and data function of all groups (except group 100)
Cell
View
450
Extra-run max pot. out of SW range
451
452
453
454
455
456
457
459
460
APOLLO
Function description
Unit
This cell's value refers to the extra-runs that the potmeter can carry out
n/4096
in proximity of the software range without generating an alarm.
This extra run can be caused, for instance, by dead bands.
If the potmeter exceeds, during the extra run, the value set in this cell, an
alarm will be generated indicating the excessive proximity of the potmeter
to the limits.
All this permits to detect if the potmeter circuit is interrupted when
powering on.
sec
Max time of joyst. not corresp. - S.F. It is present the data relative to the check of correspondence of the
activation and single faults circuits.
The time value set in this cell, with measuring unit expressed in sec., is
equal to the window inside which a single fault alarm is generated (231 or
232) in case there is no correspondence between the activation and single
fault circuits.
°
Max error for stopped angulation pot. It holds the same as for cell 449 applied to the angulation movement. The
value is expressed in degrees and it is the maximum involuntary
movement allowed without generating an alarm.
Max error for stopped scan pot.
See cell 452 applied to the scan movement.
mm
Max error for stopped main beam
See cell 452 applied to the main beam movement.
mm
pot.
Max error for stopped middle beam
See cell 452 applied to the middle beam movement.
mm
pot.
Max error for stopped transversal
See cell 452 applied to the transversal tabletop movement.
mm
tabletop pot.
Max error for pot. SID stopped
See cell 452 applied to the SID movement.
mm
Cross subdivision displacement
The value to be stored in this cell determines the displacement that the
mm
(head side)
cross subdivision movement will perform toward the head side with
respect to the central position.
Cross subdivision displacement (feet It holds the same as for cell 459 as to the displacement towards the feet
mm
side)
side.
11-34
Default
Setting
50
5.00
1.0
15
15
15
15
15
-60.0
60.0
(Rev. 3)
SERVICE MANUAL
Access and data function of all groups (except group 100)
11.3.4
Spot Film Device cassette and shutters run
This block contains the runs carried out by the Spot Film Device cassette
and shutters to perform the various cassettes subdivisions and the
relative limitation.
In case the separating lines of the X-rays of some subdivisions are not
perfect, it is possible to modify these values, by following closely the
instructions reported in the dedicated chapter.
G
NOTE:
The cassette and shutters positioning might not correspond to the
measure in the relative cell because of the mechanical inertia of the
system.
In every way the correction in mm introduced in the cells has an
increment and decrement effect in the final amount equal to the value of
the correction.
For rapid consultation and interpretation, the runs and the relative cells
are summed up in tables where the first number indicates the cell
number and the second, in brackets, the stored data in mm.
(Rev. 3)
11-35
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Access and data function of all groups (except group 100)
11.3.4.1 Calculation of the cassette run
The calculation is based on the distance of cassette internal side, when
the same is in the parking position, with respect to centre of the Spot
Film Device. Such distance is divided into 2 parts:
•
the distance of the cassette size photosensor from the centre of the
Spot Film Device (227 mm / 8.9")
•
the distance of the cassette size photosensor from the internal side of
the Spot Film Device (484 mm / 19.0")
The 484 mm (19.0") figure is such as the distance of the photosensor
from the bottom of the Spot Film Device (cell 444) is 472 mm (18.6") but
the cassette parking position is set by the SW at:
• 5 mm (0.2") from the bottom at the end of cassette insertion
• 20 mm (0.8") from the bottom when caming back from a preparation
or test run
G
NOTE:
Distances given in the tables an stored in the cells are referred to a
parking position of the cassette at 20 mm (0.8") from the bottom of the
Spot Film Device. The correction, when the parking position is at 5 mm
(0.2") from the bottom, is carried out automatically by the software which
increases the distances in the table of 15 mm (0.6").
Note that it is possible to store a new negative or positive offset value (cell
219) to compensate the differences due to manufacturing or operating
characteristics. This offset will permit to modify all runs of all
subdivisions of the stored quantity.
The formulas applied to determine the runs are as follows:
•
Full size
C = (cassette width / 2) – 711
where 711 = 227 + 484
•
Subdivision 2 in line and 4 cross
C = full size run +/- (film / 4)
APOLLO
•
Subdivision 3 in line and 6 cross
C = full size run +/- (film / 3)
•
Subdivision 4 in line
C = full size run +/- (3/8 film) and (1/8 film)
11-36
(Rev. 3)
SERVICE MANUAL
Access and data function of all groups (except group 100)
Table cassette run for cassettes in cm
13x18 18x13 18x24 24x18 24x24 24x30 30x24 30x30 18x43 43x18 15x40 40x15 20x40 40x20 30x35 35x30 30x40 40x30 35x35 35x43 43x35
PAN
SUBDIV. 2 L
461
462
463
466
466
469
472
478
463
512
531
532
518
521
478
500
484
490
500
506
512
(600.8)
(576.0)
(576.0)
(547.0)
(547.0)
(547.0)
(516.5)
(516.5)
(575.0)
(450.7)
(590.5)
(466.5)
(565.0)
(467.0)
(516.5)
(489.3)
(517.0)
(467.0)
(489.0)
(489.3)
(451.3)
464
467
467
470
473
479
513
533
519
522
479
501
485
491
501
507
513
(531.0)
(486.5)
(486.5)
(490.0)
(442.0)
(441.5)
(343.5)
(367.0)
(517.5)
(367.0)
(441.5)
(400.0)
(442.5)
(367.5)
(400.0)
(400.0)
(342.5)
465
468
468
471
474
480
514
534
520
523
480
502
486
492
502
508
514
(620.0)
(606.0)
(606.0)
(607.5)
(592.0)
(591.5)
(557.5)
(567.0)
(617.5)
(567.0)
(591.5)
(577.0)
(592.0)
(565.5)
(577.0)
(577.0)
(557.0)
SUBDIV. 3 L
475
481
515
535
524
481
503
487
493
503
509
515
(415.0)
(416.5)
(307.7)
(335.0)
(335.0)
(416.5)
(370.5)
(417.7)
(334.3)
(370.5)
(370.5)
(308.0)
476
482
516
536
525
482
504
488
494
504
510
516
(516.0)
(516.5)
(450.5)
(466.5)
(466.5)
(516.5)
(487.5)
(517.0)
(467.0)
(487.5)
(487.5)
(451.5)
477
483
517
537
526
483
505
489
495
505
511
517
(616.0)
(616.3)
(592.0)
(599.0)
(599.0)
(616.3)
(606.3)
(615.5)
(599.0)
(606.3)
(606.3)
(593.8)
SUBDIV. 4 L
SUBDIV. 4 L
464
467
473
(530.0)
(486.5)
(442.0)
465
468
474
(622.0)
(606.0)
(592.0)
464
467
473
(530.0)
(486.5)
(442.0)
465
468
474
(620.0)
(606.0)
(592.0)
538
527
496
665
(317.0)
(317.0)
(316.6)
(287.8)
539
528
497
666
(417.3)
(417.0)
(417.3)
(395.2)
540
529
498
667
(516.0)
(516.0)
(515.0)
(502.8)
541
530
499
668
(614.5)
(614.5)
(617.2)
(610.2)
475
(415.0)
476
(516.0)
477
SUBDIV. 6 L
(616.0)
475
(415.0)
476
(516.0)
477
(616.0)
(Rev. 4)
11-37
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Access and data function of all groups (except group 100)
Table cassette run for cassettes in inches
5x7
FULL SIZE
SUBDIV. 2 L
7x5
8x10
10x8
9.5x9.5
10x12
12x10
17x7
11x14
14x11
14x14
14x17
17x14
571
572
573
576
588
579
582
628
629
594
600
610
616
622
(602.0)
(577.0)
(563.5)
(540.8)
(546.0)
(538.8)
(514.0)
(577.0)
(449.0)
(524.5)
(486.0)
(488.0)
(488.0)
(449.5)
574
577
589
580
583
630
595
601
611
617
623
(513.6)
(476.8)
(485.5)
(576.7)
(438.3)
(342.0)
(456.3)
(397.5)
(399.2)
(399.3)
(341.5)
575
578
590
581
584
631
596
602
612
618
624
(613.0)
(601.5)
(606.0)
(601.0)
(589.0)
(556.0)
(596.3)
(575.5)
(578.0)
(578.0)
(557.4)
SUBDIV. 3 L
591
585
632
597
603
613
619
625
(466.5)
(414.5)
(306.4)
(432.0)
(371.0)
(369.5)
(369.5)
(306.4)
592
586
633
598
604
614
620
626
(546.6)
(514.5)
(449.5)
(524.5)
(486.0)
(488.0)
(488.0)
(449.4)
593
587
634
599
605
615
621
627
(626.0)
(613.5)
(591.5)
(617.0)
(603.5)
(606.0)
(606.0)
(592.4)
SUBDIV. 4 L
SUBDIV. 4 L
7x17
574
583
(512.0)
(436.3)
575
584
(613.0)
(587.0)
574
583
(511.0)
(435.0)
575
584
(612.0)
(587.3)
635
606
(288.0)
(353.0)
636
607
(396.0)
(440.5)
637
608
(503.3)
(529.5)
638
609
(609.5)
(618.3)
585
(412.5)
586
(512.5)
587
SUBDIV. 6 L
(611.5)
585
(411.2)
586
(510.7)
(Rev. 3)
11-39
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Access and data function of all groups (except group 100)
11.3.4.2 Calculation of the shutters run
The calculation is based on the typical measures of the Spot Film Device
reported below:
•
distance film-upper shutter = 17.0 mm
•
distance film-lower shutter = 10.5 mm
•
mean distance film-shutters = 13.75 mm (cell 443)
•
minimum source to film distance = 1000 mm
•
maximum source to film distance = 1500 mm.
The origin position for the calculation of all runs is the one relative to the
calibration of the shutters minimum potmeter, i.e. when the shutters are
wide open.
As to line subdivisions, this position is equal to a 475 mm opening,
therefore to obtain an opening equal to 0 mm the shutters will have to
move of 475/2 mm.
As to cross subdivisions, the window opening start will require a run
equal to (475/2)+180=417.5 mm., where 180 mm is the width of the
small shutter.
Therefore to obtain an opening equal to 0 mm for cross subdivisions, the
shutters will have to move of 417.5 mm.
In the calculation of the formats to limit, the values KG (radiography
correction), calculated with min SID (1000 mm), will be used.
This allows to obtain a separation line between 2 adjacent radiograms
with min SID and a thicker line with higher SIDs.
Should a KG be used, calculated with SID greater than the min, the
obtained separation lines would be too thin or radiograms would overlap
in case of SIDs smaller that the one used for the KG calculation.
•
Calculation of the constant of exposure subdivisions
correction (KG)
KG = distance source-shutters / source to film distance
KG = 985.8/1000 = 0.9858
•
Calculation shutters opening in Full size
Format to limit in full size mode = (Film + 2) * KG
where:
2 = measure in mm in addition to the format to ensure the X-rays
cover the film completely
•
Calculation of the opening for Subdivision
Format subdivision = ([(Film - (2 * N.div)] / N.div) * KG
•
Dimension of the shutter run for subdivisions in line
Run = (426 / 2) - (Fsubdiv / 2)
•
Dimension of the shutter run for cross subdivisions
Run = 393 + (Fsubdiv / 2)
(Rev. 3)
11-41
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Access and data function of all groups (except group 100)
Table shutters opening for cassettes subdivisions cm.
DIMENSION CASSETTE WIDTH
13
15
18
20
24
30
35
40
43
FULL
542
565
543
563
546
548
557
553
560
SIZE
(131.2)
(153.0)
(183.5)
(200.0)
(240.0)
(301.0)
(353.8)
(401.0)
(431.0)
SUBDIV.
2L
544
564
547
549
558
554
561
(87.0)
(96.0)
(117.0)
(148.5)
(172.5)
(194.2)
(210.0)
SUBDIV.
3L
551
559
555
562
(99.0)
(114.8)
(127.8)
(139.0)
SUBDIV.
4L
SUBDIV.
4L
545
566
550
(86.0)
(118.0)
(147.5)
SUBDIV.
6L
556
669
(96.1)
(103.5)
552
(97.0)
Table shutters opening for cassettes subdivisions inches
DIMENSION CASSETTE WIDTH
5
7
8
9.5
10
11
12
14
17
FULL
639
660
640
650
643
653
645
656
661
SIZE
(132.2)
(182.4)
(205.0)
(243.0)
(256.0)
(280.0)
(308.0)
(360.0)
(431.0)
SUBDIV.
2L
641
651
644
654
646
657
662
(98.0)
(115.5)
(124.2)
(136.2)
(149.0)
(176.8)
(210.0)
SUBDIV.
3L
652
655
648
658
663
(78.0)
(89.4)
(99.3)
(115.0)
(139.0)
SUBDIV.
4L
SUBDIV.
4L
642
647
(100.0)
(149.0)
SUBDIV.
6L
APOLLO
659
664
(85.6)
(103.5)
649
(100.0)
11-42
(Rev. 4)
SERVICE MANUAL
Access and data function of all groups (except group 100)
11.3.5
Safety aspects for PDI-controlled movements
In case the PDI value generated by the software and sent to the motors'
activations differs from the feedback speed supplied by the potmeters or
by the encoders, the system must be able to recognise this effect and
therefore bring the equipment to a halt.
This inconvenient may be caused by a mechanical hardening or by a gear
slippage at the potmeter.
For each of the PDI-controlled movements, 2 values determine the
variance amount between PDI and speed, and the time beyond which this
variance triggers an alarm:
•
Variance time
It is expressed in seconds and it allows to mask possible spikes of the
value of the PDI value determined by friction or typical momentum of
inertia at the start.
In case a real problem occurs, the larger is this time, the longer will
be the movement before an alarm is issued.
•
K factor
This factor divides the PDI (PDI/k) value.
The software compares the value of the speed with the PDI/k value.
Being k the denominator of the fraction, the greater will be k, the
smaller will be the result of the fraction.
As the alarm is issued if PDI/k > speed, the smaller is the PDI/k
value the more a mechanically "rigid" movement will be accepted
without issuing any alarm.
By and large, the greater are the time values and k, which are set for
each movement, the more the movement will accept "hardenings",
allowing a non-controlled wide movement before issuing an alarm.
Angulation movement
Cell
Function
671
PID subdivision factor
672
Diagnosis delay
Unit
Default
Setting
8000
sec
1.0
Unit
Default
Scan movement
Cell
Function
673
PID subdivision factor
674
Diagnosis delay
(Rev. 3)
Setting
8000
sec
11-43
1.0
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Access and data function of all groups (except group 100)
Tilting-lifting movement
Cell
Function
675
PID subdivision factor
676
Diagnosis delay
Unit
Default
Setting
8000
sec
1.0
Unit
Default
Shutters movement
Cell
Function
679
PID subdivision factor
680
Diagnosis delay
Setting
10000
sec
1.0
Unit
Default
Cassette feeding movement
Cell
Function
681
PID subdivision factor
682
Diagnosis delay
Setting
10000
sec
1.0
Unit
Default
Cross subdivision movement
Cell
Function
685
PID subdivision factor
686
Diagnosis delay
APOLLO
Setting
10000
sec
11-44
1.0
(Rev. 3)
SERVICE MANUAL
Access and data function of all groups (except group 100)
11.4
Position 701 – EEprom copy
This program permits to make a copy from EEprom.
This component stores all data necessary to the functioning of the
equipment.
At every start these data are loaded in the RAM.
If for safety reasons, you need to copy these data on a spare backup
EEprom, please follow the procedure below:
1. Power off the equipment and position dip switches 1 and 3 on ON.
2. Power on the equipment.
The following will be displayed:
701 EEPROM – RAM
copy Press correction, then F3
To access the EEprom copy program, carry out the procedure of access to
the various groups as described above.
3. When the access to the copy program is enabled following the correct
procedures, press button MODE2 as displayed, then F3.
The data copy from EEprom to RAM will start.
The following message is displayed:
701 EEPROM – RAM
copy Transferring data
After a few seconds, if the process has been completed successfully
and no alarms are issued, the following message is displayed:
701 EEPROM – RAM
copy Transfer completed. Turn off
4. At this point, power off the equipment, replace the EEprom with an
identical component on which you might want to store all functional
data of the equipment.
5. Power the table back on. The following message is displayed:
702 RAM – EEPROM
copy Press correction, then F3
Carry out the same operations as for the EEprom – RAM copy.
The data will be stored on the new EEprom.
The equipment can now be used with a spare EEprom that contains all
functional data.
(Rev. 3)
11-45
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Access and data function of all groups (except group 100)
11.5
Position 711 – Clock settings and reset alarm
memory
Cells from 711 to 719 are used to set the date and time stored in the
RAM.
Date and time are used as they will be associated to the alarms that
might be issued. For a correct interpretation of the alarms memory, it is
imperative that date and time are correct.
Besides, it is also possible to reset the "alarms log" in the Flash Eprom.
Once access to edit position 711 has been achieved (see chapter 11) the
display shows:
711
22 - 10 - 2004
07 : 02 : 44
Scrolling the pages by keys "MODE3" and "TEST" the positions will be
displayed:
712
713
714
715
716
717
718
Year setting
Month setting
Day setting
Hour setting
Minutes setting
Seconds setting
Clock adjustment
04
10
22
07
02
44
+0.0
Position 718 permits to adjust the clock in case it runs too fast or too
slow due to Quarz variations.
The last position of this group is the following:
719 F3 = reset
Reset alarm memory
By pressing function key F3, the alarm memory stored in the Flash
eprom will be reset.
This resetting operation can be useful after the equipment maintenance.
APOLLO
11-46
(Rev. 3)
SERVICE MANUAL
Access and data function of all groups (except group 100)
11.6
Position 721 – Test Spot Film Device and table life
The Apollo table is set to perform cyclic movement tests.
These tests are useful when checking the movements for correct
functioning under stress conditions.
It is possible to perform tests for the Spot Film Device or table
movements.
After performing the access procedure, the following message will be
displayed:
721 SPOT FILM DEVICE test
1
TABLE test
2
By keying in the access code relative to this position, it will be possible to
select the type of test to be performed by typing 1 for the Spot Film
Device test or 2 for the table test.
(Rev. 3)
11-47
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Access and data function of all groups (except group 100)
11.6.1
Spot Film Device test
The Spot Film Device perform the initialisation procedure after which the
following message is displayed:
Load cassette 30x24
By loading the cassette correctly, the cyclic test begins and the following
message is displayed:
722
Test Spot Film Device life
Num.cycles: 00000000 Num.exp.: 00000000
A test cycle is structured in a way that the following positionings are
carried out:
Cassette position
Shutters and collimator position
Park
4th field I.I. (cell 217)
Program: 30 Full size
Full size 43
Park
Max I.I. (cell 216)
Program: 30/2
30/2
Park
Medium I.I. (cell 215)
Program: 30 Full size
Full size 43
Park
Min I.I. (cell 214)
Program: 30/3
30/3
Park
4th field I.I. (cell 217)
Program: 30 Full size
Full size 43
Park
Max I.I. (cell 216)
Program: 40/4 (line)
40/4 (line)
Park
Medium I.I. (cell 215)
Program: 30 Full size
Full size 43
Park
Min I.I. (cell 214)
Program: 30/4 (cross)
30/4 (cross)
In the Full size modality, the shutters position themselves on size 43
rather than on size 30 to carry out the maximum possible run.
Program 40/4 in line is carried out with cassette 30 as the program 4 in
line for cassette 30 is not available.
Every time the cassette is put in the parking position, the following
outputs are enabled:
•
fluoro request
•
CCD output in rotation
•
I.I. field output in rotation.
APOLLO
11-48
(Rev. 3)
SERVICE MANUAL
Access and data function of all groups (except group 100)
Every time the cassette is directed towards the exposure position:
•
the prep., digital prep, II step, exposure outputs are enabled
•
the grid oscillates for 1 sec.
WARNING:
As outputs for the system accessories get enabled, before starting the
Spot Film Device test, make sure that the accessories linked to the
Apollo table are not power-supplied.
At the end of each program the cassette is ejected, the cassette guides
are open and closed again until they grip the cassette.
At the end of a complete cycle (as described in the table), before resuming
with what described up until now, the following occurs:
•
the grid movement as far as the parking position and return to field
•
all outputs are turned on
•
all console LEDs flash up
•
the collimator lamp lights up for 5 secs.
On the display the number of exposures increases each time the cassette
position itself in the X-ray field, so is the number of cycles every time a
complete cycle is performed.
A complete cycle consists of 17 cassette positions.
The number of exposures can be modified by pressing button MODE2 to
enable the correction and by keying in the desired number by means of
the numeric keypad.
(Rev. 3)
11-49
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Access and data function of all groups (except group 100)
11.6.2
Table test
The table will cyclically perform movements that allow to check the
correct functioning of the various organs.
WARNING:
As the movements are activated automatically without opening the SF
circuit, during this test, the supervisor is disabled. Therefore its K3 ready
relay does not close. In order to perform the test, make a jumper on the
connector X47 between pins 6 and 7.
Remove the jumper at the end of the test.
WARNING:
The test is conceived in such a way to limit the movements in case
collisions occur. Nonetheless pay always attention during automatic
movements performed by this program. Particularly during the first
cycle, stay close to the emergency red button and be ready to activate it if
any risk condition occurs.
The following message is displayed:
723
Table life test
Number cycles: 00000000
Before starting the proper test cycle, the table goes into the default
position with the following settings:
•
Minimum SID
•
Tabletop in the middle
•
0° angulation
•
scan in the middle
•
Compressor in parking position
•
0° tilting
•
Minimum lift depending on the installed I.I..
Should in this phase a collision condition occur, the cycle is interrupted
and the following message is displayed:
Cycle interrupted due to collision
The equipment needs to be powered off, the life test interrupted and the
table positioned in a way such that no condition of collision occurs when
the default position is in the process of being reached.
APOLLO
11-50
(Rev. 3)
SERVICE MANUAL
Access and data function of all groups (except group 100)
A test cycle is structured in a way that the following positionings are
carried out:
•
SID ascent with concurrent compressor descent. When the limit is
reached, the movements invert the direction until they bring
themselves back with minimum SID and compressor in the parking
position
•
angulation towards the head, inversion until feet end of run and
return to 0°
•
scan movement towards head concurrent with table inward
movement. When the limit is reached, the movements invert their
direction until they reach the scan feet side and external table end of
run. Return of both movements to the centre
•
tilting towards Trendelembourg, movement inversion till reaching the
vertical end of run, then return to 0°.
At the end of the tilting movement, the number of cycles increases by one
unit and the cycle picks up again with the SID and compressor
movement.
The number of exposures can be modified by pressing button MODE2 to
enable the correction and by keying in the desired number by means of
the numeric keypad.
In case the room where the table is installed is of dimensions such that
the complete excursion of some movement is not possible, the test will
stop the movement in proximity of the collision limit.
(Rev. 3)
11-51
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Access and data function of all groups (except group 100)
11.7
Position 731 – Remote service function
Apollo table was designed to be able to transmit data stored in EEprom
and in Flash Eprom to a PC that can be directly connected to the CPU.
This function is still working in the background and not yet available.
APOLLO
11-52
(Rev. 3)
SERVICE MANUAL
Access and data function of all groups (except group 100)
11.8
Position 751 – Alarms memory
The recorded alarm storage function permits to recreate the equipment
history allowing the identification of anomalies or failures.
This archive is structured in such a way that the occurred diagnosis are
temporarily stored in the RAM, every 10 minutes the RAM "uploads"
these data in the Flash Eprom which, in turn, stores them permanently.
The Flash Eprom memory can store 100 messages that are stored in
progressive order with the LIFO system (last in, first out). The messages
with number 1 will therefore be the most recent to be moved to position
2, 3 , 4 etc. from the following ones. Messages 100 is deleted when a new
messages is stored.
The last 20 messages, those marked by positions from 1 to 20 are in the
long format, i.e. they take up 5 displays (pages) each.
(Rev. 3)
11-53
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Access and data function of all groups (except group 100)
THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
APOLLO
11-54
(Rev. 3)
SERVICE MANUAL
Access and data function of all groups (except group 100)
PAGE 751: Display alarms data and table positions
Note:
If ERR is displayed in one of the fields relative to a potmeter, when the error occurs, it means that the potmeter was out of range
Line 1
a
b
c
d
e
f
diagnosis position in the memory (from 1 to 20)
diagnosis code
diagnosis memorisation date (dd-mm-yy)
diagnosis memorisation hour (hh-mm)
tilting angle in degrees
scan position with respect to the centre in mm (negative head side)
g
h
i
l
m
column angle in degrees
source to film distance in mm
tabletop position with respect to the centre in mm (inside negative side)
main beam movement extension tube in mm
middle beam movement extension tube in mm
Line 2
a
b
0
0
1
p
E
N
±
g
(Rev. 3)
1
2
X
X
c
5
D
d
2
2
-
1
1
-
F
F
X
X
X
X
h
0
2
B
A
e
f
2
3
:
1
5
r
i
B
±
X
X
C
A
r
±
X
X
r
±
X
X
X
t
r
A
X
X
X
C
u
l
X
X
X
i
11-55
l
X
m
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Access and data function of all groups (except group 100)
PAGE 752: Display Spot Film Device organs and selections
Note:
If ERR is displayed in one of the fields relative to a potmeter, when the error occurs, it means that the potmeter was out of range
Line 1
n
o
p
q
r
s
shutters opening dimension in mm
gripping opening in mm
distance grid from minimum SW (parking side) in mm
cross.div trolley position from centre in mm
film level limitation dimension for width collimator in cm
film level limitation dimension for width collimator height in cm
t
u
v
z
w
x
film level limitation dimension for iris collimator in cm
cassette size (width x height)
selected cassette subdivision program
number of subdivisions still available
compressor in field = 1 in park = 0
I.I. lift position high = 1 low = 0
selected modality
0 = direct
3 = tomo spot film device
Line 2
y
n
l
i
m
±
X
C
i
r
X
X
t
APOLLO
o
X
X
C
A
p
q
G
A
N
X
X
X
G
r
i
X
X
s
X
X
x
X
X
D
i
v
X
X
u
1 = spot film device
2 = digital
4 = tomo digital 5 = angio
v
X
E
C
r
o
s
p
X
z
11-56
r
±
X
X
C
o
C
m
w
X
B
s
A
X
X
C
A
l
X
X
i
B
X
F
u
N
z
X
x
y
(Rev. 3)
SERVICE MANUAL
Access and data function of all groups (except group 100)
PAGE 753: Display joystick
Note:
The value 0 means that the joystick is idle, value 1 means that that control was active at the moment when the diagnosis occurred
Line 1
Position
j0
j1
j2
j3
j4
Joystick function
a
b
c
d
Collimator
Angulation
Scan – tabletop
Lift
Tilt.- function
height open
centering
out
up
vertical
height close
head side
in
Down
Trendelem.
width open
feet side
head side
width close
reset
feet side
centering
function
Position
j5
j6
j7
j8
j9
Joystick function
a
b
c
d
source-to-film dist.
compr-0-cent.tbltop
fluoro request
prep request
X-rays request
up
up
on/off
on/off
on/off
down
down
0 machine
centr.tabletop
Line 2
j0
b
c
d
X
X
X
C
o
C
o
l
l
X
D
F
F
X
X
a
b
j5
(Rev. 3)
a
j1
m
j6
a
b
c
d
X
p
E
N
X
X
X
z
C
X
X
X
X
a
b
c
d
j2
s
C
A
B
C
o
X
j7
a
11-57
A
j3
a
b
c
d
X
X
X
X
A
s
p
r
E
X
r
x X
j8
a
j9
C
a
b
X
X
j4
r
i
B
F
a
b
c
d
X
X
X
X
a
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Access and data function of all groups (except group 100)
PAGE 754: Display digital inputs
NOTE: The display of the inputs referred to the switches is =1 when the switch is in the NC position and therefore the input is at 0 V. As to
inputs from external accessories, 0 means disabled input, 1 enabled input.
Line 1: Groups A – B – C – D – E
Line 2: Groups F – G – H – I
A
A
0
1
2
11
18
Tube at 0°
End of run compressor high
End of run compressor low
Movement active compressor
Single Fault series input
D
33
34
36
40
41
Photosensor access cassette
Cassette size photosensor
Gripping pressure switch
Button double control vertical tilt.
Button double control Trendel. tilt.
G
52
53
54
60
61
Button double control tabletop center.
Button double control SID up
Button double control SID down
Dip switch modality 1 selection
Dip switch modality 2 selection
B
19
20
21
22
23
Generator ready
X-ray ON
Digital workspace
Spot film device workspace
Shelf safety
E
42
43
44
45
46
Button double control centering tilt.
Button double control lift up
Button double control lift down
Button double control scan head side
Button double control scan feet side
H
62
63
3
4
35
Dip switch modality 3 selection
Dip switch modality 4 selection
I.I. lift end of run high
I.I. lift end of run low
Trapping access
2 11 18
B 19 20 21 22 23
C 27 28 29 30 31
D 33 34 36 40 41
F 47 48 49 50 51
G 52 53 54 60 61
H 62 63
i
APOLLO
0
1
3
4 35
11-58
C
27
28
29
30
31
Auxiliary fluoro control
Auxiliary preparation control
R control (II step auxiliary)
main beam/angulation inverter started
middle beam/scan inverter started
F
47
48
49
50
51
Button double control angulation head side
Button double control angulation feet side
Button double control centering angulation
Button double control tabletop inside
Button double control tabletop outside
55
Button 0 machine
i
E 42 43 44 45 46
55
(Rev. 3)
SERVICE MANUAL
Access and data function of all groups (except group 100)
PAGE 755: Display digital outputs
NOTE: Motors enabling: R cassette, L cassette, shutters and cross subdivision are =1 when the motor is idle and =0 when is running. For all
other outputs 0 means disabled output, 1 enabled output.
Line 1: Groups L – M – N – P – Q
Line 2: Groups R – S – T – U – V
l
L
0
1
10
11
12
Angulation/scan request
Main beam/middle beam inverter request
SID relay up
SID relay down
Main beam brake release
P
26
27
28
29
30
Height collimator motor open request
Height collimator motor close request
Height collimator motor fast request
Iris collimator motor open request
Iris collimator motor request close
S
45
46
47
48
49
Tomography speed I
Tomography speed II
7° tomography angle
20° tomography angle
30° tomography angle
V
69
70
71
16
17
Enable L feeding motor
Enable shutters motor
Enable cross subdivision motor
Request I.I. lift motor high
Request I.I. lift motor low
0
r
(Rev. 3)
1 10 11 12
40 41 42 43 44
M
13
14
15
18
19
Middle beam brake release
Angulation brake release
Scan brake release
Tabletop motor in request
Tabletop motor out request
Q
31
32
33
34
35
Iris collimator motor fast request
Main beam/angulation invert enable forward
Main beam/angulation invert enable backward
Enabling middle beam/scan inverter forward
Enabling middle beam/scan inverter backwards
T
50
60
61
62
63
45° tomography angle
Grid in field motor request
Grid in parking pos. motor request
Request gripping opening motor
Request gripping closing motor
N
20
21
23
24
25
Compressor motor up request
Compressor motor down request
Width collimator motor open request
Width collimator motor close request
Width collimator motor fast request
R
40
41
42
43
44
fluoro request
X-rays request
Preparation request
Request digital preparation
Request II step
U
64
65
66
67
68
Direction R feeding motor
Direction L feeding motor
Direction shutter motor
Direction cross subdivision motor
Enable R feeding motor
m 13 14 15 18 19
N 20 21 23 24 25
p 26 27 28 29 30
Q 31 32 33 34 35
s
t
u 64 65 66 67 68
v
45 46 47 48 49
50 60 61 62 63
11-59
69 70 71 16 17
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Access and data function of all groups (except group 100)
When the diagnosis is moved - as a result of the most recent ones being introduced - to a memory position between 21 and 100,
the view is reduced and occupies one single line.
Because the view (page) consists of 2 lines, only 2 diagnosis at a time will be displayed.
The reduced diagnosis are displayed as follows:
PAGE 800: Display reduced diagnosis
Line 1
a
b
c
d
diagnosis position in the memory (from 21 to 100 odd numbers)
diagnosis code
diagnosis memorisation date (dd-mm-yy)
diagnosis memorisation hour (hh-mm)
e
f
g
h
diagnosis position in the memory (from 22 to 100 even numbers)
diagnosis code
diagnosis memorisation date (dd-mm-yy)
diagnosis memorisation hour (hh-mm)
Line 2
a
c
d
0
2
1
1
2
5
2
2
-
1
1
-
0
2
2
3
:
1
5
0
2
2
0
9
6
2
5
-
1
1
-
0
2
1
0
:
0
7
e
APOLLO
b
f
g
h
11-60
(Rev. 3)
SERVICE MANUAL
Access and data function of all groups (excluding group 100)
11.9
Position 850 – Table cycles memory
The Apollo table stores the activation times of the various movements
besides the number of exposures and, if present, the number of
movements of the I.I. lift.
This memorisation permits to check the wear and tear of the various
organs with respect to the working time, and permits to evaluate whether
preventative maintenance is necessary.
When technical maintenance entailing the replacement of organs takes
place, each movement activation time can be reset independently of the
other movements.
The cycles and times view is shown on 3 pages. To scroll the views, use
button MODE3 to scroll down and button TEST to scroll up.
Following the 3 cycles and times views, 15 reset pages for each data are
available.
The 8-digit exposure number increases each time an exposure is carried
out. This holds for the Spot Film Device, digital and direct modality.
The 7-digit number of cycles of the I.I. lift increases each time the I.I.
ascends or descends.
The activation of all other movements is displayed as time in minutes
and seconds. The common fraction of the 4-digit view indicates the
minutes, the 2-digit decimal fraction indicates the seconds.
In the same way as for the alarm memorisation, data are stored
temporarily in the RAM and every 10 minutes are permanently stored in
the Flash Eprom.
Following is a representation of the view relative to this group.
(Rev. 3)
11-61
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Access and data function of all groups (except group 100)
THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
APOLLO
11-62
(Rev. 3)
SERVICE MANUAL
Access and data function of all groups (except group 100)
PAGE 850: Display activation cycles (first page)
a
b
c
a
0
d
e
number of exposures (all modalities SFD–DIG–DIR)
fluoroscopy activation time
number of movements I.I. lift
b
0
0
0
0
0
0
E
x
p
o
s
.
0
activation time middle beam motor movement
activation time main beam motor movement
c
0
0
0
0
.
0
F
l
u
o
r
o
0
d
0
0
0
0
0
0
A
s
C
.
i
B
0
0
e
0
0
0
.
0
C
u
l
l
A
0
0
0
0
0
.
0
t
r
A
v
E
0
PAGE 851: Display activation cycles (second page)
f
g
h
f
0
(Rev. 3)
i
l
activation time scan motor movement
activation time angulation motor movement
activation time SID motor movement
g
0
0
0
.
0
C
A
r
r
o
0
0
activation time transversal tabletop motor movement
activation time compressor motor movement
h
0
0
0
.
0
p
E
N
D
.
0
0
0
i
0
0
.
D
F
F
11-63
0
0
0
l
0
0
0
.
B
A
r
.
0
0
0
0
0
0
.
0
0
C
o
m
p
r
.
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Access and data function of all groups (except group 100)
PAGE 852: Display activation cycles (third page)
m
n
o
m
0
APOLLO
p
q
activation time shutters motor movement
activ. time motors R and L belts cassette movement
activation time grid motor movement
n
0
0
0
.
0
0
l
i
m
i
t
.
0
activation time cross subdivision motor movement
activation time cassette close motor movement
o
0
0
0
.
0
C
A
s
s
.
0
0
p
0
0
0
.
0
0
G
r
i
G
l
.
11-64
0
q
0
0
0
.
0
C
r
o
C
E
0
0
0
0
0
.
0
0
G
A
N
A
s
C
.
(Rev. 3)
SERVICE MANUAL
Access and data function of all groups (except group 100)
From this point the 15 reset pages are displayed as follows:
00000000
F3 = reset
Resetting xxxxxx xxxxxxxx
where:
00000000
Resetting
= number of cycles or memorised time
= description of function to be reset.
By pressing key F3, the data will be reset.
(Rev. 3)
11-65
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Access and data function of all groups (excluding group 100)
THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
APOLLO
11-66
(Rev. 3)
SERVICE MANUAL
Single Fault operating logic
12
SINGLE FAULT OPERATING LOGIC
The scope of the Single Fault is a redundant check on the activation
circuits of the table movements, i.e. those functions that may be
dangerous to the patient if they are not under control.
This safety measure is devised in such as way that, if a single fault at a
time occurs (hence the term Single Fault), to the various levels of the
chain the movement consists of, the system can identify the fault and
take the appropriate action that brings the movement to an immediate
halt.
The movements of:
•
tilting – lift
•
angulation
•
scan
•
transversal tabletop movement
•
source to film distance (SID)
•
compressor
which are present on the remote-controlled table comply with the abovedescribed SF safety measures.
All controls relative to the above-listed movements, which are present on
both on the console and on the double control, together with the fluoro
and X-ray preparation movements, which are present on the pedal or on
the button, can be realised with a double microswitch (µS).
The first µS is connected on the open contact (NA) and will be responsible
for the movement request.
The second is connected to a closed contact (NC) and is connected in
series with all second µS that feature the SF safety function.
The series connection permits to have a single wire that is sent to an
input that reaches both the main processor and the supervisor.
The control logic bases the SF check on the correspondence of the SF
circuit and of the movements request.
Both conditions must be fulfilled in order to guarantee the activation of
the movement (SF circuit open, movements request circuit close).
Moreover, thanks to the feedback of the potmeters of each "movement
group", the main processor is able to recognise if a movement is active
without an active request.
To complete the redundant checks on all levels, a second processor called
supervisor is connected via serial and parallel port (on the above-listed
movements outputs) to the main processor.
(Rev. 3)
12-1
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Single Fault operating logic
This permits to check a possible malfunctioning of the main processor
that will have to manage in a consistent way the serial and parallel data
to the output ports.
2 relays called ready relays (K2 and K3) are controlled each by a
processor and the contact are connected in series.
The series of contacts interrupts the supply of the magnetic switch that
supplies the power circuits. If any anomaly is detected, one or both
processors stop exciting the relative relay and interrupt immediately any
movement.
Thanks to such HW and SW logic, each organ responsible for the
movement is monitored and if a failure on the movement activation
circuit occurs, the system can detect and interrupt the movement itself
generating an alarm.
APOLLO
12-2
(Rev. 3)
SERVICE MANUAL
Functionality
13
FUNCTIONALITY
13.1
Collision
When activating one or more movements, one part of the equipment
might reach the safety limit beyond which a collision with the walls, the
ceiling or the floor might occur.
This limit, set by means of group 200 cells, represents an imaginary
insuperable software barrier beyond which it is impossible to move for
any part of the equipment.
When a part of the equipment reaches this limit, the movement that
determined this situation is stopped.
The message LIMIT REACHED is displayed until the activation of a
command that informs the operator that some movements might be
disabled.
The parts of the table that can collide with walls, floor or ceiling are: the
image intensifier, the extremities of the main beam (corresponding to the
extremities of the tabletop), the compressor and the tube-collimator
group.
When the extremities of the main beam, the intensifier or the compressor
reach such limit, movements commands that can bring the element into
collision are suddenly inhibited. On the other hand, movements
commands that can bring the components away from the collision point
are free.
When the intensifier reaches the limit towards the floor because of the
scan movement, the message SCAN LIMIT is displayed.
Should this limit be reached because of the tilting movement instead,
depending on where the movement comes from and is directed to
(example from –90° towards 0° or from 0° towards +90° etc.), the piloting
algorithm of the main beam and middle beam motors is adjusted by
activating an anti-collision function.
This will allow the intensifier to move out of the limit area without
stopping the movement and with no need for the operator to adjust the
patient centering position.
As for the tube-collimator group, because of the particular Apollo table
lift-tilting function, all those movements that apparently may not be
dangerous but, if they continued, could increase the risk of collision are
inhibited.
Following are 4 tables with the representations of the various conditions.
Each representation is a "LIMIT REACHED" condition for the tubecollimator group with the right wall, the left wall, the ceiling and the
floor.
(Rev. 3)
13-1
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Functionality
In the first pair of columns are indicated the angles in which the table
(RIB) or the column (ANG) could find themselves when the limit is
reached.
"0" referred to the tilting means that the table is in the horizontal
position, "+" indicates that the table is inclined towards the vertical
position and "-" that the table is inclined towards the Trendelemburg.
"0" referred to the angulation indicates that the column is perpendicular
to the table, "+" indicates that the column is inclined towards the feet
and "-" that it is inclined towards the head.
The 5 following couples of columns report the movements and relative
directions responsible for the direct or indirect movement of the tubecollimator group.
The YES cells indicate that the movement is free, while the NO cells
indicated that the movement is inhibited.
The grey cells indicate that the potential collision will never occur for that
particular combination of tilting angle and angulation angle.
Table showing movements allowed for Tube – Right Wall
collision
ANGLES
TILT
ANG
0
0
0
0
+
+
+
-
APOLLO
SCAN
ANGULATION
TILTING
LIFT
SID
HEAD
FEET
HEAD
FEET
TREND
VERT
UP
DOWN
UP
DOWN
+
-
YES
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
NO
NO
NO
YES
0
0
YES
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
NO
YES
NO
YES
+
+
-
YES
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
YES
YES
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
NO
YES
NO
YES
YES
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
NO
NO
NO
YES
13-2
(Rev. 3)
SERVICE MANUAL
Functionality
Table showing movements allowed for Tube – Left Wall
collision
ANGLES
TILT
ANG
0
0
0
0
+
+
+
-
SCAN
ANGULATION
TILTING
LIFT
SID
HEAD
FEET
HEAD
FEET
TREND
VERT
UP
DOWN
UP
DOWN
+
-
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
NO
NO
YES
0
0
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
NO
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
YES
+
+
-
Table showing movements allowed for Tube – Ceiling
collision
ANGLES
SCAN
ANGULATION
TILTING
LIFT
SID
TILT
ANG
HEAD
FEET
HEAD
FEET
TREND
VERT
UP
DOWN
UP
DOWN
0
0
0
0
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
YES
NO
YES
+
-
NO
NO
NO
YES
NO
NO
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
NO
YES
NO
NO
NO
NO
YES
NO
YES
0
0
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
YES
YES
NO
YES
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
YES
YES
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
YES
YES
NO
YES
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
YES
+
+
+
-
(Rev. 3)
+
+
-
13-3
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Functionality
Table showing movements allowed for Tube – Floor collision
ANGLES
TILT
ANG
0
0
0
0
+
+
+
-
APOLLO
SCAN
ANGULATION
TILTING
LIFT
SID
HEAD
FEET
HEAD
FEET
TREND
VERT
UP
DOWN
UP
DOWN
0
0
YES
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
YES
YES
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
YES
YES
YES
NO
YES
+
+
-
YES
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
YES
YES
NO
YES
YES
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
YES
YES
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
YES
YES
YES
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
YES
YES
YES
NO
YES
+
-
13-4
(Rev. 3)
SERVICE MANUAL
Functionality
13.1.1
Anticollision barrier
When the room where the device is installed has irregularities in its
geometry that make necessary supplemental anticollision measures, the
Apollo table can be protected against the risk of collision with these
geometrical irregularities of the room.
Depending from the specific needs it is possible to implement light
barrier sensors or antenna switches that when activated prevent table
components from hitting obstacles of the room.
Connection of these safety devices must be done so that it sends 0V to
input X0-17 when operating conditions are correct; when the safety
barrier is infringed the input must open
Once the anticollision sensor is activated, the movement in progress is
stopped and a message is displayed:
<< LIMIT BARRIER >>
with an intermittent buzzer sound.
To exit this condition and restore normal operation of the system, it will
be possible to activate only the movement that had generated the "limit
barrier" alarm in the opposite direction.
All other commands (joystick on console and keys on the on-board
keypad) are disabled until the message "limit barrier" is removed.
If the limit barrier is activated in the following conditions:
• switch on of the system
• access to tomography functionality
• access to angiographic functionality
• during execution of a Tomography test
• during execution of a step angiography test
• movement to reach a stored position by means of command "0".
the movement is stopped and the active functionality, if any, is reset.
In this condition no joystick or button of the on board keyboard is active,
then to exit from this "limit barrier" lock it is necessary to proceed with a
"bypass" procedure as outlined here below.
Keeping pressed at the same time keys F4 and F5, positioned in the
lower end of the display, ALL movement commands by joystick or on
board keyboard are enabled, making possible to start any movement.
This "bypass" procedure is always possible when the "limit barrier"
condition has been reached.
WARNING:
This "bypass" procedure can be very dangerous since a wrong command
can cause any part of the table to hit the obstacle in the room. Before
giving any movement command it is necessary to check carefully which
movement will bring the table far away from the obstacle. In any case
always activate the movement with great care in short pulses.
(Rev. 3)
13-5
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Functionality
13.1.2
Anti entrapment device
The Apollo table can be equipped with an anti-entrapment feature
(standard on C-CSA-US versions) which blocks the angulation movement
an the inner table top side movement should the patient come in contact
with the areas in which the anti-entrapment sensors are located.
In this case the angulation and/or inner table top side movements are
automatically blocked and it is possible to activate the unit only in the
opposite direction of that which caused the entrapment.
The circuit is realised in such a way if the safety membranes are pressed
the movement is blocked as described above, and if the circuit is broken
alarm 82 is generated.
APOLLO
13-6
(Rev. 3)
SERVICE MANUAL
Functionality
13.2
Compressor
When the compressor is not in the parking position (i.e. when the high
end of run microswitch is released), by enabling the tabletop movement
or the scan movement, the following will occur:
•
the requested movement is not activated
•
the compressor goes up for 0.5 sec after complete release of the
compression force.
When the time limit is almost reached, the ascent stops and a
confirmation acoustic signal is issued.
Release and push again the movement joystick to activate the desired
movement.
The compressor ascent movement is as all Apollo table movements of the
"dead man" type, therefore, if during the compressor ascent the joystick
is released, the movement will stop.
By pushing the joystick once again, the ascent is enabled again for a time
depending on the current compression force without taking into account
the previous partial ascent.
Only after completion of the ascent, the tabletop and scan movements
will be free.
It will then be possible to move the patient and the tube without risk
and, afterwards, compress the patient once again.
When the compressor is in a position different from the idle one, by
activating the angulation movement, the compressor is taken back to the
parking position.
The compressor releases the compression by enabling the cone ascent for
240 msecs if the potmeter exceeds the set dead band.
This happens typically when the patient makes a strong pressure on the
cone, such as by breathing.
G
(Rev. 3)
NOTE:
Every time the compressor activates the parking switch, the set value of
the compressor force is forced to 5 kg (11.0 lbs).
13-7
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Functionality
13.3
Collimator
The Apollo table is designed to accept a square field collimator or a
square field one with iris.
The software pilots the iris axis if the presence of the collimator with iris
is confirmed through the selection of cell 253.
The collimator operating modes are:
•
automatic
•
manual.
The automatic mode can in turn be associated to the Hold function.
The selection of the collimator operating mode depends both on the
choice of the operator and on the condition of the "Digital (X0-14)" and "
Spot Film Device (X0-15)" inputs.
The conditions are:
Inputs
Manual modality
Automatic modality
X0-14 ON (Digital)
NOT POSSIBLE
ACTIVE
X0-15 ON (Spot Film Device)
SELECTABLE
SELECTABLE
X0-14 OFF X0-15 OFF (Direct)
ACTIVE
NOT POSSIBLE
When the automatic function is active or selected, the Hold function can
be activated or excluded by the operator.
•
APOLLO
Manual modality
–
If no program is selected, when the fluoro control is not active, by
means of the joystick it is possible to collimate a format
comprised between the minimum and maximum size.
The shutters inside the Spot Film Device follow the width axis of
the collimator during this limitation.
Conversely, when the fluoro control is activated, the maximum
format available is equal to the selected I.I..
–
When selecting a program whose format is smaller than the
format of the selected I.I., the collimator positions itself on the
division format, which is the largest possible format. It will be
possible then to collimate, by means of the joystick, any format
comprised between the minimum and the subdivision format.
This condition is valid regardless whether the fluoro control is
activated or not.
The shutters inside the Spot Film Device follow the collimator
width axis if a further reduction is performed, except for if a cross
subdivision has been performed
13-8
(Rev. 3)
SERVICE MANUAL
Functionality
–
–
–
–
–
–
•
(Rev. 3)
When selecting a program whose format is greater in comparison
with the one of the selected I.I., when the fluoro control is not
active, by means of the joystick, it will be possible to position the
axes on formats comprised between the minimum and the
selected format.
Conversely, when the fluoro control is activated, the maximum
possible format is the one of the selected I.I. field.
The manual function LED on the console is always on regardless
whether the fluoro control is on or off.
In case the collimation is greater in comparison with the selected
I.I. field, by pressing the fluoro control, the collimation will be
reduced to the I.I. format.
When the fluoro control is released, the shutters go back to the
position in they had before the activation of the fluoro control.
At any time, the automatic collimator function may be selected.
Both axes will bring themselves on the selected I.I. format
position
If the equipment is powered off when the collimator is in the
manual mode, when powering back on, the automatic function
will be activated.
In case an iris collimator is present, the iris limitation control
buttons are not active and the iris will always be circumscribed
at the width and height axes.
Automatic modality
–
If no program is selected, by means of the joystick, it is possible
to collimate a format comprised between the set I.I. format and
the minimum one.
The shutters inside the Spot Film Device follow the width axis of
the collimator during this limitation.
–
When selecting a program whose format is smaller than the
format of the selected I.I., the collimator positions itself on the
division format, which is the largest possible format. It will be
possible then to collimate, by means of the joystick, any format
comprised between the minimum and the subdivision format.
The shutters inside the Spot Film Device follow the collimator
width axis if a further reduction is performed, except the case in
which a cross subdivision has been performed
–
When selecting a program whose format is greater in comparison
with the one of the selected I.I., by means of the joystick, it will
be possible to position the axes on formats comprised between
the minimum and the selected I.I. field.
–
When the preparation control is activated, the collimator always
positions itself on the selected subdivision format
–
At any time the manual collimator function may be selected.
–
If an iris collimator is present, it is possible to collimate in a
circular way by means of the iris control buttons. In this case the
axes and height will be circumscribed to the iris.
13-9
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Functionality
•
Hold automatic modality
The functioning is identical to the automatic modality except for the
case in which during the fluoro a reduction by means of the joystick
of one of both axes is performed.
In this case when preparation is activated the collimator stays in the
position obtained by means of the joystick.
The same holds for the limitations performed by means of the iris.
Both collimators, with or without iris are fitted with a halogen lamp for
the patient centering without fluoro. By pressing the lamp collimator
button when the light is off the light goes on, by pressing the lamp
collimator button when the light is on the light goes off.
The light goes off anyhow after 45 secs. from the switching on.
WARNING:
The switching on and off cycle of the collimator lamp should not exceed 2
consecutive duty cycles followed by 180 secs. of switching off.
This work cycle ensures that the parts that might get into contact with
the patient do not reach high temperatures due to overheating of the
halogen lamp.
APOLLO
13-10
(Rev. 3)
SERVICE MANUAL
Functionality
13.4
Table automatic positioning
The Apollo table is designed in such a way to allow to store 3 operating
conditions.
Buttons MODE1, MODE2 and MODE3 permit to store and retrieve these
conditions, the joystick and the 0 key on the console and on the keypad
on board of the table permit to reach stored positions.
The 3 conditions are stored in the EEPROM and contain default values
when the equipment is shipped from the factory and every time that the
potmeters adjustment subroutine (group 100) is accessed.
Note that if the operator has stored positions different from the default
ones, by performing technical maintenance with access to group 100,
such memorised values will be lost. The same will happen if the EEPROM
is replaced.
When all 3 memories are default ones, the 3 LEDs relative to the MODE
buttons are off.
The default positions are as follows:
•
tilting at 0° with lift at minimum depending on the installed I.I.
•
scan in the middle
•
column at 0°
•
SID on minimum
•
Tabletop in the centre
•
Compressor in parking position
•
Slow tilting speed
•
tabletop and scan movements orientation according to monitor.
To modify these stored values, bring the above-listed movements in the
desired positions and choose the 3 selections (tilting speed and
movement orientation) depending on the need.
After setting the above-mentioned values, press for 5 secs. the MODE
button you want to associate with the actual configuration.
At the end of the 5 secs. the following message is displayed:
POSITIONS STORED
To recall a condition, press the MODE button which the desired setting is
associated to. When the relative LED lights up, hold the joystick or key 0
pressed until the setting is completed.
The completion of such procedure is confirmed with the following
message
POSITIONS REACHED
on the display.
When one or more stored values are present, the last selection (LED
associated to the MODE button on) is maintained both during the
operating mode and at the start.
The joystick and button 0 are not active, therefore the table positioning is
not allowed when the angio step and tomo modalities are active.
(Rev. 3)
13-11
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Functionality
THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
APOLLO
13-12
(Rev. 3)
SERVICE MANUAL
Operating mode
14
OPERATING MODE
14.1
Spot Film Device
Input X0-15 is active.
The size of the cassette in the Spot Film Device and the number of
possible exposures are shown on the display once the subdivision
program has been selected.
The collimator can be selected in automatic, automatic+hold, or manual
mode.
It is possible to carry out investigations in fluoro and in exposure by
operating the pedal commands (standard) or button controls (optional).
The Spot Film Device performs all the cassette-carrying scan, vibration
grid and shutter movements.
These also follow possible reductions carried out by the width axle of the
collimator.
It is possible to carry out radiography investigations with return of the
cassette to the park at the end of every exposure to allow a fluoro
investigation or in rapid mode, by performing sequential exposures.
(Rev. 3)
14-1
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Operating mode
1.1.1
"Standard radiography" performance block diagram
→
• Park cassette
• I.I. or div. shutters
• I.I. or div. collimator
←
Reset
joystick
activation
↓
↑
↑
APOLLO
I step:
• Movement towards posit.
exposure of:
- Cassette
- Shutters
- Collimator
•"Prep. request" out ON
↓
• Reaching
final position of:
- Cassette
- Shutters
- Collimator
within 5 secs.
YES ↓
II step at the generator
• Input "generat. Ready"
within 3 secs.
YES ↓
• Grid movement start
• Cell 223 time decrease
↓
• Cell 223 timeout :
"X-ray request" out ON
↓
↑
NO
→
NO
→
Alarm
060
Alarm
062
→
→
↑
NO
• "X-ray presence" input
ON within 0.36 secs.
YES ↓
Exposure in progress.
• Pedal release with
"X-ray presence" input
ON
NO ↓
• "X-ray presence" input
ON after 6.5 secs.
YES
→
NO ↓
YES • I and II step release
with X-ray end time.
←
("X-ray presence" OFF)
NO ↓
←
→
Alarm
064
→
↑
YES
→
14-2
I step:
Alarm 067
II step:
Alarm 066
→
↑
Alarm
065
→
(Rev. 3)
SERVICE MANUAL
Operating mode
14.1.2
"Rapid sequence" block diagram
→
• Subdivision and
shutter select.
• Park cassette
• I.I. or div. shutters
• I.I. or div. collimator
↓
I step:
• Movement towards
posit. exposure of:
- Cassette
- Shutters
- Collimator
• "Prep. request" out ON
• Grid movem. start
↓
• Reaching final
position of:
- Cassette
- Shutters
- Collimator
within 5 secs.
YES ↓
II step at the generator
• Input "generat. Ready"
within 3 secs.
YES ↓
• "X-ray request" out ON
↓
• "X-ray presence" input
ON within 0.36 secs.
YES ↓
• "X-ray presence" input
(End X-ray) OFF within:
6.5 sec
- "X-ray request" out OFF
YES ↓
Program
end
NO ↓
• Pedal release with
program not end
NO ↓
• Next Tray
↑
• Out "X-ray request" ON
↓
YES • "X-ray presence" input
ON within 3 secs.
←
(Rev. 3)
←
↑
Reset
joystick activation
alarms
↑
• Progr. aborted
• Tray expelled
NO
→
Alarm
061
NO
→
Alarm
062
↑
→
→
↑
NO
→
Alarm
064
→
↑
NO
→
Alarm
065
→
YES
↑
→
YES
→
→
→
↑
Alarm
063
→
↓
↑
NO
→
14-3
Alarm
064
→
Tray OUT or
park (sel. esp)
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Operating mode
14.2
Standard tomographic
The tomographic mode presents various options: 4 different tomography
angles (7, 20, 30, 45) each of which can be associated with 2 speeds.
The layer can be set with steps of 1 mm from a value 0 (tabletop level) to
a value of 350 mm (13.8").
The direction of the tomographic movement can be from left to right or
viceversa and the automatic layer increase function can be selected.
This function automatically increases the level of the layer depending on
the angle set while respecting the "thickness of the cut" as shown below:
•
7° increase 30 mm (1.1")
•
20° increase 20 mm (0.8")
•
30° increase 10 mm (0.4")
•
45° increase 5 mm (0.2")
It is possible to carry out tomography in rapid sequence (sequential
tomography).
In this mode all the possible options for standard tomography, the
automatic layer increase is always active.
At the end of the ray angle, the operating mode provides for the
immediate departure of the column for the next tomography.
The exposures will therefore be alternatively from left to right and vice
versa.
APOLLO
14-4
(Rev. 4)
SERVICE MANUAL
Operating mode
14.2.1
"Standard tomography" block diagram
→
• Tomo ON (ang+speed+div)
• Park cassette
• I.I. or div. shutters
• I.I. or div. collimator
←
Centering
joystick
activation
↓
↑
↑
I step:
• Movement towards
exposure position of:
Cassette, Shutters,
Collimator
• Grid movement start
• Column towards load
• Out "prep. request." ON
↓
• Reached final position of:
- Cassette
- Shutters
- Collimator
within 5 secs.
YES ↓
II step at the generator
• Input "generat. Ready"
within 3 secs.
YES ↓
• Column movement Start
↓
• Column in Tomo angle
• "X-ray request" out ON
↓
• "X-ray presence" input
ON within 0.36 secs.
YES ↓
Tomography in progress
• "X-ray presence" input
OFF with column still at
Tomo (X-ray request ON)
NO ↓
• X-ray presence ON for
more than 0.7 sec from
the end of Tomo (X-ray
request OFF)
NO ↓
YES • I and II step release
with column centering
←
ended
NO ↓
↑
Centering joystick
YES
activation. Column at 0°
←
(Rev. 3)
↑
Reset
joystick
activation
NO
→
Alarm
060
→
NO
→
Alarm
062
→
↑
↑
NO
→
Alarm
064
→
↑
YES
→
Alarm
068
→
↑
YES
→
14-5
Alarm
069
→
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Operating mode
14.2.2
"Sequential tomography" block diagram
→
• Tomo ON (ang+speed+div)
• Cassette park
• I.I. or div. shutters
• I.I. or div. collimator
←
Centering joystick
activation
↓
I step:
• Movement towards position
exposure of:
- Cassette, Shutters,
Collimator
• Grid movement start
• Column towards load
• "Prep. request." out ON
↓
• Reaching final position of:
- Cassette, Shutters,
Collimator
within 5 secs.
YES ↓
II step at the generator
• Input "generat.Ready"
within 3 secs.
YES ↓
↑
→
↑
Reset joystick
activation
NO
→
Alarm
060
NO
→
Alarm
062
↑
→
→
• Column movement start
↓
• Column in Tomo angle
• Out "X-ray request" ON
↓
↑
↑
NO
• "X-ray presence" input
ON within 0.36 secs.
→
YES ↓
Tomography in progress
• "X-ray presence" input OFF
with column still in
Tomo (X-ray request ON)
NO ↓
• X-ray presence ON for
more than 0.7 sec from the
end of Tomo (X-ray request
OFF)
NO ↓
NO
←
Alarm
064
→
↑
YES
→
Alarm
068
→
↑
YES
→
Alarm
069
→
• Start for next tomography
X-ray control release
YES ↓
YES • End of sequence with column
centering ended
←
NO ↓
↑
YES
Centering joystick
activation. Column at 0°
←
APOLLO
14-6
(Rev. 3)
SERVICE MANUAL
Operating mode
14.3
Direct
Both the X0-14 and X0-15 inputs are deactivated.
The display indicates DIR.
The collimator can only be selected in manual mode.
It is not possible to carry out investigations in fluoro because the fluoro
request output towards the generator is disabled.
It is possible to carry out tests in exposure by operating the pedal
commands (standard) or button controls (optional).
The Spot Film Device in this phase does not perform the cassette
carrying scan movement, grid vibration and shutters.
The preparation outputs, II step and exposure are sent to the generator
and without conditioning.
Neither the tomography nor the angio step mode can be selected.
(Rev. 3)
14-7
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Operating mode
14.4
Digital
This mode is possible only if the system is fitted with an image
acquisition, storage and processing device.
The Apollo table has been designed and built to be connected to the
digital systems VDR 2000, DIVA and DIVA-D.
Input X0-14 is active.
The display shows the initials DIG.
The collimator can only be selected in the automatic mode or
automatic+hold.
It is possible to carry out investigations in fluoro and in exposure by
operating the pedal commands (standard) or button controls (optional).
The Spot Film Device, if fitted, does not perform the cassette and grid
vibration movement in this phase, while the shutters follow possible
reductions carried out by the width axle of the collimator.
APOLLO
14-8
(Rev. 3)
SERVICE MANUAL
Operating mode
14.4.1
"Digital radiography" block diagram
→
• Digital ON
• No cass or cass in park
←
Reset
joystick
activation
↓
↑
I step:
• Out "prep. request." ON
↓
II step at the generator
• Input "generat. Ready"
within 3 secs.
YES ↓
• "X-ray request" out ON
↓
• "X-ray presence" input
ON within 0.36 secs.
YES ↓
Exposure in progress
DSI Exposure frequency
↓
YES • I and II step release
in any condition
←
NO ↓
(Rev. 3)
NO
→
NO
→
Alarm
062
→
↑
Alarm
064
→
←
↑
14-9
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Operating mode
14.5
Digital Tomography
The availability of this mode depends on the presence of a digital image
acquisition system (see digital mode).
The digital tomographic mode makes it possible to carry out tests with
the same options of the standard tomographic mode.
The difference consists in the image receiver that will instead be the I.I. of
the film.
APOLLO
14-10
(Rev. 3)
SERVICE MANUAL
Operating mode
14.5.1
"Digital tomography" block diagram
→
• Digital ON
• Tomo ON (ang+speed)
←
Centering
joystick
activation
↑
Reset
joystick
activation
↓
I step:
• Column towards load
• Out "prep. request." ON
↑
↓
II step at the generator
• Input "generat. Ready"
within 3 secs.
YES ↓
• Movement column start
↓
• Column in Tomo angle
• "X-ray request" out ON
↓
• "X-ray presence" input
ON within 0.36 secs.
YES ↓
• X-ray presence ON for
more than 0.7 sec from
the end of Tomo (X-ray
request OFF)
NO ↓
YES • I and II step release
with column centering
←
ended
NO ↓
↑
YES
Centering joystick
activation. Column at 0°
←
(Rev. 3)
NO
→
Alarm
062
→
↑
NO
→
YES
→
14-11
Alarm
064
→
↑
Alarm
069
→
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Operating mode
14.5.2
"Digital tomography" block diagram
→
• Digital ON
• Tomo ON (ang+speed)
←
Centering
joystick
activation
↑
Reset
joystick
activation
↓
I step:
• Column towards load
• Out "prep. request." ON
↓
II step at the generator
• Input "generat. Ready"
within 3 secs.
YES ↓
→
↑
↑
APOLLO
↑
NO
→
Alarm
062
→
• Column movement start
↓
• Column in Tomo angle
• "X-ray request" out ON
↓
• "X-ray presence" input
ON within 0.36 secs.
↑
NO
YES ↓
• X-ray presence ON for
more than 0.7 sec from
the end of Tomo (X-ray
request OFF)
NO ↓
NO • Start for next tomography
X-ray control release
←
YES ↓
YES • I and II step release
with column centering
←
ended
NO ↓
Centering joystick
YES
activation. Column at 0°
←
→
YES
→
14-12
Alarm
064
→
↑
Alarm
069
→
(Rev. 3)
SERVICE MANUAL
Operating mode
14.6
Angiographic
Also this mode is only possible if the system is fitted with a digital
acquisition system.
The step angiographic mode makes it possible to carry out tests of the
peripheral artery circulation limiting the quantity of contrast liquid
administered to the patient.
The mode provides for the movement of the Spot Film Device-I.I.-tube
group with "steps" established by the size of the selected I.I. field.
When the Spot Film Device-I.I.-tube group completes the movement, the
prep.- II step-exposure make it possible to take digital images.
(Rev. 3)
14-13
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Operating mode
14.6.1
"Stepping angio" block diagram
• Angiografic mode select.
• Digital ON
• Scan positioning
• Station choice
↓
←
↑
Reset joystick
activation
alarms
↑
• Progr. aborted
I station:
I step:
• "Digital prep. request"
out ON
NO
←
YES ↓
II step at the generator
• Input "generat. Ready"
within 3 secs.
YES ↓
• "X-ray request" out ON
↓
• "X-ray presence" input
ON within 0.36 secs.
YES ↓
• Exposure release and
prep. per exposure
interruption
↓
I step: (within 15 sec)
• "Digital prep. request"
out ON
• Scan movement start
per step
YES ↓
NO
→
Alarm
062
→
↑
NO
→
Alarm
064
→
↑
NO
→
Alarm
078
→
Next station
• Scan position reached
• Last station
YES ↓
Program
end
APOLLO
14-14
(Rev. 3)
SERVICE MANUAL
Emergency end run
15
EMERGENCY END R
RUN
All the table movements are stopped by the software at the limits
established by the potmeters and stored in the EEprom.
All the table movements are equipped with hardware emergency end
runs, in case the software fails to stop for a malfunction, the emergency
microswitch positioned immediately after the end of the run software, is
engaged.
The emergency microswitches are connected in series and, if the circuit
opens, power is cut to the power supply main switch K1L.
All the power circuits are broken ensuring the total safety of the patient,
of the operator and the table if there is a malfunction.
The opening of the main switch K1L also determines the opening of the
"power circuit OK" input (X15 pin 10) that generates diagnosis 080.
The part that has engaged the emergency switch must be identified by
the following table:
Switch
Organ
Side
S32
Main beam-middle beam
Main beam-middle beam collision
S44
SID
LOW
S45
SID
HIGH
S46
Tabletop
Inner
S47
Tabletop
Outer
S48
Middle beam
Minimum
S49
Middle beam
Maximum
S50
Angulation
Head
S51
Angulation
Feet
S52
Scan
Feet
S53
Scan
Head
S54
Main beam
Minimum
S55
Main beam
Maximum
After turning off the system, the reason for this situation being created
must be identified.
(Rev. 3)
15-1
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Emergency end run
Once the cause has been removed, do the following to restore operation:
1. Press reset button S1 in the electrical cabinet.
2. Turn on the equipment keeping the button pressed down. Wait till
the end of the initialisation cycle.
3. Use the joystick which caused the emergency situations, in the
direction opposite that of the emergency.
4. Release button S1.
WARNING:
If button S1 is pressed, the series of emergency microswitches is
overridden, so if the cause of the failure is not removed, there will be the
danger that the movement follows its run without any electrical
protection.
APOLLO
15-2
(Rev. 3)
SERVICE MANUAL
Hardware adjustment
16
HARDWARE ADJUSTMENT
16.1
A3 output PCB
The trimmers used for the collimator Axle Adjustment Movements are on
the A3 output PCB.
Here below you will find information about how to operate on them.
16.1.1
(Rev. 3)
Collimator axle speed adjustment
•
Trimmer to be adjusted:
R15-R20-R25.
•
Function:
–
R15:
width collimator axle speed adjustment
–
R20:
height collimator axle speed adjustment
–
R25:
iris collimator axle speed adjustment
•
Procedure of adjustment:
The adjustment of these trimmers makes it possible to vary the
speeds of the collimator axle movement motor.
This adjustment varies both the speeds the collimator motors use.
The high speed is the one directly obtained from the relative trimmer
adjustment, and is applied when an axle is at distance from the set
point that is greater than the slowdown band (cells 232, 233, 234).
This speed is always used with activation of the joysticks.
The low speed is applied, by means of a hardware partition
deactivated by a processor command. The low speed is activated
when the axle enters the slowdown zone. LEDs 26, 29 and 32
indicate when the high speed is activated.
The rotation of the trimmer in a clockwise direction increases the
speeds. The trimmers are of the 20 rev. type.
The possibility of monitoring this adjustment is double.
It is in fact possible to verify the adjustment in terms of both
reference voltages at the operating devices and directly on the Power
supply motors.
It is possible to measure the reference voltage to the operational IC
for the collimator shutters movement between:
–
TP10 (gnd) - TP1:
width collimator motor
–
TP10 (gnd) - TP4:
height collimator motor
and can assume a value between 0 and 8 Vdc that will correspond
proportionally to the value of the voltage at the motors from 0 to
24 Vdc.
16-1
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Hardware adjustment
It is possible to measure the reference voltage to the operational IC
for the iris collimator shutters movement between:
–
TP10 (gnd) - TP7:
iris collimator motor
and can assume a value between 0 and 3.5 Vdc that will correspond
proportionally to the value of the voltage at the motors from 0 to
10 Vdc.
It will be possible to check the voltage at the ends of the motors
thanks to the :
–
TP2 - TP3:
width collimator motor
–
TP5 - TP6:
height collimator motor
–
TP8 - TP9:
iris collimator motor.
The required adjustment is obtained when the voltage at the ends of
the motors the measured voltage is 24 Vdc throughout the range of
movement at high speed.
APOLLO
16-2
(Rev. 3)
SERVICE MANUAL
Hardware adjustment
16.1.2
(Rev. 3)
Adjustment of collimator axle torque gain (armature
reaction)
•
Trimmer to be adjusted:
R38-R48-R58.
•
Function:
–
R38:
width collimator axle torque gain adjustment
–
R48:
height collimator axle torque gain adjustment
–
R58:
iris collimator axle torque gain adjustment
•
Adjustment procedure:
The adjustment of these trimmers makes it possible to adjust the
torque gain of the gripper movement motor.
The gain increases when the trimmer is turned in a clockwise
direction. The trimmers are twenty turn types.
A good adjustment of this gain makes it possible to get an even
movement that is free of vibrations, since in points where mechanical
hardening of the movement is possible, this gain provides a higher
torque in order to overcome the hardening.
To obtain the adjustment required do the following for each of the
axles:
1. Turn the trimmer of the axle to be adjusted in a clockwise
direction (+).
2. When the axle begins to wobble, turn the trimmer in an
anticlockwise direction.
3. When the self-oscillation stops, turn the trimmer again by 1 turn
in an anticlockwise direction.
16-3
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Hardware adjustment
16.2
Compressor PCB
The activation of the compressor movements, the stop at the
microswitches end run and reaching the set compression forces are
managed by the software and controlled by output PCB A3.
The K14 and K15 relays are responsible for the movement activation.
The control of the motor and the speed change switch S31 are dependent
on PCB A15 (Figure 16-1) that has the function of "managing the power"
of the motor.
There are 3 trimmers on this PCB, each having the function of adjusting
one speed.
The compressor motor in fact is controlled with 3 different speeds i.e. to
ensure that the movement is:
•
sufficiently high in the compression and patient release zone
•
sufficiently slow in the stretch from the park to the field
•
with speed identical to the field entrance speed, when brought from
field to park.
To correctly carry out the adjustment of these 3 speeds the table must be
horizontal and the column taken to 0° degrees.
In this condition the compressor equipment masses act unfavourably,
making the adjustment optimal in any condition.
APOLLO
•
Adjustment of compression speed
This adjustment must be carried out first of all because it influences
the other two.
With motor in movement in the up/down zone, a voltage of 32 Vdc
must be measured at the test points TP4 and TP5 to be obtained by
means of the adjustment trimmer R38.
•
Adjustment of speed towards the park
When the compressor is piloted towards the parking position, at the
end of the vertical ascent stretch, a mechanical system starts the
cone rotating speed change switch S31 is activated.
This determines the selection of the input speed.
This speed can be adjusted by means of the trimmer R39 and, with
active movement in this zone, a voltage of 11 Vdc must be read on
the test points TP4 and TP5.
•
Adjustment of exit speeds from the park
When the compressor is piloted from the parking zone until switch
S31 is active, the input speed, that can be regulated by means of
trimmer R40, is used.
When the movement is active in this stretch, a voltage of 9 Vdc must
be read at test points TP4 and TP5
16-4
(Rev. 3)
SERVICE MANUAL
Hardware adjustment
Figure 16-1
(Rev. 3)
16-5
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Hardware adjustment
THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
APOLLO
16-6
(Rev. 3)
SERVICE MANUAL
Three-phase inverter
17
THREE-PHASE INVERTER
The inverters in the Apollo table's electrical cabinet are used to control
the 4 three-phase motors responsible for the movements of: tilting, lift,
angulation and scan.
Only 2 motors will be piloted at a time, angulation and scan or main
beam and middle beam.
The output of the inverter in fact is connected to the motor to be
activated through the action of 4 remote switches.
The model of the inverter is:
MITSHUBISHI model FR-E540 – 3,7K – EC.
(Rev. 3)
17-1
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Three-phase inverter
17.1
Inverter input/output functions
The connection of the inverter, in the specific application for the Apollo
equipment, requires the use of the commands listed below.
Number of the
terminal
L1-L2-L3
U-V-W
SE
5
SD
RUN
STF
STR
2
A-C
RL
APOLLO
Function
Input of three phase 400 V 50/60 Hz power supply.
Output of 380 V motor power supply with variable frequency
between 0 and 120 Hz.
In the case of inverted motor rotation these outputs must be
reversed.
The inversion of the wires to terminals L1-L2-L3 does not
change the rotation.
This is the pole of the open collector for the RUN signal.
This terminal is polarised at 0 V fixed.
It is the reference 0 V for the V ref. signal (terminal 2).
This terminal is polarised at fixed 0 V.
This the common (reference 0 V) for the STR and STF
signals.
This terminal is polarised at fixed 0 V.
This the output signal from the inverter (active at 0 V)
present when the inverter is in movement (acceleration and
deceleration ramps included).
This output is used to enable the processor to recognise the
end of the ramp.
Only when the inverter has finished the ramp will it be
possible to exchange the connection to the motor by means
of the remote power switch.
When this input is polarised at 0 V the inverter pilots the
motor in the "FORWARD" direction.
When this input is polarised at 0 V the inverter pilots the
motor in the "BACK" direction.
Input of speed reference from 0 to +10 V dc.
This input's usage dial is determined by parameter Pr73
(Pr73=1 range 0V +10V with motor stop at 0 V).
The speed of the motor will be proportional to the input
signal in this terminal.
This speed will be proportional to the maximum speed set in
parameter Pr38.
This pair of terminals depends on a relay contact inside the
inverter. This contact is closed when the inverter is under
normal functioning conditions. In the case of failure the
contact is open. The contacts of the 2 inverters are
connected in series and depend on an input of input PCB
A2.
When this input is polarised at 0 V, the inverter selects the
second set of operational parameters. The main beam and
middle beam motors actually use a different booster value
from the one necessary for the angulation and scan motors.
17-2
(Rev. 3)
SERVICE MANUAL
Three-phase inverter
17.2
Inverter hardware setting
The inverter FR-E540 - 3,7K – EC is designed to accept inputs and pilot
outputs in PNP logic (high active) or NPN (low active).
The selection of this functioning is by means of the SINK / SOURCE
"jumper" on the front of the inverter below the cover.
Since Apollo has been designed in NPN logic, the "jumper" will have to be
in the position SINK.
17.3
Inverter software parameters setting
To permit the use of the FR-E540 - 3,7K – EC inverter in the most
various applications, a large number of parameters that can be set are
present in the memory.
Some of these are not active in the specific application on Apollo, so even
if modified they will not change the functioning of the equipment, others
are used but the data contained is the default settings contained in the
basic inverter program.
In conclusion, some parameters are modified with respect to the default
value by Villa Sistemi Medicali to adapt the functioning for use by
Apollo.
The modified parameters and the non-modified parameters but ones that
interact on the functioning of Apollo are listed below and divided into
two groups, while those parameters that do not lead to any effect on the
functioning of the equipment are not mentioned.
For a complete and detailed knowledge of the functioning of the inverter,
it is however possible to consult the dedicated manual, supplied together
with the equipment.
(Rev. 3)
17-3
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Three-phase inverter
17.3.1
Param.
Parameters with data modified by Villa Sistemi Medicali
Data
Function
Pr.0
20
Boost at the start (1st parameters set). This parameter provides the
motor with a boost at the start that enables the inertia of the system to
be compensated for. Excessive adjustment generates a start of the
movement that is too brusque, while not enough adjustment can cause
the non-start of the movement in load conditions. This value is used for
the angulation and scan motors (see input RL).
Pr.3
50
Rated motor frequency (1st parameter set). The rated frequency
characteristic of the motor used must be inserted in this parameter.
Pr.7
0
Acceleration ramp (1st parameter set). Since the Apollo processor
determines the acceleration of the movement depending on the PDI
function, the inverter must not cut in with corrections in this function.
Pr.8
0
Deceleration ramp (1st parameter set). Since the Apollo processor
determines the deceleration of the movement depending on the PDI
function, the inverter must not cut in with corrections in this function.
Pr.9
0
Activation of the functioning block for excessive current to the motor.
When setting 0, when the threshold of the maximum continuous
current limit that can be delivered by the inverter is exceeded, the
message OL is shown on the display without a stop in operations.
Pr.19
400
Rated motor voltage. The rated voltage characteristic of the motor used
must be included in this parameter.
Pr.20
100
This data is the reference frequency value for the acceleration and
deceleration parameters.
Pr.22
150
Stall prevention extreme current. This parameter indicates the limit of
the current supplied to the motor during functioning at various speeds.
Pr.38
90
This the maximum output frequency that the inverter supplies to the
motor when the analogue input of the reference signal is at the
maximum value (+10 V).
Pr.44
0
See Pr.7 but relative to the nd set of parameters in function of the input
RL. This data is used for the main beam and middle beam motors.
Pr.45
0
See Pr.8 but relative to the nd set of parameters in function of the input
RL. This data is used for the main beam and middle beam motors.
Pr.46
6
See Pr.0 but relative to the nd set of parameters in function of the input
RL. This data is used for the main beam and middle beam motors.
Pr.47
50
See Pr.3 but relative to the nd set of parameters in function of the input
RL. This data is used for the main beam and middle beam motors.
Pr.72
13
This the PWM frequency sent to the motor. The value of 13 KHz makes
it possible to eliminate the noise provided by the movement of the
motor guaranteeing however a low risk of EMC emissions.
Pr.73
1
This the parameter that determines the minimum and maximum value
that the reference analogue input for the speed can assume (0 +10
Vdc).
APOLLO
17-4
(Rev. 3)
SERVICE MANUAL
Three-phase inverter
Param.
Data
Pr.74
1
This is the speed reference analogue signal software filter. The data 0
guarantees an immediate response of the inverter when the Vref
reference signal changes.
Pr.77
2
This data enables the modification of the parameters.
Pr.79
2
This is the parameter that makes it possible to enable the functions
of the inverter from outside signals sent to the terminal block.
Pr.180
3
This makes it possible for the terminal RL to perform the 2nd set of
parameters setting function.
Pr.192
11
This enables the status relay whose exchange contact refers to
terminals A-B-C (used for OK inverter) deactivating it with inverter
OFF or in state of alarm.
Pr.244
1
This turns on the cooling fans of the power jumper only if the
inverter is running or if the operating temperature has exceeded the
values allowed.
(Rev. 3)
Function
17-5
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Three-phase inverter
17.3.2
Parameters that maintain the default settings
Listed here below are the parameters that, if modified, could jeopardise
the proper functioning of the equipment.
Nevertheless, this list is given to permit, in case of doubt or
malfunctioning, to check the parameter values are correct.
The description of the function of all this data is reported briefly. Consult
the inverter manual provided together with the machine for more
thorough information.
Param. Data
Function
Param. Data
Function
Pr.1
120
Maximum frequency
Pr.66
50
Current limit reduction
frequency
Pr.2
0
Minimum frequency
Pr.67
0
Number of alarm resets
Pr.10
3
DC braking (voltage)
Pr.68
1
Automatic reset wait time
Pr.11
0.5
DC braking (time)
Pr.69
0
Reset count zeroing
Pr.12
6
DC braking (voltage)
Pr.70
0
Special braking service
Pr.13
0.5
Start frequency
Pr.71
0
Choice of motor
Pr.14
0
Load selection curve
Pr.75
14
Select: reset, PU stop
Pr.18
120
Max high speed frequency
Pr.78
0
Inversion disabling
Pr.21
0
Accelerat./decelerat. time
increase
Pr.128
0
PID action selection
Pr.37
0
Machine speed indication
Pr.150
150
Current threshold level
Pr.39
50
Freq. with ref. 20 mA
Pr.151
0
Current control time
Pr.41
10
Comparison of rated/real
val.
Pr.152
5.0
Current threshold level 0
Pr.42
6
Output frequency
threshold
Pr.153
0.5
Current control time 0
Pr.43
9999
Reverse output frequency
threshold
Pr.158
0
AM terminal variab. select.
Pr.52
0
PU display variable select.
Pr.160
0
Parameter group reading
selection
Pr.55
50
Freq. indicat. end of scale
Pr.171
0
Funct. hour counter reset
Pr.56
4
Current indic. end of scale
Pr.181
1
RM terminal funct. select.
Pr.60
0
Smart mode selection
Pr.182
2
RH terminal funct. select.
Pr.61
9999 Reference current
Pr.183
6
MRS terminal funct.
select.
Pr.62
9999 Accelerat. ref. current
Pr.191
4
FU terminal funct. select.
Pr.63
9999 Deceleration ref. current
Pr.240
1
PWM soft setting
Pr.65
0
APOLLO
Automatic reset selection
17-6
(Rev. 3)
SERVICE MANUAL
Three-phase inverter
17.4
Access to parameters for writing
If it is necessary to check the values input into the parameters or modify
them, carry out the operations listed below to access the memory of the
inverter.
1. With the inverter in standby remove the front cover door.
2. Press the MODE key, the display will show the writing Pr.
3. Press the SET key. P.000 will be shown on the screen with
hundreds digit flashing.
4. To modify the hundreds data, press the 5 keys to increase the values
or 6 to decrease them.
5. To store the hundreds value press the SET key.
6. The tens digit flashes. To modify the data, press the 5 keys to
increase the values or 6 to decrease them.
7. To store the tens value press the SET key.
8. The unit digit flashes. To modify the data, press the 5 keys to
increase the values or 6 to decrease them.
9. Press the SET key. At this point the value in the selected parameter
is shown.
10. To modify the data in the memory, press the 5 keys to increase the
values or 6 to decrease them.
11. To confirm the modification press the SET key and hold it down for 3
secs. As a confirmation of the successful storage to memory the
display indicates the number of the cell and the value of the data
flashing them alternately.
12. To modify another parameter press the SET key, the next parameter
is shown on the display.
13. To select the required parameter, press the 5 and 6 keys and scroll
through the list.
14. Repeat the modification procedure or press the MODE key three
times to exit the routine.
G
(Rev. 3)
NOTE:
When the MODE key is pressed the first time, the display shows Opnd
and the second, Help.
This display shows the possibility of accessing 2 routines that are not
used.
17-7
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Three-phase inverter
17.5
Procedure for restoring the default parameters
WARNING:
This procedure must only be activated if a malfunction has occurred in
the inverter that has compromised all the settings.
When this procedure is carried out, the default values in the various
parameters will be stored to memory.
So, before activating the functions of the equipment again the data in the
table "Parameters with data modified by Villa Sistemi Medicali"
must be reset and the data contained in the "Parameters that maintain
the default settings" table must be checked.
Carry out the procedure described here below paying the greatest
attention.
1. Following the indications in the "Access to the parameters for
writing " paragraph select the cell Pr.79 and change the data stored
with the value 1.
WARNING:
The inverter is now in PU mode that means enabling movements also
from the keyboard. It is therefore essential to pay the greatest attention
to the use of the keys until the data contained in parameter Pr.79 is
restored at value 2.
2. Press the MODE key, the display shows the PU mode.
3. Press the MODE key, the display shows the help mode.
4. Press the 5 key four times until getting the indication ALLC. on the
display
5. Pressing the SET key, the data 0 is shown.
6. Press key 5 to show the data 1.
7. Press for 2 secs. the key SET To confirm. The display begins to flash
indicating that the default settings has been stored to memory.
8. Press the MODE key to exit the reset procedure.
9. Reprogram the data by modifying Pr.77 parameters first followed by
Pr.79 to make access possible to all the other parameters.
APOLLO
17-8
(Rev. 3)
SERVICE MANUAL
Function of the outputs card LEDS
18
FUNCTION OF THE OUTPUTS PCB LEDS
On the A3 outputs PCB (Figure 18-1) there are groups of leds that
indicate the condition of the active output.
Figure 18-1
(Rev. 3)
18-1
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Function of the outputs card LEDS
The correspondence between the various functions and the leds are listed
below.
•
H1 LED GROUP
LED 1 (Out 0)
LED 2 (Out 1)
LED 3 (Out 2)
LED 4 (Out 3)
LED 5 (Out 4)
LED 6 (Out 5)
LED 7 (Out 6)
LED 8 (Out 7)
K7M and K9M (angulation and scan) remote switch
call
K6M and K8M (main beam and middle beam)
remote switch call
R-L monitor image scan reverse
HIGH-LOW monitor image scan reverse
minimum I.I. field selection
medium I.I. field selection
maximum I.I. field selection
activation of K2 ready relay controlled by the main
processor
•
H2 LED GROUP
LED 9 (Out 8)
spare
LED 10 (Out 9) spare
LED 11 (Out 10) SID up
LED 12 (Out 11) SID down
LED 13 (Out 12) main beam motor brake release
LED 14 (Out 13) middle beam motor brake release
LED 15 (Out 14) angulation motor brake release
LED 16 (Out 15) scan motor brake release
•
H3 LED GROUP
LED 17 (Out 16) I.I. lift up
LED 18 (Out 17) I.I. lift down
LED 19 (Out 18) tabletop inside
LED 20 (Out 19) tabletop outside
LED 21 (Out 20) compressor up
LED 22 (Out 21) compressor down
LED 23 (Out 22) collimator lamp on
LED 24 (Out 23) width collimator opens
•
H4 LED GROUP
LED 25 (Out 24) width collimator closes
LED 26 (Out 25) width collimator fast
LED 27 (Out 26) height collimator opens
LED 28 (Out 27) height collimator closes
LED 29 (Out 28) height collimator fast
LED 30 (Out 29) iris collimator opens
LED 31 (Out 30) iris collimator closes
LED 32 (Out 31) iris collimator fast
APOLLO
18-2
(Rev. 3)
SERVICE MANUAL
Function of the outputs card LEDS
•
H5 LED GROUP
LED 33 (Out 32) angulation-main beam inverter forward
LED 34 (Out 33) angulation-main beam inverter back
LED 35 (Out 34) middle beam-scan inverter forward
LED 36 (Out 35) middle beam-scan inverter back
LED 37 (Out 36) spare
LED 38 (Out 37) spare
LED 39 (Out 38) tomo 2nd speed
LED 40 (Out 39) tomo 3rd speed
•
H6 LED GROUP
LED 41 (Out 40) fluoro request
LED 42 (Out 41) X-ray request
LED 43 (Out 42) preparation request
LED 44 (Out 43) digital preparation request
LED 45 (Out 44) second step preparation request
LED 46 (Out 45) tomo 1st speed
LED 47 (Out 46) tomo 4th speed
LED 48 (Out 47) tomo 7°
•
H7 LED GROUP
LED 49 (Out 48) tomo 20°
LED 50 (Out 49) tomo 30°
LED 51 (Out 50) tomo 45°
LED 52 (Out 51) X-ray presence without request
LED 53 (Out 52) Kv automatic-manual fluoro
LED 54 (Out 53) spare
LED 55 (Out 54) spare
LED 56 (Out 55) angio step start
•
H8 LED GROUP
LED 57 (Out 56) motion detection
LED 58 (Out 57) CCD x0
LED 59 (Out 58) CCD x4
LED 60 (Out 59) CCD x8
LED 61 (Out 60) grid in field
LED 62 (Out 61) grid in park
LED 63 (Out 62) cassette gripper opening
LED 64 (Out 63) cassette gripping
(Rev. 4)
18-3
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Function of the outputs card LEDS
•
H9 FUNCTION LEDS
LED 65 (Out 64)
LED 66 (Out 65)
LED 67 (Out 66)
LED 68 (Out 67)
LED 69 (Out 68)
LED 70 (Out 69)
LED 71 (Out 70)
LED 72 (Out 71)
APOLLO
R cassette motor direction
L cassette motor direction
shutter motor direction
cross subdivision motor direction
R cassette motor enabling
L cassette motor enabling
shutter motor enabling
cross subdivision motor enabling
18-4
(Rev. 3)
SERVICE MANUAL
Checking the radiographic exposure results
19
CHECKING THE RADIOGRAPHIC
EXPOSURE RESULTS
19.1
Spot Film Device adjustment
The Spot Film Device is adjusted and checked when the equipment is
made, however once the installation of the system has been completed, a
further adjustment might be necessary after carrying out the test
radiographs.
To verify the correct position of the cassette, both longitudinal and
transversal, and the shutters it will be necessary to exclude the
automatic function of the collimator that could interfere in limiting the
size.
To open the collimator axles automatically to the maximum size data 1
must be input in cell 262.
When this function is active, the message " Service function active"
appears on the control desk display.
(Rev. 3)
19-1
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Checking the radiographic exposure results
19.1.1
Checking the longitudinal positioning of the cassette
The cassette positioning with regard to the X-ray main beam, during the
exposure program, must be correct.
An effective method for this verification is provided by the following
procedure:
1. Insert a 40x20 (17"x7") cassette and select the subdivision for 4 in
line.
2. Run the program and develop the film.
3. The 3 white radiogram separation lines must be the same width. For
this verification the dimension of the separation line, determined by
the shutters is not important, but the constancy of this dimension.
4. Carry out the same test with a 35x35 (14"x14") cassette divided into
3.
If the separation lines are different, it means that the positioning of the
cassette is wrong in all its exposures.
To adjust the positioning properly it is possible to change the gains of the
PDI function in the cell of group 300.
The modification of these parameters can give rise to different effects, so
an intervention should only be made if the functioning of PDI method is
well understood.
The correction can be carried out by working on these data because the
position error is determined by the difference that the error assumes in
function of the length of the run.
Another possibility is that of changing the data in cell 219 which modifies
all the runs of all the subdivisions of the same quantity.
As a further possibility the single runs can be changed through the data
set in the cells of group 400.
APOLLO
19-2
(Rev. 3)
SERVICE MANUAL
Checking the radiographic exposure results
19.1.2
Checking the transversal positioning of the cassette
By carrying out a series of radiograms with a cross layout of a film 18x24
(8"x10") or 30x24 (12"x10"), a continuous line of separation between the
upper and lower radiograms some 2 mm (0.08") thick must be obtained.
If this does not happen it means that the transversal movement of the
cassette is wrong.
Having determined whether the defect is caused by an asymmetrical
movement with respect to the centre or by too great or too small a
movement for both sides, change the value set in cells 459 and 460.
19.1.3
Checking the positioning of the shutters
WARNING:
During these tests do not carry out limitations of the collimator width by
means of the joystick because the shutters follow the collimator.
Carry out the exposure on films of various formats and various
subdivisions.
All the separator lines, in the various dimensions and subdivisions must
be the same width.
If this not the case, change the data contained in the cells of group 400,
in such a way as to obtain what is required.
It must be remembered that the correction in mm made in the cells has
the effect of increasing and decreasing the final amount, equal to the
value of the correction.
As an example let’s consider that a two line subdivision with width
cassette 30 cm (12") results from a minimum separation line (0.5 mm).
Since the desired value is 2 mm, the quantity of 1.5 mm is added to the
value in cell 549 (the absolute value of which is not important as it
depends on the characteristics of the system).
(Rev. 3)
19-3
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Checking the radiographic exposure results
19.2
Centering the collimator, checking the X-ray field
19.2.1
Alignment of the X-ray beam with collimator diaphragm
G
NOTE:
Before starting the alignment of the X-ray beam it is necessary to ensure
the column is properly vertical and the hood is properly horizontal; these
checks can be carried out mechanically through the use of a level.
1. Bring the SID at 100 cm (39.4").
2. Place a tool consisting of two concentric rings positioned at a
distance of a few cm over the tabletop surface. If the dedicated tool is
not available, a replacement tool can be made using two elements of
different diameters (see Figure 19-1).
3. Close the collimator to get an image size similar to the size of the tool
(a way that both the circles of the tool are completely represented in
the image).
4. Select fluoro and check the concentricity of the two rings.
5. If the concentricity is correct (Figure 19-1), go to point 8; otherwise
continue.
Tube focus
Collimator centre
Move the collimator in
this direction
min 200 mm
Correct centering
Figure 19-1
APOLLO
19-4
(Rev. 3)
SERVICE MANUAL
Checking the radiographic exposure results
6. Move the collimator with respect to the X-ray tube using the
adjustment possible in the coupling cone: the collimator must move
in the same direction as the circle furthest from the tabletop should
be moved to become concentric with the circle resting on the
tabletop.
7. Move the tool in the same direction to reposition it in the centre of
the X-ray field (in such a way that both circles of the tool are
completely represented in the image).
Repeat points 6 and 7, by trial and error, until the two circles are
centred.
8. Move the SID to 150 cm (59.0") and check that the centering is
maintained; if this not the case, check the perpendicularity and
repeat the procedure from point 4.
9. Once the concentricity has been achieved at both the SIDs, the
verticality of the alignment between the focus of the X-ray tube and
the centre of the collimator is guaranteed.
(Rev. 3)
19-5
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Checking the radiographic exposure results
19.3
Alignment of X-ray beam with light beam
G
NOTE:
This procedure can be applied to systems that fit the Villa model
collimator. For systems fitting the Ralco mode collimator, refer to the
specific manual.
G
NOTE:
The light field of the collimator is adjusted in the factory, both for lamp
position and for position of the image surface, so, once the centering of
the X-ray beam has been carried out, the alignment of the X-ray beam –
light beam should be guaranteed.
1. To check the alignment of the X-ray beam – light beam, turn on the
light field and position 4 wads of absorbent material at the 4 edges of
the light field.
2. Expose a film and check the position of the wads with respect to the
X-ray field produced on the film; the maximum misalignment must
be equal to 3% of the SID in each direction and the sum in the two
orthogonal directions must not be over 4%.
3. If the dimensions do not coincide (indicator of the fact that the
distance of the focus of the X-ray tube from the image surface is
different from that of the lamp collimator from the same plan) the
collimator lamp can be adjusted, remembering that when the lamp
focus is brought towards the mirror, the light main beam gets
narrower while it grows bigger when it is moved away.
Tube focus
Light
Tube focus
Light
Proper alignment
Tube focus
Light
Lamp movement
Mirror movement
Figure 19-2
4. When the optimal alignment between light field and X-ray field is
achieved the next step can be taken to align the X-ray field and image
receiver (I.I. and Spot Film Device group).
These adjustments are easily obtained by moving the tube-collimator
integral group on the support using the adjustment margin allowed.
Furthermore, the I.I. allows a minimum of adjustment in its fixing
APOLLO
19-6
(Rev. 3)
SERVICE MANUAL
Checking the radiographic exposure results
while, in cases where the Spot Film Device needs adjusting (the
adjustment of which is governed by software and set in the factory), it is
necessary to work referring to the procedures for the adjustment and
setting of the data in the relative memory cells in the relative chapter of
this manual. The intervention on the I.I. and Spot Film Device group is
only required when in fact it has not been possible to mechanically
centre these two parts very well, but this happens rarely as this
adjustment is carried out in the factory.
(Rev. 3)
19-7
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Checking the radiographic exposure results
19.4
Collimator adjustment
The collimator is adjusted and checked when the equipment is made.
Nevertheless, once installation is complete it will be necessary to check
the size of the collimated formats.
For the fluoro formats check that the axles are tangent to the I.I.
diameter. This check can be carried out by operating the collimator
joystick and checking that the shutters are immediately visible. This
must happen at all the possible zoom levels and the adjustment is made
through the setting of cells 214, 215, 216 and 217.
G
NOTE:
When width reduction is made by joystick, both collimator and shutters
are responsible of the reduction. Can happens that collimator and SFD
are not perfectly aligned, so in this case the image on monitor has a side
well limited and the other with a shadow. This because one side is limited
by collimator and the other by shutters. To avoid this condition is
possible to modify the shutters position in comparison with collimator
but for joystick limitation only, by using the value inserted into cell 241.
For models equipped with the Spot Film Device, use the various formats
and check that the collimator covers the selected surface.
Also check that the collimated format does not exceed 3% of the SID, the
format of the film or its subdivision.
To carry out this check, insert a cassette in the Spot Film Device and
position a cassette measuring 35x35 (14"x14") on the tabletop.
Take an exposure and develop the 35x35 (14"x14") film.
By calculating the distance between the film in the Spot Film Device and
the one on the surface check that the collimated format on the 35x35
(14"x14") film corresponds to the size of the film in the Spot Film Device
after making the appropriate proportion.
The correction of the formats can be carried out in 2 ways:
•
by varying the data set in cell 218 that modifies all the format
collimation positionings except for the minimum position (collimator
closed)
•
by modifying the adjustment of the potmeter minimum following the
description in the dedicated paragraph.
APOLLO
19-8
(Rev. 3)
SERVICE MANUAL
Diagnostics and Troubleshooting
20
DIAGNOSTICS AND
TROUBLESHOOTING
Any failure that might occur during the use of the Apollo table is, in the
majority of cases, indicated by a diagnosis message that is shown on the
display.
In some cases however, failures can occur that do not affect the
electronic logic of the processor.
This chapter is therefore divided into two parts: the first describes the
faults deriving from displayed alarms and the way they can be solved, the
second describes faults of different types.
(Rev. 3)
20-1
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Diagnostics and Troubleshooting
THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
APOLLO
20-2
(Rev. 3)
SERVICE MANUAL
Diagnostics and Troubleshooting
20.1
Troubleshooting for displayed diagnoses
Error
Diagnosis
Cause of the alarm
Corrective measures
59
Rays from generator
without fluoro or exposure
request
It was detected the
presence of X-rays coming
from the generator (access
X0-13 active) without
fluoro / exposure request
or X-ray ON is still present
after 700ms from fluoro /
exposure request released
The signal must be at high level when the generator does not emit rays. Check
between X13-2 (input PCB) and ground with a multimeter. If the level is low (0 V) even
in conditions of non-emission, remove the wire coming from the generator and
connected to X0-13 and carry out the measurement again. If the defect persists, the
fault might be in the pull-up circuit of the input PCB or on the port of input 74HC245
(integrated D21) of the CPU PCB.
60
Timeout collimator or
shutters positioning in
standard program
In Spot Film Device mode,
one of the collimator axles
or shutters did not reach
the position set point
within 5 secs.
When the preparation is activated or when cassette ejection is required, the collimator
and the shutters must be positioned over the cassette size or subdivision. Insert a
cassette 35x43 (14"x17"), select the panoramic size and press preparation. For
collimator leds 24 and 27 of the output PCB must come on indicating the movement in
progress. 3 cases might occur:
A. one or both of the leds do not come on
B. one or both the leds stay on
C. after some time on, leds 24 and 25 or 27 and 28 flash
For shutters check that at prep command the movement starts to open.
Solutions:
For collimator
A. the width or height motor control circuit is faulty (output PCB)
B. the position feedback circuit or the relative potmeter are faulty
C. the movement is unstable therefore there are mechanical backlashes on the
movement between motor and potmeter or the potmeter is damaged electrically. A
temporary solution to this defect might be the increase of the dead band (cells
229, 230, 231), but this entails an increase in the tolerance of the collimated size).
Shutters are controlled by PDI system, so if the set point is not reached the reason
could be a fault in the power driver circuit located in the SFD power pcb (A4).
(Rev. 4)
20-3
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Diagnostics and Troubleshooting
Error
Diagnosis
Cause of the alarm
Corrective measures
61
Collimator or shutters
positioning timeout in
rapid sequence mode
In rapid sequence mode,
one of the collimator axles
or shutters did not reach
the position set point
within 5 secs.
The description of alarm 60 applies.
62
Ready from generator not
present
The generator did not
activate the “ready” signal
within 3 secs. from the
request of X-ray II step.
Check between X13-1 (input PCB) and ground with a multimeter. The level must be
low (0 V) when the generator has completed the preparation operations. Remove the
wire coming from the generator connected on X0-12 and make a jumper directly to the
ground on this terminal. If the defect persists, the fault might be in the pull-up circuit
of the input PCB or on the port of input 74HC245 (integrated D21) of the CPU PCB.
63
Rapid sequence stopped by The rapid sequence was
operator
interrupted by releasing
the X-ray control.
The fault could be caused by an operator error or by a defect in the preparation or Xray circuit. Check the preparation and X-ray switches on the pedal command and the
relative circuits depending on connector X41. The preparation request is then sent to
CPU PCB via serial Can-Bus, so there cannot be hardware defects at this level.
64
X-ray on not present from
generator
The generator did not
activate the "X-ray" signal
within 3 secs. from the
fluoro request or within
0,360 secs. in exposure.
Check between X13-2 (input PCB) and ground with a multimeter. The level must be
low (0 V) when the generator begins the emission. Remove the wire coming from the
generator connected on X0-13 and make a direct jumper to ground on this terminal
when the table activates the X-ray request. If the defect persists, the fault might be in
the pull-up circuit of the input PCB or on the port of input 74HC245 (integrated D21)
of the CPU PCB.
65
Generator did not stop
exposure
The generator X-ray time
A radiography carried out on the Spot Film Device can last for a maximum of 6.5 secs.
lasted longer than 6.5 secs. Check between X13-2 (input PCB) and ground with a multimeter. The level must be
low (0 V) when the generator begins the emission but it must turn off after 6.5 sec
even if the X-ray request remains active. Remove the wire coming from the generator
connected on X0-13 during the emission. If the defect persists, the fault might be in
the pull-up circuit of the input PCB or on the port of input 74HC245 (integrated D21)
of the CPU PCB.
APOLLO
20-4
(Rev. 3)
SERVICE MANUAL
Diagnostics and Troubleshooting
Error
Diagnosis
Cause of the alarm
Corrective measures
66
Exposure command
released before end of Xray time
Exposure request released
before X-ray time (input
X0-13) finished.
The fault might be caused by an operator error or by a defect in the X-ray request
circuit. Check the X-ray control switch on the pedal control and the relative circuit
depending on connector X41. The X-ray request is then sent to the CPU PCB via serial
Can-Bus, so there can be no hardware defects at this level.
67
Preparation command
released before end of Xray time
Preparation request
released before X-ray time
(input X0-13) finished.
The fault might be caused by an operator error or by a defect in the preparation
circuit. Check the preparation switch on the pedal control and the relative circuit
depending on connector X41. The preparation request is then sent to the CPU PCB via
serial Can-Bus, so there cannot be hardware defects at this level.
68
Generator stopped X-ray
during Tomo angle
The generator interrupted
the X-ray emission before
the tomography angle was
completed.
A tomography has a X-ray time determined by the presence of the column in the Tomo
angle. The table will therefore be responsible for turning off the emission. Check
between X13-2 (input PCB) and ground with a multimeter. The level must stay low (0
V) for the entire time column is in the Tomo angle. Make a jumper between X0-13 and
the ground for the tomography time. If the defect persists, the fault might be in the
pull-up circuit of the input PCB or on the port of input 74HC245 (integrated D21) of
the CPU PCB.
69
Generator did not stop
exposure at the end of
Tomo angle
The generator continued
the X-ray emission for
more than 0.2 secs. after
the X-ray control was
deactivated.
Check between X13-2 (input PCB) and ground with an oscilloscope. The level must go
high when the table deactivates the X-ray request. Check that the generator does not
show a “tail” of this signal for more than 700 msecs. After the X-ray request of the
table is off. If the defect persists, the fault might be in the pull-up circuit of the input
PCB or on the port of input 74HC245 (integrated D21) of the CPU PCB.
70
Compressor did not reach
park position in tomo and
angio modality
The compressor did not
reach the parking position
within 30 secs. from the
activation of the control for
the access in tomo or angio
modality access.
The table logic activates the return of the compressor to the park when access to
tomographic or angiographic mode is requested. If the compressor does not reach the
parking position (switch S26, input X15-2 input PCB) the fault might be on the
compressor motor control circuit (outlets X26 pin 9 and 10 output PCB) or on the A15
power PCB. A check must also be made to see that the X15-2 input depending on the
park switch is at a high level when the compressor has activated the switch.
(Rev. 3)
20-5
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Diagnostics and Troubleshooting
Error
Diagnosis
Cause of the alarm
Corrective measures
77
Preparation request
interrupted by digital DSI
In angiographic mode the
generator ready signal is
absent.
Check between X13-1 (input PCB) and ground with a multimeter. The level must be
low (0 V) when the exposure procedure in digital mode is activated. Remove the wire
coming from the generator connected on X0-12 and make a direct jumper to ground
on this terminal when the table activates the X-ray request. If the defect persists, the
fault might be in the pull-up circuit of the input PCB or on the port of input 74HC245
(integrated D21) of the CPU PCB.
78
Program aborted
In angio modality, the Xray sequence was
interrupted before the set
number of steps was
completed.
The fault could be caused by an operator error or by a defect in the preparation and Xray circuit. Check the preparation and X-ray switches on the pedal command and the
relative circuits depending on connector X41. The preparation request is then sent to
the CPU PCB via serial Can-Bus, so there cannot be hardware defects at this level.
80
General emergency
The power relay (input
The logic recognises that the power circuit of the table is not active if the input X15-10
X15-10) was deactivated by is not at low level. This since this input is dependent on the secondary contact of the
external causes.
power relay K1L. The fault might be caused by a fault in this circuit or by the break in
the series circuit of the movement emergency switch (X0 pin 5 and 6).
82
Anti-crusching circuit
damaged
The anti-pinching control
circuit is interrupted.
The table can be configured for the anti-pinching control (cell 254). If the control is
active, the input X14-5 (input PCB) must be active (0 V). Check the membrane circuit
series and the Spot Film Device PCB A10.
83
SFD is disabled
The Spot Film Device was
disabled, therefore the
adjustment of the
components inside the
Spot Film Device is not
possible.
This signal is not caused by a fault, but by the request of a Spot Film Device function
if cell 261 is set at 1.
84
I.I. lift not present
The I.I. lift is not present in In potmeter adjustment mode, with cell 133 active an attempt is made to move the I.I.
the system.
lift, but the setting of the presence of this function (cell 255 is 1).
88
Wrong SID
The SID has not been set
properly.
APOLLO
In potmeter adjustment mode, with one of the collimator setting axles cells active (ad
117 to 122) an attempt is made to store the value to memory but the SID (shown on
the display) does not correspond to 980 mm.
20-6
(Rev. 3)
SERVICE MANUAL
Diagnostics and Troubleshooting
Error
Diagnosis
Cause of the alarm
89
The minimum has not
been adjusted.
The minimum position was In potmeter adjustment mode, an attempt is made to store the maximum value of one
not stored.
of the collimator potmeters (width, height or iris), without adjusting the minimum
first.
90
EEPROM data damaged
The RAM has detected a
non-intentional change of
the data in the EEprom.
Each time the equipment is turned on the data in the Eeprom are compared by the
RAM with the previous data through the checksum. If they do not correspond, it
means the data in the Eeprom could be damaged. You are recommended to change
the Eeprom that could be defective.
91
Angulation movement over
max error
During the movement, the
angulation has
accumulated a position
error above the one set in
the cell 311.
The movement of the angulation is an axle controlled by PDI logic. The real trajectory
must therefore follow the theoretical one. An advance or delay tolerance of the real
position is admitted but within a limit set in the cell 311. Exceeding this tolerance
might be caused by a fault in the axle control inverter A5 or by a partial or total
seizing up of the mechanical sliding. Increasing the value set in the cell is not the
solution to the problem. The cause of the mechanical hardening must be removed.
92
Scan movement over max
error
During the movement, the
scan has accumulated a
position error above the
one set in cell 329.
The movement of the scan is an axle controlled by PDI logic. The real trajectory must
therefore follow the theoretical one. An advance or delay tolerance of the real position
is admitted but within a limit set in the cell 329. Exceeding this tolerance might be
caused by a fault in the axle control inverter A6 or by a partial or total seizing up of
the mechanical sliding. Increasing the value set in the cell is not the solution to the
problem. The cause of the mechanical hardening must be removed.
93
Main beam movement over
max error
During the movement, the
main beam has
accumulated a position
error above the one set in
cell 346.
The movement of the main beam is an axle controlled by PDI logic. The real trajectory
must therefore follow the theoretical one. An advance or delay tolerance of the real
position is admitted but within a limit set in the cell 346. Exceeding this tolerance
might be caused by a fault in the axle control inverter A5 or by a partial or total
seizing up of the mechanical sliding. Increasing the value set in the cell is not the
solution to the problem. The cause of the mechanical hardening must be removed.
(Rev. 3)
Corrective measures
20-7
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Diagnostics and Troubleshooting
Error
Diagnosis
Cause of the alarm
Corrective measures
94
Middle beam movement
over max error
During the movement, the
middle beam has
accumulated an error
position over the one set in
cell 346.
The movement of the middle beam is an axle controlled by PDI logic. The real
trajectory must therefore follow the theoretical one. An advance or delay tolerance of
the real position is admitted but within a limit set in the cell 346. Exceeding this
tolerance might be caused by a fault in the axle control inverter A6 or by a partial or
total seizing up of the mechanical sliding. Increasing the value set in the cell is not the
solution to the problem. The cause of the mechanical hardening must be removed.
95
Shutters movement over
max error
During the movement, the
shutters have accumulated
a position error above the
one set in cell 363.
The movement of the shutters is an axle controlled by PDI logic. The real trajectory
must therefore follow the theoretical one. An advance or delay tolerance of the real
position is admitted but within a limit set in the cell 363. Exceeding this tolerance
might be caused by a fault in the axle control hardware circuit or by a partial or total
seizing up of the mechanical sliding. Increasing the value set in the cell is not the
solution to the problem. The cause of the mechanical hardening must be removed.
96
Right cassette belt
movement over max error
During the movement, the
right belt has accumulated
a position error above the
one set in cell 375.
The right cassette belt movement is an axle controlled by PDI logic. The real trajectory
must therefore follow the theoretical one. An advance or delay tolerance of the real
position is admitted but within a limit set in cell 375. Exceeding this tolerance might
be caused by a fault of the axle control hardware circuit or by a partial or total seizing
up of the mechanical sliding. Increasing the value set in the cell is not the solution to
the problem. The cause of the mechanical hardening must be removed.
97
Left cassette belt
movement over max error
During the movement, the
left belt has accumulated a
position error above the
one set in cell 375.
The left cassette belt movement is an axle controlled by PDI logic. The real trajectory
must therefore follow the theoretical one. An advance or delay tolerance of the real
position is admitted but within a limit set in cell 375. Exceeding this tolerance might
be caused by a fault of the axle control hardware circuit or by a partial or total seizing
up of the mechanical sliding. Increasing the value set in the cell is not the solution to
the problem. The cause of the mechanical hardening must be removed.
APOLLO
20-8
(Rev. 3)
SERVICE MANUAL
Diagnostics and Troubleshooting
Error
Diagnosis
Cause of the alarm
Corrective measures
98
Cross subdivision
movement over max error
During the movement, the
cross subdivision has
accumulated a position
error above the one set in
cell 399.
The sideway cassette movement by cross subdivision is an axle controlled by PDI logic.
The real trajectory must therefore follow the theoretical one. An advance or delay
tolerance of the real position is admitted but within a limit set in cell 399. Exceeding
this tolerance might be caused by a fault of the axle control hardware circuit or by a
partial or total seizing up of the mechanical sliding. Increasing the value set in the cell
is not the solution to the problem. The cause of the mechanical hardening must be
removed.
99
Inverter fault
One or both inverters are
in a warning status,
therefore access X18-1 is
deactivated.
The input X18-1 (input PCB) refers to 0 V when the inverters are in the proper
working conditions. If there is a fault in one of the 2 inverters, the series circuit
dependent on the above mentioned input is deactivated. The cause of the fault must
be verified and removed or the inverter replaced if the fault cannot be repaired.
101
Angulation potmeter under The value detected for the
min
angulation potmeter is
below that stored in
Eeprom.
The adjustment of the minimum and maximum values of the potmeters are stored in
the Eeprom. If the current value of the angulation potmeter is lower than the
minimum minus the value set in cell 450, the alarm is generated. This can be caused
by the movement that, because of a fault, has exceeded SW limit or by the break in
the potmeter power supply circuit. Check the presence of the power supply voltage at
the ends of the potmeter (5 V) and the reference voltage at the converter input to be
measured on the connector X20-4 of the input PCB.
102
Angulation potmeter over
max
The adjustment of the minimum and maximum values of the potmeters are stored in
the Eeprom. If the current value of the angulation potmeter is over the maximum plus
the value set in cell 450, the alarm is generated. This can be caused by the movement
that, because of a fault, has exceeded SW limit or by the break in the potmeter power
supply circuit. Check the presence of the power supply voltage at the ends of the
potmeter (5 V) and the reference voltage at the converter input to be measured on the
connector X20-4 of the input PCB.
(Rev. 3)
The value detected for the
angulation potmeter is
above that stored in
Eeprom.
20-9
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Diagnostics and Troubleshooting
Error
Diagnosis
Cause of the alarm
Corrective measures
103
Scan potmeter under min
The value detected for the
scan potmeter is below
that stored in Eeprom.
The adjustment of the minimum and maximum values of the potmeters are stored in
the Eeprom. If the current value of the scan potmeter is lower than the minimum
minus the value set in cell 450, the alarm is generated. This can be caused by the
movement that, because of a fault, has exceeded SW limit or by the break in the
potmeter power supply circuit. Check the presence of the power supply voltage at the
ends of the potmeter (5 V) and the reference voltage at the input of the converter to be
measured on connector X20-5 of the input PCB.
104
Scan potmeter over max
The value detected for the
scan potmeter is above
that stored in Eeprom.
The adjustment of the minimum and maximum values of the potmeters are stored in
the Eeprom. If the current value of the scan potmeter is over the maximum plus the
value set in cell 450, the alarm is generated. This can be caused by the movement
that, because of a fault, has exceeded SW limit or by the break in the potmeter power
supply circuit. Check the presence of the power supply voltage at the ends of the
potmeter (5 V) and the reference voltage at the input of the converter to be measured
on connector X20-5 of the input PCB.
105
Main beam potmeter under The value detected for the
min
main beam potmeter is
below that stored in
Eeprom.
The adjustment of the minimum and maximum values of the potmeters are stored in
the Eeprom. If the current value of the potmeter of the main beam is lower than the
minimum minus the value set in cell 450, the alarm is generated. This can be caused
by the movement that, because of a fault, has exceeded SW limit or by the break in
the potmeter power supply circuit. Check the presence of the power supply voltage at
the ends of the potmeter (5 V) and the reference voltage at the input of the converter to
be measured on connector X20-2 of the input PCB.
106
Main beam potmeter over
max
The adjustment of the minimum and maximum values of the potmeters are stored in
the Eeprom. If the current value of the potmeter of the main beam is over maximum
plus the value set in cell 450, the alarm is generated. This can be caused by the
movement that, because of a fault, has exceeded SW limit or by the break in the
potmeter power supply circuit. Check the presence of the power supply voltage at the
ends of the potmeter (5 V) and the reference voltage at the input of the converter to be
measured on connector X20-2 of the input PCB.
APOLLO
The value detected for the
potmeter of the main beam
is above that stored in
Eeprom.
20-10
(Rev. 3)
SERVICE MANUAL
Diagnostics and Troubleshooting
Error
Diagnosis
Cause of the alarm
Corrective measures
107
Middle beam potmeter
under min
The value detected for the
middle beam potmeter is
below that stored in
Eeprom.
The adjustment of the minimum and maximum values of the potmeters are stored in
the Eeprom. If the current value of the middle beam potmeter is lower than the
minimum less the value set in cell 450, the alarm is generated. This can be caused by
the movement that, because of a fault, has exceeded SW limit or by the break in the
potmeter power supply circuit. Check the presence of the power supply voltage at the
ends of the potmeter (5 V) and the reference voltage at the input of the converter to be
measured on connector X20-3 of the input PCB.
108
Middle beam potmeter over The value detected for the
max
potmeter of the main beam
is above that stored in
Eeprom.
The adjustment of the minimum and maximum values of the potmeters are stored in
the Eeprom. If the current value of the potmeter of the middle beam is over the
maximum plus the value set in cell 450, the alarm is generated. This can be caused by
the movement that, because of a fault, has exceeded SW limit or by the break in the
potmeter power supply circuit. Check the presence of the power supply voltage at the
ends of the potmeter (5 V) and the reference voltage at the input of the converter to be
measured on connector X20-3 of the input PCB.
111
Transversal tabletop
potmeter under min
The value detected for the
tabletop potmeter is below
that stored in Eeprom.
The adjustment of the minimum and maximum values of the potmeters are stored in
the Eeprom. If the current value of the potmeter of the tabletop is lower than the
minimum minus the value set in cell 450, the alarm is generated. This can be caused
by the movement that because of a fault has exceeded the SW limit because of the
break in the power supply potmeter circuit. Check the presence of the power supply
voltage at the ends of the potmeter (5 V) and the reference voltage at the input of the
converter to be measured on connector X20-7 of the input PCB.
112
Transversal tabletop
potmeter over max
The value detected for the
tabletop potmeter is above
that stored in Eeprom.
The adjustment of the minimum and maximum values of the potmeters are stored in
the Eeprom. If the current value of the potmeter of the tabletop is over maximum plus
the value set in cell 450, the alarm is generated. This can be caused by the movement
that, because of a fault, has exceeded SW limit or by the break in the potmeter power
supply circuit. Check the presence of the power supply voltage at the ends of the
potmeter (5 V) and the reference voltage at the input of the converter to be measured
on connector X20-7 of the input PCB.
(Rev. 3)
20-11
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Diagnostics and Troubleshooting
Error
Diagnosis
Cause of the alarm
Corrective measures
113
SID potmeter under min
The value detected for the
SID potmeter is below that
stored in Eeprom.
The adjustment of the minimum and maximum values of the potmeters are stored in
the Eeprom. If the current value of the potmeter of the SID is lower than the minimum
less the value set in cell 450, the alarm is generated. This can be caused by the
movement that, because of a fault, has exceeded SW limit or by the break in the
potmeter power supply circuit. Check the presence of the power supply voltage at the
ends of the potmeter (5 V) and the reference voltage at the input of the converter to be
measured on connector X20-6 of the input PCB.
114
SID potmeter over max
The value detected for the
SID potmeter is above that
stored in Eeprom.
The adjustment of the minimum and maximum values of the potmeters are stored in
the Eeprom. If the current value of the potmeter of the SID is over maximum plus the
value set in cell 450, the alarm is generated. This can be caused by the movement that
because of a fault has exceeded the SW limit or by the breakage of the power supply
potmeter circuit. Check the presence of the power supply voltage at the ends of the
potmeter (5 V) and the reference voltage at the input of the converter to be measured
on connector X20-6 of the input PCB.
117
Width collimator potmeter
under min
The value detected for the
width collimator potmeter
is less than the one stored
in EEprom.
The adjustment of the minimum and maximum values of the potmeters are stored in
the Eeprom. If the current value of the width collimator axle potmeter is lower than
the minimum less the value set in cell 450, the alarm is generated. This can be caused
by the movement that, because of a fault, has exceeded SW limit or by the break in
the potmeter power supply circuit. Check the presence of the power supply voltage at
the ends of the potmeter (5 V) and the reference voltage at the input of the converter to
be measured on connector X21-1 of the input PCB.
118
Width collimator potmeter
over max
The value detected for the
width collimator potmeter
is above that stored in
EEprom.
The adjustment of the minimum and maximum values of the potmeters are stored in
the Eeprom. If the current value of the width collimator axle potmeter is over
maximum plus the value set in cell 450, the alarm is generated. This can be caused by
the movement that, because of a fault, has exceeded SW limit or by the break in the
potmeter power supply circuit. Check the presence of the power supply voltage at the
ends of the potmeter (5 V) and the reference voltage at the input of the converter to be
measured on connector X21-1 of the input PCB.
APOLLO
20-12
(Rev. 3)
SERVICE MANUAL
Diagnostics and Troubleshooting
Error
Diagnosis
Cause of the alarm
Corrective measures
119
Height collimator potmeter
under min
The value detected for the
potmeter of the height
collimator is less than the
one stored in EEprom.
The adjustment of the minimum and maximum values of the potmeters are stored in
the Eeprom. If the current value of the iris collimator axle potmeter is lower than the
minimum minus the value set in cell 450, the alarm is generated. This can be caused
by the movement that, because of a fault, has exceeded SW limit or by the break in
the potmeter power supply circuit. Check the presence of the power supply voltage at
the ends of the potmeter (5 V) and the reference voltage at the input of the converter to
be measured on connector X21-2 of the input PCB.
120
Height collimator potmeter
over max
The value detected for the
potmeter of the collimator
height is above that stored
in EEprom.
The adjustment of the minimum and maximum values of the potmeters are stored in
the Eeprom. If the current value of the height collimator axle potmeter is over
maximum plus the value set in cell 450, the alarm is generated. This can be caused by
the movement that, because of a fault, has exceeded SW limit or by the break in the
potmeter power supply circuit. Check the presence of the power supply voltage at the
ends of the potmeter (5 V) and the reference voltage at the input of the converter to be
measured on connector X21-2 of the input PCB.
121
Iris collimator potmeter
under min
The value detected for the
potmeter of the iris
collimator is less than that
stored in EEprom.
The adjustment of the minimum and maximum values of the potmeters are stored in
the Eeprom. If the current value of the iris collimator axle potmeter is lower than the
minimum less the value set in cell 450, the alarm is generated. This can be caused by
the movement that, because of a fault, has exceeded SW limit or by the break in the
potmeter power supply circuit. Check the presence of the power supply voltage at the
ends of the potmeter (5 V) and the reference voltage at the input of the converter to be
measured on connector X21-3 of the input PCB.
(Rev. 3)
20-13
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Diagnostics and Troubleshooting
Error
Diagnosis
Cause of the alarm
Corrective measures
122
Iris collimator potmeter
over max
The value detected for the
potmeter of the iris
collimator is above that
stored in EEprom.
The adjustment of the minimum and maximum values of the potmeters are stored in
the Eeprom. If the current value of the iris collimator axle potmeter is over maximum
plus the value set in cell 450, the alarm is generated. This can be caused by the
movement that, because of a fault, has exceeded SW limit or by the break in the
potmeter power supply circuit. Check the presence of the power supply voltage at the
ends of the potmeter (5 V) and the reference voltage at the input of the converter to be
measured on connector X21-3 of the input PCB.
123
Compression force
potmeter under min
The value detected for the
compressor potmeter is
below that stored in
Eeprom.
The adjustment of the minimum and maximum values of the potmeters are stored in
the Eeprom. If the current value of the compression force potmeter is lower than the
minimum minus the value set in cell 450, the alarm is generated. This can be caused
by the breakage of the circuit of the power supply potmeter. Check the presence of the
power supply voltage at the ends of the potmeter (5 V) and the reference voltage at the
input of the converter to be measured on connector X20-1 of the input PCB.
124
Compression force
potmeter over max
The value detected for the
compressor potmeter is
above that stored in
Eeprom.
The adjustment of the minimum and maximum values of the potmeters are stored in
the Eeprom. If the current value of the compression force potmeter is over maximum
plus the value set in cell 450, the alarm is generated. This can be caused by the
movement that because of a fault has exceeded the SW limit or by the breakage of the
power supply potmeter circuit. Check the presence of the power supply voltage at the
ends of the potmeter (5 V) and the reference voltage at the input of the converter to be
measured on connector X20-1 of the input PCB.
125
Grid potmeter under min
The value detected for the
grid potmeter is below that
stored in Eeprom.
The adjustment of the minimum and maximum values of the potmeters are stored in
the Eeprom. If the current value of the potmeter grid is lower than the minimum
minus the value set in cell 450, the alarm is generated. This can be caused by the
movement that, because of a fault, has exceeded SW limit or by the break in the
potmeter power supply circuit. Check the presence of the power supply voltage at the
ends of the potmeter (5 V) and the reference voltage at the input of the converter to be
measured on connector X19-3 of the input PCB.
APOLLO
20-14
(Rev. 3)
SERVICE MANUAL
Diagnostics and Troubleshooting
Error
Diagnosis
Cause of the alarm
Corrective measures
126
Grid potmeter over max
The value detected for the
grid potmeter is above that
stored in Eeprom.
The adjustment of the minimum and maximum values of the potmeters are stored in
the Eeprom. If the current value of the grid potmeter is over maximum plus the value
set in cell 450, the alarm is generated. This can be caused by the movement that,
because of a fault, has exceeded SW limit or by the break in the potmeter power
supply circuit. Check the presence of the power supply voltage at the ends of the
potmeter (5 V) and the reference voltage at the input of the converter to be measured
on connector X19-3 of the input PCB.
127
Gripping potmeter under
min
The value detected for the
gripping potmeter is below
that stored in EEprom.
The adjustment of the minimum and maximum values of the potmeters are stored in
the Eeprom. If the current value of the gripping potmeter is lower than the minimum
minus the value set in cell 450, the alarm is generated. This can be caused by the
movement that, because of a fault, has exceeded SW limit or by the break in the
potmeter power supply circuit. Check the presence of the power supply voltage at the
ends of the potmeter (5 V) and the reference voltage at the input of the converter to be
measured on connector X19-2 of the input PCB.
128
Gripping potmeter over
max
The value detected for the
potmeter of the gripping is
above that stored in
EEprom.
The adjustment of the minimum and maximum values of the potmeters are stored in
the Eeprom. If the current value of the gripping movement potmeter is over maximum
plus the value set in cell 450, the alarm is generated. This can be caused by the
movement that because of a fault has exceeded the SW limit or by the breakage of the
power supply potmeter circuit. Check the presence of the power supply voltage at the
ends of the potmeter (5 V) and the reference voltage at the input of the converter to be
measured on connector X19-2 of the input PCB.
129
Cross subdivision potmeter The value detected for the
under min
cross subdivision potmeter
is below that stored in
EEprom.
The adjustment of the minimum and maximum values of the potmeters are stored in
the Eeprom. If the current value of the cross subdivision is lower than the minimum
minus the value set in cell 450, the alarm is generated. This can be caused by the
movement that, because of a fault, has exceeded SW limit or by the break in the
potmeter power supply circuit. Check the presence of the power supply voltage at the
ends of the potmeter (5 V) and the reference voltage at the input of the converter to be
measured on connector X19-4 of the input PCB.
(Rev. 3)
20-15
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Diagnostics and Troubleshooting
Error
Diagnosis
130
Cross subdivision potmeter The value detected for the
over max
cross subdivision potmeter
is above that stored in
EEprom.
The adjustment of the minimum and maximum values of the potmeters are stored in
the Eeprom. If the current value of the cross subdivision movement is over maximum
plus the value set in cell 450, the alarm is generated. This can be caused by the
movement that, because of a fault, has exceeded SW limit or by the break in the
potmeter power supply circuit. Check the presence of the power supply voltage at the
ends of the potmeter (5 V) and the reference voltage at the input of the converter to be
measured on connector X19-4 of the input PCB.
131
Shutters potmeter under
min
The value detected for the
shutters potmeter is below
that stored in Eeprom.
The adjustment of the minimum and maximum values of the potmeters are stored in
the Eeprom. If the current value of the shutters potmeter is lower than the minimum
minus the value set in cell 450, the alarm is generated. This can be caused by the
movement that, because of a fault, has exceeded SW limit or by the break in the
potmeter power supply circuit. Check the presence of the power supply voltage at the
ends of the potmeter (5 V) and the reference voltage at the input of the converter to be
measured on connector X19-1 of the input PCB.
132
Shutters potmeter over
max
The value detected for the
shutters potmeter is above
that stored in Eeprom.
The adjustment of the minimum and maximum values of the potmeters are stored in
the Eeprom. If the current value of the shutter potmeter is over maximum plus the
value set in cell 450, the alarm is generated. This can be caused by the movement that
because of a fault has exceeded the SW limit or by the breakage of the power supply
potmeter circuit. Check the presence of the power supply voltage at the ends of the
potmeter (5 V) and the reference voltage at the input of the converter to be measured
on connector X19-1 of the input PCB.
133
The angulation potmeter
max is lower than min
An angulation potmeter
max under the min was
stored.
This alarm can only cut in in the potmeters adjustment procedure and occurs when
because of an operating error or fault, for which the potmeter does not move or the
digital analogue converter is broken, the value stored corresponding to the maximum
has a value which is equal to or lower than the value stored in the minimum position.
APOLLO
Cause of the alarm
Corrective measures
20-16
(Rev. 3)
SERVICE MANUAL
Diagnostics and Troubleshooting
Error
Diagnosis
Cause of the alarm
Corrective measures
134
The scan potmeter max is
lower than min
A scan potmeter max
under the min was stored.
This alarm can only cut in in the potmeters adjustment procedure and occurs when
because of an operating error or fault, for which the potmeter does not move or the
digital analogue converter is broken, the value stored corresponding to the maximum
has a value which is equal to or lower than the value stored in the minimum position.
135
The main beam potmeter
max is lower than min
A main beam potmeter
max under the min was
stored.
This alarm can only cut in in the potmeters adjustment procedure and occurs when
because of an operating error or fault, for which the potmeter does not move or the
digital analogue converter is broken, the value stored corresponding to the maximum
has a value which is equal to or lower than the value stored in the minimum position.
136
The middle beam potmeter
max is lower than min
A middle beam potmeter
max under the min was
stored.
This alarm can only cut in in the potmeters adjustment procedure and occurs when
because of an operating error or fault, for which the potmeter does not move or the
digital analogue converter is broken, the value stored corresponding to the maximum
has a value which is equal to or lower than the value stored in the minimum position.
138
The transversal tabletop
A tabletop potmeter max
potmeter max is lower than under the min was stored.
min
This alarm can only cut in in the potmeters adjustment procedure and occurs when
because of an operating error or fault, for which the potmeter does not move or the
digital analogue converter is broken, the value stored corresponding to the maximum
has a value which is equal to or lower than the value stored in the minimum position.
139
The SID potmeter max is
lower than min
A SID potmeter max under
the min was stored.
This alarm can only cut in in the potmeters adjustment procedure and occurs when
because of an operating error or fault, for which the potmeter does not move or the
digital analogue converter is broken, the value stored corresponding to the maximum
has a value which is equal to or lower than the value stored in the minimum position.
141
The max of the width
collimator potmeter is less
than the min
A width collimator
potmeter max value under
the min was stored.
This alarm can only cut in in the potmeters adjustment procedure and occurs when
because of an operating error or fault, for which the potmeter does not move or the
digital analogue converter is broken, the value stored corresponding to the maximum
has a value which is equal to or lower than the value stored in the minimum position.
(Rev. 3)
20-17
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Diagnostics and Troubleshooting
Error
Diagnosis
Cause of the alarm
Corrective measures
142
The max of the iris
collimator potmeter is
lower than the min
A height collimator
potmeter max value under
the min was stored.
This alarm can only cut in in the potmeters adjustment procedure and occurs when
because of an operating error or fault, for which the potmeter does not move or the
digital analogue converter is broken, the value stored corresponding to the maximum
has a value which is equal to or lower than the value stored in the minimum position.
143
The max of the iris
collimator potmeter is
lower than the min
An iris collimator potmeter
max value under the min
was stored.
This alarm can only cut in in the potmeters adjustment procedure and occurs when
because of an operating error or fault, for which the potmeter does not move or the
digital analogue converter is broken, the value stored corresponding to the maximum
has a value which is equal to or lower than the value stored in the minimum position.
144
The max of the
compression force
potmeter is lower than the
min
A compressor potmeter
max under the min was
stored.
This alarm can only cut in in the potmeters adjustment procedure and occurs when
because of an operating error or fault, for which the potmeter does not move or the
digital analogue converter is broken, the value stored corresponding to the maximum
has a value which is equal to or lower than the value stored in the minimum position.
145
The grid potmeter max is
lower than min
A grid potmeter max under This alarm can only cut in in the potmeters adjustment procedure and occurs when
the min was stored.
because of an operating error or fault, for which the potmeter does not move or the
digital analogue converter is broken, the value stored corresponding to the maximum
has a value which is equal to or lower than the value stored in the minimum position.
146
The gripping potmeter max A gripping potmeter max
is lower than min
value under the min was
stored.
This alarm can only cut in in the potmeters adjustment procedure and occurs when
because of an operating error or fault, for which the potmeter does not move or the
digital analogue converter is broken, the value stored corresponding to the maximum
has a value which is equal to or lower than the value stored in the minimum position.
147
The cross subdivision
A cross subdivision
potmeter max is lower than potmeter max under the
min
min was stored.
This alarm can only cut in in the potmeters adjustment procedure and occurs when
because of an operating error or fault, for which the potmeter does not move or the
digital analogue converter is broken, the value stored corresponding to the maximum
has a value which is equal to or lower than the value stored in the minimum position.
APOLLO
20-18
(Rev. 3)
SERVICE MANUAL
Diagnostics and Troubleshooting
Error
Diagnosis
Cause of the alarm
Corrective measures
148
The shutter potmeter max
is lower than min
A shutter potmeter max
under the min was stored.
This alarm can only cut in in the potmeters adjustment procedure and occurs when
because of an operating error or fault, for which the potmeter does not move or the
digital analogue converter is broken, the value stored corresponding to the maximum
has a value which is equal to or lower than the value stored in the minimum position.
156
Serial line: timeout from
Supervis. to Main µP
The data does not arrive on
the serial line from the
supervisor to the main µP
for longer than 0.3 secs.
The main processor and the supervisor are connected to each other parallely and in
series. If the serial dialogue is interrupted, this might be caused by a fault in one of
the 2 processors or by the lack of a 5 V power supply to the main processor (led H1
CPU PCB) or the supervisor (led H2 CPU PCB). This interruption is interrupted on the
line:
• supervisor TX
• main RX.
157
Serial line: timeout from
Main µP to supervisor
The data does not arrive on
the serial line from the
main µP to the supervisor
for longer than 0.3 secs.
The main processor and the supervisor are connected to each other parallely and in
series. If the serial dialogue is interrupted, this might be caused by a fault in one of
the 2 processors or by the lack of a 5 V power supply to the main processor (led H1
CPU PCB) or the supervisor (led H2 CPU PCB). This interruption is interrupted on the
line:
• supervisor RX
• main TX.
158
Single Fault open at
switch on.
The Single Fault circuit is
not closed, therefore access
X13-24 is not at 0 V when
the table is powered on.
The SF circuit is a series obtained from the modules which the commands are on.
Furthermore there are jumpers where optional components could be connected.
Measure the continuity of the various modules as follows with the table off:
• control desk: X8-12 with X41-7 (series joystick)
• pedal command: X41-7 with X41-5 (series X-ray commands)
• optional command: X42- with X42-5 (closure jumper)
• table-mounted control: X16-23 with X16-24 (series keys)
• general terminal block: X0-25 with X0-24 (closure jumper).
(Rev. 3)
20-19
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Diagnostics and Troubleshooting
Error
Diagnosis
Cause of the alarm
159
Inputs close at switch on
A joystick or double control When the table is powered up, a check is carried out on the level of all the inputs
button are active when the relative to the commands present on the control desk and the table-mounted
table is powered up.
command. If one of these keys or joystick is detected as active, then an alarm is
present. This could be caused by the incorrect activation of a control during the
powering up procedure or by a faulty command. The state of the table-mounted
control keys (PCB A8), of the X-ray commands (pedal and any button pad), the control
desk joystick (to be checked directly on the buttons on the c.s.) and the soft-touch
keys of the control desk on the connector X44.
160
Single fault open SID up=1 The SID lift control is
/ serial bit 0=0
probably active when the
SF is open and the output
port is active, but the
supervisor does not receive
the serial confirmation of
the control activation.
The main and supervisor process are connected in series and parallely. The supervisor
receives on the parallel SID on command line (diode V7 CPU PCB) the activation
signal, in addition to that of the SF is open. Nevertheless, the serial confirmation of
the movement, sent by the main processor is not present. The cause of the fault might
be due to a defect on the serial line by one of the processors, or by a HW fault on the
parallel line dependent on a V7. It must be remembered that, to confirm the second
hypothesis there must also be a fault on the SF line that is open.
161
Single fault open SID up=0 The supervisor detects the
/ serial bit 0=1
open SF and the serial
confirmation that the SID
lift control is active, but
the output port is not
active.
The main and supervisor process are connected in series and parallely. The supervisor
recognises that the SF is open and it receives confirmation of the SID on movement
activation on the serial line. On the parallel SID on command line (Diode V7 CPU PCB)
there is not however an activation signal. The cause of the fault might be due to a
defect on the serial line by one of the processors, or by a HW fault on the parallel line
dependent on a V7. It must be remembered that, to confirm the first hypothesis there
must also be a fault on the SF line that is open.
162
Single fault open SID
down =1 / serial bit 1=0
APOLLO
Corrective measures
The SID control down is
What was said for alarm 160 applies in this case, too.
probably active as the SF
The parallel line involved is however the one for the SID down command and the
reference circuit is dependent on diode V8 (CPU PCB).
is open and the output
port is active, but the
supervisor does not receive
the serial confirmation of
the control activation.
20-20
(Rev. 3)
SERVICE MANUAL
Diagnostics and Troubleshooting
Error
Diagnosis
Cause of the alarm
Corrective measures
163
Single fault open SID
down =0 / serial bit 1=1
The supervisor detects the
open SF and the serial
confirmation that the SID
down control is active, but
the output port is not
active.
What was said for alarm 161 applies in this case, too.
The parallel line involved is however the one for the SID down command and the
reference circuit is dependent on diode V8 (CPU PCB).
164
Single fault open tabletop
in=1 / serial bit 2=0
The tabletop in control is
What was said for alarm 160 applies in this case, too.
probably active as the SF
The parallel line involved is however the one for the tabletop in command and the
is open and the output
reference circuit is dependent on diode V9 (CPU PCB).
port is active, but the
supervisor does not receive
the serial confirmation of
the control activation.
165
Single fault open tabletop
in=0 / serial bit 2=1
The supervisor detects the
open SF and the serial
confirmation that the
tabletop in control is
active, but the output port
is not active.
166
Single fault open tabletop
out=1 / serial bit 3=0
The tabletop out control is What was said for alarm 160 applies in this case, too.
The parallel line involved is however the one for the tabletop out command and the
probably active as the SF
reference circuit is dependent on diode V10 (CPU PCB).
is open and the output
port is active, but the
supervisor does not receive
the serial confirmation of
the control activation.
(Rev. 3)
What was said for alarm 161 applies in this case, too.
The parallel line involved is however the one for the tabletop in command and the
reference circuit is dependent on diode V9 (CPU PCB).
20-21
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Diagnostics and Troubleshooting
Error
Diagnosis
Cause of the alarm
Corrective measures
167
Single fault open tabletop
out=0 / serial bit 3=1
The supervisor detects the
open SF and the serial
confirmation that the
tabletop out control is
active, but the output port
is not active.
What was said for alarm 161 applies in this case, too.
The parallel line involved is however the one for the tabletop out command and the
reference circuit is dependent on diode V10 (CPU PCB).
168
Single fault open
compressor up=1 / serial
bit 4=0
The compressor lift control What was said for alarm 160 applies in this case, too.
is probably active when the The parallel line involved is however the one for the compressor up command and the
SF is open and the output reference circuit is dependent on diode V11 (CPU PCB).
port is active, but the
supervisor does not receive
the serial confirmation of
the control activation.
169
Single fault open
compressor up=0 / serial
bit 4=1
The supervisor detects the
open SF and the serial
confirmation that the
compressor lift control is
active, but the output port
is not active.
170
Single fault open
compressor down =1 /
serial bit 5=0
What was said for alarm 160 applies in this case, too.
The compressor down
The parallel line involved is however the one for the compressor down command and
control is probably active
the reference circuit is dependent on diode V12 (CPU PCB).
when the SF is open and
the output port is active,
but the supervisor does not
receive the serial
confirmation of the control
activation.
APOLLO
What was said for alarm 161 applies in this case, too.
The parallel line involved is however the one for the compressor up command and the
reference circuit is dependent on diode V11 (CPU PCB).
20-22
(Rev. 3)
SERVICE MANUAL
Diagnostics and Troubleshooting
Error
Diagnosis
Cause of the alarm
171
Single fault open
compressor down =0 /
serial bit 5=1
The supervisor detects the What was said for alarm 161 applies in this case, too.
The parallel line involved is however the one for the compressor down command and
open SF and the serial
the reference circuit is dependent on diode V12 (CPU PCB).
confirmation that the
compressor down control is
active, but the output port
is not active.
172
Single fault open A5
The A5 inverter enabling
inverter enable=1/serial bit control is probably active
6=0
when the SF is open and
the output port is active,
but the supervisor does not
receive the serial
confirmation of the control
activation.
What was said for alarm 160 applies in this case, too.
The parallel line involved is however the one for the inverter A5 (main beamangulation) movement control and the reference circuit is dependent on diodes V13
(forwards) and V15 (back) (CPU PCB).
173
Single fault open A5
The supervisor detects the
inverter enable=0/serial bit open SF and the serial
6=1
confirmation that the A5
inverter enabling control is
active, but the output port
is not active.
What was said for alarm 161 applies in this case, too.
The parallel line involved is however the one for the inverter A5 (main beamangulation) movement control and the reference circuit is dependent on diodes V13
(forwards) and V15 (back) (CPU PCB).
174
Single fault open A6
The A6 inverter enabling
inverter enable=1/serial bit control is probably active
7=0
when the SF is open and
the output port is active,
but the supervisor does not
receive the serial
confirmation of the control
activation.
What was said for alarm 160 applies in this case, too.
The parallel line involved is however the one for the inverter A6 movement (middle
beam-scan) movement and the reference circuit is dependent on diodes V14 (forwards)
and V16 (backwards) (CPU PCB).
(Rev. 3)
Corrective measures
20-23
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Diagnostics and Troubleshooting
Error
Diagnosis
175
Single fault open A5
The supervisor detects the
inverter enable=0/serial bit open SF and the serial
7=1
confirmation that the A6
inverter enabling control is
active, but the output port
is not active.
What was said for alarm 161 applies in this case, too.
The parallel line involved is however the one for the inverter A6 movement (middle
beam-scan) movement and the reference circuit is dependent on diodes V14 (forwards)
and V16 (backwards) (CPU PCB).
180
Single fault close / SID
up=1
The SF circuit is not active
(closed) but the SID lift
control output port is
active.
There is HW disagreement regarding the SID up command. The movement activation
circuit dependent on the diode V7 (Cupboard ) is active but the SF series circuit is
closed. A check must be made to see which of the two circuits the fault is on.
181
Single fault closed / SID
down=1
The SF circuit is not active
(closed) but the SID down
control output port is
active.
There is HW disagreement regarding the SID down command. The movement
activation circuit dependent on the diode V8 (CPU PCB) is active but the SF series
circuit is closed. A check must be made to see which of the two circuits the fault is on.
182
Single fault close /
tabletop in=1
The SF circuit is not active
(closed) but the tabletop
control output port is
active.
There is HW disagreement regarding the tabletop in command. The movement
activation circuit dependent on the diode V9 (CPU PCB) is active but the SF series
circuit is closed. A check must be made to see which of the two circuits the fault is on.
183
Single fault close /
tabletop out=1
The SF circuit is not active
(closed) but the tabletop
out control output is
active.
There is HW disagreement regarding the tabletop out command. The movement
activation circuit dependent on the diode V10 (CPU PCB) is active but the SF series
circuit is closed. A check must be made to see which of the two circuits the fault is on.
184
Single fault close /
compressor up=1
The SF circuit is not active
(closed) but the
compressor lift control
output port is active.
There is HW disagreement regarding the compressor up command. The movement
activation circuit dependent on the diode V11 (CPU PCB) is active but the SF series
circuit is closed. A check must be made to see which of the two circuits the fault is on.
185
Single fault closed /
compressor down=1
The SF circuit is not active
(closed) but the
compressor down control
output port is active.
There is HW disagreement regarding the compressor down command. The movement
activation circuit dependent on the diode V12 (CPU PCB) is active but the SF series
circuit is closed. A check must be made to see which of the two circuits the fault is on.
APOLLO
Cause of the alarm
Corrective measures
20-24
(Rev. 3)
SERVICE MANUAL
Diagnostics and Troubleshooting
Error
Diagnosis
Cause of the alarm
Corrective measures
186
Single fault close / A5
inverter enable =1
The SF circuit is not active
(closed) but the A5 inverter
enabling command output
port is active.
There is a HW disagreement regarding the forward or back command of the A5
inverter (main beam – angulation). The movement activation circuit dependent on
diodes V13 (forwards) and V15 (back) (CPU PCB) is active but the SF series circuit is
closed. A check must be made to see which of the circuits the fault is on.
187
Single fault close / A6
inverter enable=1
The SF circuit is not active
(closed) but the A6 inverter
enabling command output
port is active.
There is a HW disagreement regarding the forward or back command of the A6
inverter (middle beam – scan). The movement activation circuit dependent on a diodes
V13 (forwards) and V15 (back) (CPU PCB) is active but the SF series circuit is closed. A
check must be made to see which of the two circuits the fault is on.
191
The angulation potmeter
does not move with active
control
The angulation control is
active but potmeter
feedback does not detect
the motion.
The main processor activates the angulation movement control and at the same time
checks the relative potmeter is sending feedback signals in proportion to the speeds
applied. The alarm is generated when no movement is detected or the speed is not
aligned with what is described in paragraph 11.3.5. This phenomenon is more evident
in the first moments of the motion because of mechanical inertial. When the difference
between the applied speed (Sp. ref. at the start up) and the speed detected (potmeter
feedback) exceed a value obtained from a formula for a certain time, the alarm is
generated. The time and value applied in the formula are set in cells 671 and 672. The
cause of the alarm might be:
• mechanical hardening of the movement
• potmeter slip
• values of the cells 671 and 672 insufficient.
(Rev. 3)
20-25
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Diagnostics and Troubleshooting
Error
Diagnosis
Cause of the alarm
Corrective measures
192
The scan potmeter does
not move with active
control
The scan movement
control is active but the
potmeter feedback does not
detect the motion.
The main processor activates the scan movement command and at the same time
checks the relative potmeter is sending feedback signals in proportion to the speeds
applied. The alarm is generated when no movement is detected or the speed is not
aligned with what is described in paragraph 11.3.5. This phenomenon is more evident
in the first moments of the motion because of mechanical inertial. When the difference
between the applied speed (Sp. ref. at the start up) and the speed detected (potmeter
feedback) exceed a value obtained from a formula for a certain time, the alarm is
generated. The time and the value applied in the formula are set in cells 673 and 674.
The cause of the alarm might be:
• mechanical hardening of the movement
• potmeter slip
• values of the cells 673 and 674 insufficient.
193
The main beam potmeter
does not move with active
control
The main beam movement
control is active but the
potmeter feedback does not
detect the motion.
The main processor activates the main beam movement command and at the same
time checks the relative potmeter is sending feedback signals in proportion to the
speeds applied. The alarm is generated when no movement is detected or the speed is
not aligned with what is described in paragraph 11.3.5. This phenomenon is more
evident in the first moments of the motion because of mechanical inertial. When the
difference between the applied speed (Sp. ref. at the start up) and the speed detected
(potmeter feedback) exceed a value obtained from a formula for a certain time, the
alarm is generated. The time and the value applied in the formula are set in cells 675
and 676. The cause of the alarm might be:
• mechanical hardening of the movement
• potmeter slip
• values of the cells 675 and 676 insufficient.
APOLLO
20-26
(Rev. 3)
SERVICE MANUAL
Diagnostics and Troubleshooting
Error
Diagnosis
Cause of the alarm
Corrective measures
194
The middle beam potmeter
does not move with active
control.
The middle beam
movement control is active
but the potmeter feedback
does not detect the motion.
The main processor activates the middle beam movement output and at the same time
checks the relative potmeter is sending feedback signals in proportion to the speeds
applied. The alarm generated when no movement is detected or the speed is not
aligned with what is applied as per paragraph 11.3.5. This phenomenon is more
evident in the first stages of motion because of mechanical inertia. When the difference
between the applied speed (Sp. ref. at the start up) and the speed detected (potmeter
feedback) exceed a value obtained from a formula for a certain time, the alarm is
generated. The time and the value applied in the formula are set in cells 675 and 676.
The cause of the alarm might be:
• mechanical hardening of the movement
• potmeter slip
• values of the cells 675 and 676 insufficient.
195
The shutter potmeter does
not move with active
control.
The shutters movement
control is active but the
potmeter feedback does not
detect the motion.
The main processor activates the shutter movement output and at the same time
checks the relative potmeter is sending feedback signals in proportion to the speed
applied. The alarm is generated when no movement is detected or the speed is not
aligned with what is described in paragraph 11.3.5. This phenomenon is more evident
in the first moments of the motion because of mechanical inertia. When the difference
between the applied speed (Sp. ref. at the start up) and the speed detected (potmeter
feedback) exceed a value obtained from a formula for a certain time, the alarm is
generated. The time and the value applied in the formula are set in cells 679 and 680.
The cause of the alarm might be:
• mechanical hardening of the movement
• potmeter slip
• values of the cells 679 and 680 insufficient.
(Rev. 3)
20-27
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Diagnostics and Troubleshooting
Error
Diagnosis
Cause of the alarm
Corrective measures
196
Right belt cassette encoder
does not move with active
control
The R cassette movement
belt is active but the
motion is not detected
through the encoder
feedback.
The main processor activates the R cassette movement belt output and at the same
time checks that the relative encoder is sending a feedback signal that is proportional
to the applied speeds. The alarm is generated when no movement is detected or the
speed is not aligned with what is described in paragraph 11.3.5. This phenomenon is
more evident in the first moments of the motion because of mechanical inertia. When
the difference between the applied speed (Sp. ref. at the start up) and the speed
detected (potmeter feedback) exceed a value obtained from a formula for a certain
time, the alarm is generated. The time and the value applied in the formula are set in
cells 681 and 682. The cause of the alarm might be:
• mechanical hardening of the movement
• encoder slip
• values of the cells 681 and 682 insufficient.
197
Left belt cassette encoder
does not move with active
control
The L cassette movement
belt is active but the
motion is not detected
through the encoder
feedback.
The main processor activates the L cassette movement belt output and at the same
time checks that the relative encoder is sending a feedback signal that is proportional
to the applied speed. The alarm is generated when no movement is detected or the
speed is not aligned with what is described in paragraph 11.3.5. This phenomenon is
more evident in the first moments of the motion because of mechanical inertia. When
the difference between the applied speed (Sp. ref. at the start up) and the speed
detected (potmeter feedback) exceed a value obtained from a formula for a certain
time, the alarm is generated. The time and the value applied in the formula are set in
cells 681 and 682. The cause of the alarm might be:
• mechanical hardening of the movement
• encoder slip
• values of the cells 681 and 682 insufficient.
APOLLO
20-28
(Rev. 3)
SERVICE MANUAL
Diagnostics and Troubleshooting
Error
Diagnosis
Cause of the alarm
Corrective measures
198
The cross subdivision
potmeter does not move
with active control.
The cross subdivision
movement control is active
but the potmeter feedback
does not detect the motion.
The main processor activates the cross subdivision movement output and at the same
time checks the relative potmeter is sending feedback signals in proportion to the
speed applied. The alarm is generated when no movement is detected or the speed is
not aligned with what is described in paragraph 11.3.5. This phenomenon is more
evident in the first moments of the motion because of mechanical inertia. When the
difference between the applied speed (Sp. ref. at the start up) and the speed detected
(potmeter feedback) exceed a value obtained from a formula for a certain time, the
alarm is generated. The time and the value applied in the formula are set in cells 685
and 686. The cause of the alarm might be:
• mechanical hardening of the movement
• potmeter slip
• values of the cells 685 and 686 insufficient.
201
Angulation potmeter in
movement without request
There is no angulation
movement control but
motion is detected through
the potmeter feedback.
The main processor did not activate the angulation movement but has detected
through the potmeter feedback that there has been a movement greater than what was
inserted in cell 452. The cause might be because:
• motion activation circuit HW fault (movement active without command by the
processor)
• excessive noise on the potmeter signal
• break in the electric potmeter circuit.
If the electrical potmeter circuit is damaged, the alarm is generated when the table is
turned on. Thus since the circuit is broken, the reference signal pull up "moves" the
input as soon as it is powered up.
(Rev. 3)
20-29
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Diagnostics and Troubleshooting
Error
Diagnosis
Cause of the alarm
Corrective measures
202
Scan potmeter in
movement without request
There has been no scan
movement output but
motion has been detected
by the potmeter feedback.
The main processor did not activate the scan movement but has detected through the
potmeter feedback that there has been a movement greater than what was inserted in
cell 453. The cause might be because:
• motion activation circuit HW fault (movement active without command by the
processor)
• excessive noise on the potmeter signal
• break in the electric potmeter circuit.
If the electrical circuit of the potmeter is damaged, the alarm is generated when the
table is turned on. Thus since the circuit is broken, the reference signal pull up
"moves" the input as soon as it is powered up.
203
Main beam potmeter in
movement without request
There has been no main
beam movement output
but motion is detected by
the potmeter feedback.
The main processor did not activate the main beam movement but has detected
through the potmeter feedback that there has been a movement greater than what was
inserted in cell 454. The cause might be because:
• motion activation circuit HW fault (movement active without command by the
processor)
• excessive noise on the potmeter signal
• break in the potmeter circuit.
If the electrical circuit of the potmeter is damaged, the alarm is generated when the
table is turned on. Thus since the circuit is broken, the reference signal pull up
"moves" the input as soon as it is powered up.
204
Middle beam potmeter in
movement without request
There is no middle beam
movement output but
motion is detected through
the potmeter feedback.
The main processor did not activate the middle beam movement but has detected
through the potmeter feedback that there has been a movement greater than what was
inserted in cell 455. The cause might be because:
• motion activation circuit HW fault (movement active without command by the
processor)
• excessive noise on the potmeter signal
• break in the electric potmeter connection circuit.
If the electrical potmeter circuit is damaged, the alarm is generated when the table is
turned on. Thus since the circuit is broken, the reference signal pull up "moves" the
input as soon as it is powered up.
APOLLO
20-30
(Rev. 3)
SERVICE MANUAL
Diagnostics and Troubleshooting
Error
Diagnosis
Cause of the alarm
Corrective measures
206
Transversal tabletop
potmeter in movement
without request
There is no tabletop
movement output but
motion is detected by the
potmeter feedback.
The main processor did not activate the tabletop movement but has detected through
the potmeter feedback that there has been a movement greater than what was
inserted in cell 456. The cause might be because:
• motion activation circuit HW fault (movement active without command by the
processor)
• excessive noise on the potmeter signal
• break in the electric potmeter circuit.
If the electrical potmeter circuit is damaged, the alarm is generated when the table is
turned on. Thus since the circuit is broken, the reference pull up signal "moves" the
input as soon as it is powered up.
207
SID potmeter in movement
without request
There is no SID movement
output but motion is
detected through the
potmeter feedback.
The main processor did not activate the SID movement but has detected through the
potmeter feedback that there has been a movement greater than what was inserted in
cell 457. The cause might be because:
• motion activation circuit HW fault (movement active without command by the
processor)
• excessive noise on the potmeter signal
• break in the electric potmeter connection circuit.
If the electrical potmeter circuit is damaged, the alarm is generated when the table is
turned on. Thus since the circuit is broken, the reference pull up signal "moves" the
input as soon as it is powered up.
212
Compression force
potmeter in movement
without request
There is no compression
control but motion is
detected through the
potmeter feedback.
The compressor is in park but, through the potmeter feedback, it is seen that there
has been a movement greater than the dead band (cell 226). The cause might have
been a contact of the compression device with an obstacle or by the break in the
electric potmeter circuit.
If the electrical potmeter circuit is damaged, the alarm is generated when the table is
turned on. Thus as the circuit is broken, the pull up of the reference "moves" the input
as soon as it is powered up.
(Rev. 3)
20-31
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Diagnostics and Troubleshooting
Error
Diagnosis
Cause of the alarm
Corrective measures
213
Grid potmeter in
movement without request
There is no grid movement
output but motion is
detected through the
potmeter feedback.
The main processor did not activate the grid movement but has detected through the
potmeter feedback that there has been a movement greater than what was inserted in
cell 449. The cause might be because:
• motion activation circuit HW fault (movement active without command by the
processor)
• excessive noise on the potmeter signal
• break in the electrical potmeter connection circuit.
If the electrical potmeter circuit is damaged, the alarm is generated when the table is
turned on. Thus as the circuit is broken, the pull up of the reference "moves" the input
as soon as it is powered up.
214
Gripping potmeter in
movement without request
There is no gripping
movement control but
motion is detected through
the potmeter feedback.
The main processor has not activated the gripping movement but has detected
through the potmeter feedback that there has been a movement greater than what was
inserted in cell 449. The cause might be because:
• motion activation circuit HW fault (movement active without command by the
processor)
• excessive noise on the potmeter signal
• break in the potmeter circuit.
If the electrical potmeter circuit is damaged, the alarm is generated when the table is
turned on. Thus as the circuit is broken, the pull up of the reference "moves" the input
as soon as it is powered up.
215
Cross subdivision potmeter There is no cross
in movement without
subdivision movement
request
control but motion is
detected through the
potmeter feedback.
APOLLO
The main processor did not activate the cross subdivision movement but has detected
through the potmeter feedback that there has been a movement greater than what was
inserted in cell 449. The cause might be because:
• motion activation circuit HW fault (movement active without command by the
processor)
• excessive noise on the potmeter signal
• break in the electric potmeter connection circuit.
If the electrical potmeter circuit is damaged, the alarm is generated when the table is
turned on. Thus as the circuit is broken, the pull up of the reference "moves" the input
as soon as it is powered up.
20-32
(Rev. 3)
SERVICE MANUAL
Diagnostics and Troubleshooting
Error
Diagnosis
Cause of the alarm
Corrective measures
216
Shutter potmeter in
movement without request
There is no shutter
movement output but
motion is detected through
the potmeter feedback.
The main processor did not activate the shutter movement but has detected through
the potmeter feedback that there has been a movement greater than what was
inserted in cell 449. The cause might be because:
• motion activation circuit HW fault (movement active without command by the
processor)
• excessive noise on the potmeter signal
• break in the electric potmeter connection circuit.
If the electrical potmeter circuit is damaged, the alarm is generated when the table is
turned on. Thus as the circuit is broken, the pull up of the reference "moves" the input
as soon as it is powered up.
218
Transversal tabletop
movement over max error
The transversal tabletop
movement exceeded the
error value set in cell 447.
The movement of the tabletop is not axle controlled but is an ON-OFF movement. The
speed check is carried out on the basis of a mean reference value inserted in cell 235.
As it is therefore a mean that does not take working conditions into account, an error
is accumulated during the movement. The maximum value the error can reach is
inserted in cell 447. The alarm can be caused by:
• a mechanical slipping of the potmeter
• a mechanical hardening of the movement
• a motor power supply voltage with a tolerance 10% higher than the rated voltage.
220
SID movement over max
error
The SID movement
exceeded the error value
set in cell 448.
The movement of the SID is not axle controlled but is an ON-OFF movement. The
speed check is carried out on the basis of a mean reference value inserted in cell 236.
As it is therefore a mean that does not take working conditions into account, an error
is accumulated during the movement. The maximum value the error can reach is
inserted in cell 448. The alarm can be caused by:
• a mechanical slipping of the potmeter
• a mechanical hardening of the movement
• a motor power supply voltage with a tolerance 10% higher than the rated voltage.
226
Compressor down output
active without feedback
input
No compressor movement
feedback present when
down control is active.
The processor activates the compressor down output but the HW confirmation that
the compressor is in motion (input X32-1 input PCB active 0 V) is not there.
(Rev. 3)
20-33
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Diagnostics and Troubleshooting
Error
Diagnosis
227
Compressor outputs not
The compressor movement
active with feedback active. feedback is active without
movement commands.
The processor has not activated the compressor lift or descent but the input X32-1
input PCB is active at 0 V.
228
Compressor up output
active without feedback
input
No compressor movement
feedback present when lift
control is active.
The processor activates the compressor lift output but the HW confirmation that the
compressor is in motion (input X32-1 input PCB active 0 V) is not there.
231
Single Fault open without
active inputs
SF circuit is open but no
movement control is
recognised.
This alarm is generated if the SF circuit is not open within the time set in cell 451,
while there is a request for movement or X-ray emission. That might be caused by a
fault in a command key on the panel mounted on the table or by a joystick on the
control desk which do not correctly switch the SF circuit and the input closure.
Another reason for the alarm might be due to the opening of the SF circuit (input X1324 input PCB).
Check the continuity of the various modules crossed by the SF series circuit:
• command desk: X8-12 with X41-7 (series joystick)
• pedal command: X41-7 with X41-5 (series X-ray commands)
• optional command: X42-7 with X42-5 (closure jumper)
• table-mounted control: X16-23 with X16-24 (series keys)
• general terminal block: X0-25 with X0-24 (closure jumper).
232
Single Fault close with
active inputs
One or more movement
controls present but SF
circuit is not active
(closed).
This alarm is generated if the SF circuit is not open within the time set in cell 451,
while there is a request for movement or X-ray emission. That might be caused by a
fault in a command key on the panel mounted on the table or by a joystick on the
control desk which do not correctly switch the SF circuit and the input closure.
240
Right cass. belt movement
overcurrent
Right cass. belt motor
movement exceeded
maximum current
threshold.
The R cassette belt movement control circuit is protected with a HW current limitation
circuit (R8 resistor activation PCB). If this limit is exceeded, the optoisolator U1 sends
0 V to the integrated circuit D26 pin 18 (CPU PCB). The exceeding of this limit might
be caused by a mechanical hardening of the movement or by an electrical fault on one
of the components (M5 motor, D1 driver, U1 optoisolator).
APOLLO
Cause of the alarm
Corrective measures
20-34
(Rev. 3)
SERVICE MANUAL
Diagnostics and Troubleshooting
Error
Diagnosis
Cause of the alarm
Corrective measures
241
Left cass. belt movement
overcurrent
Left cass. belt motor
movement exceeded
maximum current
threshold.
The L cassette belt movement control circuit is protected with a HW current limitation
circuit (R8 resistor activation PCB). If this limit is exceeded, the optoisolator U2 sends
0 V to the integrated circuit D26 pin 17 (CPU PCB). The exceeding of this limit might
be caused by a mechanical hardening of the movement or by an electrical fault on one
of the components (M6 motor, D2 driver, U2 optoisolator).
242
Shutters overcurrent
Shutters movement motor
exceeded maximum
current threshold.
The shutter cross subdivision movement control is protected by a HW current
limitation circuit (resistor R12 activation PCB). If this limit is exceeded, the
optoisolator U4 sends 0 V to the integrated circuit D26 pin 16 (CPU PCB). The
exceeding of this limit might be caused by a mechanical hardening of the movement or
by an electrical fault on one of the components (M8 motor, D5 and D6 drivers, U4
optoisolator).
243
Cross subdivision
overcurrent
Cross subdivision
movement motor exceeded
maximum current
threshold.
The cross subdivision movement control is protected by a HW current limitation
circuit (resistor R12 activation PCB). If this limit is exceeded, the optoisolator U3
sends 0 V to the integrated circuit D26 pin 15 (CPU PCB). The exceeding of this limit
might be caused by a mechanical hardening of the movement or by an electrical fault
on one of the components (M10 motor, D3 and D4 drivers, U3 optoisolator).
300
Cassette loading error
The cassette did not reach
the format recognition
photocell within 1 sec.
When the cassette transport command is activated, the processor wants to recognise
the activation of the size reading photocell input (X14-2 input PCB) active within 1 sec.
The alarm might be caused by a fault of the format reading photocell circuit or by the
cassette moving too slowly. If the cause is the latter, check the cassette input presser,
the state of the cassette, the gripping pressure and the state of the belts driving the
cassette.
301
Grid movement timeout
The grid did not reach the
destination (parking or
position 0) within 8 secs.
The gripping opening/grid parking has a time out of 8 secs.. If the set point is not
reached the cause might be:
• an electrical potmeter fault or the mechanical slipping of the same.
• dead band too small (cell 227) cause of repeated oscillations at the set point
• break in the movement circuit (engine M7, fuse F23, driver D7).
(Rev. 3)
20-35
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Diagnostics and Troubleshooting
Error
Diagnosis
Cause of the alarm
Corrective measures
302
Gripping movement
timeout
The gripping did not reach
destination (cassette
opening or closing) within
5 secs.
The gripping opening/closure movement has a time out of 5 secs. If the set point is
not reached the cause might be:
• electrical potmeter fault or mechanical slipping of the same (only for the opening)
• gripping switch fault (S33 with input X14-4 input PCB) (only for the closure)
• dead band too small (cell 228) cause of repeated oscillations at the set point (only
for the opening)
• break in the movement circuit (engine M9, fuse F22, driver D8).
303
Cassette size photosensor
not released
Cassette size photosensor
The cassette presence photosensor (input X14-1 input PCB) must be deactivated
is obscured for longer than within 5 sec of the cassette insertion command being activated. The alarm might be
5 secs.
caused by a fault of the photosensor circuit or by the excessively slow movement of the
cassette. If the cause is the latter, check the cassette input presser, the state of the
cassette, the gripping pressure and the state of the belts driving the cassette.
304
Simultaneous drivers
enable
The SW controlled the
gripping open / close
control drivers
simultaneously.
305
I.I. lift movement timeout
The I.I. lift did not reach
When the I.I. lift up movement is activated the input X15-4 (switch S28) must be
destination (up / down end deactivated within 3 secs. When I.I. lift down movement is activated the input X15-5
run) within 3 secs
(switch S29) must be deactivated within 3 secs. The non arrival of the movement at
destination might be caused by a mechanical movement failure or an electronic fault
of one of the circuit components (switch S28 or 29, motor M12, remote switch K4M
and K5M, relay K10 and K11 output PCB).
APOLLO
The opening and gripping commands direct to the driver D8 (activation PCB) to pins 5
and 7 have been sent simultaneously. This causes a short circuit that damages the
components. The circuits dependent on integrated D6 pin 11 and 12 output PCB
should be checked.
20-36
(Rev. 3)
SERVICE MANUAL
Diagnostics and Troubleshooting
Error
Diagnosis
Cause of the alarm
Corrective measures
306
Timeout shutters or cross
subdivision movement for
I.I. lift call
Cross subdivision or
shutter movements did not
reach position to allow I.I.
lift due to a control error.
When the I.I. lift is called, the shutters must reach the corresponding position to the
min potmeter adjustment and the subdivision movement in a cross must reach the
centre. Failure to reach these set points within 5 secs. activates the alarm. This might
be caused by a fault on one of the control circuits of these movements. See the
description for alarm 302 for the gripping circuits. For the shutters the data of the
cells 300 relative at that moment are valid.
500
RAM-EEPROM: data
missing
A functioning failure
detected on Eeprom.
Data in Eeprom are compared with that in the Ram when the equipment is powered
up. If the check shows that there is no correspondence between the data and the
checksum the alarm is generated. The Eeprom or the Ram must be replaced.
501
RAM-EEPROM: writing
timeout
It was not possible to
transfer data to Eeprom.
In copying Eeprom (cell 702) the writing is not complete. Replace the Eeprom; it is
probably defective.
502
RAM-EEPROM: failed
verification
Data in Eeprom are
different from those in
RAM.
The comparison of the data was wrong during Eeprom copying (cell 702). Replace the
Eeprom; it is probably defective.
503
RAM-EEPROM: wrong
Eeprom reading.
Data in Eeprom cannot be
read.
It was not possible to read the data during Eeprom copying (cell 701). Repeat the
operation or replace the Ram.
907
Button or joystick active at A joystick or double control A key is pressed when the table is powered up. The cause might be due to an operator
switch on
button are active when the error (key or joystick pressed during power up) or by a defective key.
table is powered up.
Check that the control desk keys, keys of the table-mounted panel and pedal have the
NO contact open in the rest position.
910
CAN line Timeout between
console and main
µProcessor
(Rev. 5)
CAN bus line interruption
between console and main
CPU.
Check connection between pins X8.1 (cabinet CPU side) and X8.13 (console side) and
between pins X8.2 (cabinet CPU side) and X8.5 (console side).
Verify components D12 on console board and D16 on cabinet CPU side and the
related circuits.
20-37
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Diagnostics and Troubleshooting
Error
Diagnosis
Cause of the alarm
Corrective measures
961
FLASH-EPROM erasing
failed
The Flash-Eprom was not
erased to reset the
warnings or cycles history.
With page 719 active (deletion of alarm history) or a page between 853 and 867 (cycle
deletion) the flash eprom is not reset. Repeat the operation or replace the flash eprom.
962
FLASH-EPROM writing
failed
The Flash-Eprom did not
allow to write data relative
to history.
The alarm history or the updating of the table cycles is not written on the flash eprom.
Replace the probably defective flash eprom.
999
Data lost in RAM. Check
battery
Data no longer in RAM.
On powering up the Ram is seen to have no data. This might be caused by a defect in
the Ram or the buffer battery with insufficient voltage. Check the ends of the battery
on the CPU PCB to see that there is a voltage of 3.6 V. Change the battery if the
voltage is not high enough or change the Ram if the defect persists.
APOLLO
20-38
(Rev. 3)
SERVICE MANUAL
Diagnostics and Troubleshooting
20.2
Troubleshooting for faults or malfunctions not recognised by the processor
20.2.1
Table
Fault or malfunction
Reason
Corrective measures
During the tilting, the
message "Limit reached" is
often displayed".
The I.I. does not escape the
ascent band and enters the
collision zone.
The tilting function is designed in such a way that the movement continues without
stopping if it the I.I. gets too close to the floor. To ensure this condition a ascent band
is set (cell 208) positioned over the I.I.-floor height. When the I.I. enters the ascent
band, the tilting algorithm is modified and replaced by an anti-collision movement. If
the band is too small, the I.I. might not manage to escape and enter the safety zone.
The data entered in cell 208 must therefore be increased.
The movements controlled
with the table PDI (tilting,
lift, scan, angulation) are not
smooth.
Check parameters not
regulated properly.
If the values of the proportional, derived and integral gains are not properly regulated
the movements lose their smoothness. Before adjusting these parameters, read what is
described in paragraph 11.2.1. The gain values for the axle presenting the defect are
modified by reducing what is set in 5% steps until movements are obtained without
jerks and vibrations. Remember that if the reduction is too great the gains make the
positioning inaccurate.
At switch ON the message
"LIMIT BARRIER" is
displayed
Input X0-17 is not connected to If no safety barrier devices are installed in the room, check that input X0-17 is
0V.
connected to 0 V. If safety barrier devices are installed, check that the devices are
functional and that are not activated by elements of the table or any other object
The compressor is not
brought into the field.
Wrong adjustment of the
compression force minimum
photometer.
(Rev. 3)
After checking the proper functioning of the circuit relating to the compressor unit,
access the potmeter adjustment routine and cell 123, check that the value of the
potmeter with pressure-free cone is equal to or less than the stored value. If this not
the case, an effective way for checking whether the non-movement of the compressor
is due to this reason when the table is functioning normally is to increase the value of
the compression force using the dedicated key until the maximum and then to activate
the descent movement. If the movement is activated, the minimum value of the
potmeter must then be adjusted.
20-39
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Diagnostics and Troubleshooting
Fault or malfunction
Reason
Corrective measures
The horizontal position of
the table is not correct.
The main and middle beam
potmeters have not been
adjusted properly.
The horizontal position of the table is obtained thanks to the combination of the main
and middle beam positions. Carry out the adjustment of the main and middle beams
very carefully, as described in paragraph 10.1.4.
The vertical or
Trendelembourg position of
the table is not correct.
The main and middle beam
potmeters have not been
adjusted properly.
The extreme positions of the table are obtained thanks to the combination of the main
and middle beam positions. Carry out the adjustment of the main and middle beams
very carefully, as described in paragraph 10.1.4.
Check the data in cells 409 and 410 that determine the stop position.
The equipment does not
come on.
Lack of power supply to the
logical circuits.
Check the presence of the single-phase voltage to the T2 transformer primary. Check
that the thermomagnetic cut out Q1 is closed. Check that the fuse F4 is not broken.
The tomo layer is not
correct.
The geometry of some of the
table's mechanical components
is different.
As the tomography of the Apollo table is completely electronic, the layer position is
calculated by means of an algorithm that takes account of the equipment's mechanical
dimensions. A defect like this can be corrected by modifying the data contained in cell
438.
The main and middle beam
The correspondence of the
collision switch often cuts in. main beam's position with that
of the middle beam is wrong.
A sophisticated algorithm manages the main and middle beam movement used for the
tilting and lift functions. An anti-collision switch prevents a collision being generated
between main and middle beam. If this switch cuts in during movements, the cause
might be:
• main and middle beam potmeter adjustment not correct. A new adjustment must
be done as described in paragraph 10.1.4
• adjustment of particularly sparse PDI gains. The setting must be changed as
described in paragraph 11.2.1.
APOLLO
20-40
(Rev. 3)
SERVICE MANUAL
Diagnostics and Troubleshooting
20.2.2
Spot Film Device (not available on “All Digital” version)
Fault or malfunction
Reason
Corrective measures
With I.I. lift high, there is a
collision between I.I. and
shutters.
The adjustment of the shutter
potmeter is wrong.
Recalibrate the shutter potmeter that should have a minimum position corresponding
to an opening of 475 mm (18.7"), see paragraph 10.1.14.
With I.I. lift high, there is a
collision between I.I. and
cassette guides.
The potmeter adjustment of the Recalibrate the gripping potmeter adjustment that should have a minimum position
gripping opening is wrong.
corresponding to an opening of 463 mm (18.2"), see paragraph 10.1.12.
If the opening should again prove to be critical, check the set value in cell 228 (dead
band gripping opening) that could be excessive.
The movements controlled
Check parameters are not
correctly regulated.
with PDI of the Spot Film
Device (longitudinal cassette,
transversal cassette and
shutters) are not fluid.
If the values of the proportional, derived and integral gains are not properly regulated
the movements lose their smoothness. Before adjusting these parameters, read what is
described in paragraph 11.2.1. The gain values for the axle presenting the defect are
modified by reducing what is set in 5% steps until movements are obtained without
jerks and vibrations. Remember that too great a reduction of the gains makes the
positioning imprecise.
The cassette gripping closure The control circuit is defective.
movement is not working.
Check fuse F22 positioned on the PCB A10 on the Spot Film Device. If it is seen to be
broken check that the gripping devices do not hit the walls of the Spot Film Device
violently, on opening.
Check that pressure switch S33 is not open (input X14-4), when the gripping devices
do not lock on the cassette.
(Rev. 3)
20-41
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Diagnostics and Troubleshooting
Fault or malfunction
Reason
Corrective measures
The fluoro exposure
time is long.
The positioning of the cassette,
of the shutters or of the
collimator does not occur in the
regular times.
The X-ray request to the generator control is sent when the cassette, shutters and
collimator reach the correct position. It must therefore be checked which of these
three movements is excessively slow in reaching the set point.
If the defect is on the cassette or shutter movements, check to see if there are
mechanical obstacles or take measures on the gains as described in the paragraph
11.2.1.
If the defect is on the positioning of the collimator axles, the cause of this defect might
be due to:
A- HW adjustment of the gain circuit is wrong
The trimmers, R38 width, R48 height or R58 iris, must be adjusted as described in
the paragraph 16.1.2
B- Dead band to small
The axle positioning dead band is too short, therefore the movement cannot stop
on the set point. This might be caused by a degradation of the potmeter or the
increase in mechanical backlashes. The value in the cell relating to the axle with
the defect (229 width, 230 height, 231 iris) must be increased. The increase in this
value however increases the positioning tolerance thereby diminishing the
precision. It is therefore also possible to adjust the slowdown cells (232 width, 233
height, 234 iris), which reduce the speed of the axle before reaching the set point,
by a quantity equal to the value set. The increase of this parameter does not
influence the positioning precision but has, as its only drawback, an increase in
the positioning time on the axle.
The cassette is not
recognised.
Wrong use of the cassette or
defect in the size reading
photosensor.
The correspondence between the type of cassette used (cm or inch) and the data in cell
257 is checked. It should be checked that the cassette size used is in the range
allowed (see size table and cm division paragraph 4.2 and inch paragraph 4.3.
If the above is correct, check the functioning of the size reading photosensor (input
X14-2).
APOLLO
20-42
(Rev. 3)
SERVICE MANUAL
Diagnostics and Troubleshooting
Fault or malfunction
Reason
Corrective measures
The 43 cm (17") high cassette The gripping device opening is
is inserted with difficulty in
not big enough.
the Spot Film Device.
The gripping devices do not open wide enough to accommodate the cassette with the
maximum height. Repeat the gripping device opening potmeter adjustment procedure
(see paragraph 10.1.12). Check the value of the cell 228. If this value is too big, the
gripping device might not be able to open wide enough.
The horizontal radiogram
subdivision line (cross
subdivision program) is not
the required size.
The transversal movement of
the cassette is wrong.
Check the adjustment of the cross subdivision potmeter paragraph 10.1.13.
Check the data in cells 459 and 460 and modify it remembering that:
• if the separation line is too wide, the two numbers of the same quantity must be
reduced
• if the separation line is too narrow, the two numbers of the same quantity must be
increased
• modifying the 2 numbers of different quantities modifies the centering of the
cassette.
The vertical radiogram
subdivision lines are not of
the size required.
The positioning of the shutters
is incorrect.
The shutters and the width collimator are responsible for the subdivision of the
radiograms. If the white separation lines do not have a clear border, this means that
the limitation is carried out by the collimator. The collimator potmeters adjustment,
paragraphs 10.1.7 width, 10.1.8 height, 10.1.9 iris, must therefore be adjusted.
Check the data in cell 218 and modify it if the potmeter adjustment has not solved the
problem. If the separation line has a clear border, the position of the shutters needs to
be changed.
If the error is constant over all the sizes and subdivisions, the shutter potmeters
adjustment must be adjusted as described in paragraph 10.1.14. If the error is only
present on a few subdivision programs, the cell whose parameter is to be modified
among those present in the table of paragraph 11.3.4.2 must be identified.
The fluoroscopic image
shows one side darker than
the other.
The grid centering is not
correct.
The central position of the grid is not correct, it must be modified by changing the
parameter in cell 220.
(Rev. 3)
20-43
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Diagnostics and Troubleshooting
20.2.3
Collimator
Fault or malfunction
Reason
Corrective measures
One or more collimator axles
oscillate when achieving the
set point.
HW adjustment wrong or
reduced positioning window.
The causes of this defect may be:
A- HW adjustment of the gain circuit is wrong
The trimmers, R38 width, R48 height or R58 iris, must be adjusted as described in
the paragraph 16.1.2
B- Dead band to small
The axle positioning dead band is too short, therefore the movement cannot stop
on the set point. This might be caused by a degradation of the potmeter or the
increase in mechanical backlashes. The value in the cell relating to the axle with
the defect (229 width, 230 height, 231 iris) must be increased. The increase in this
value however increases the positioning tolerance thereby diminishing the
precision. It is therefore also possible to adjust the slowdown cells (232 width, 233
height, 234 iris), which reduce the speed of the axle before reaching the set point,
by a quantity equal to the value set. The increase of this parameter does not
influence the positioning precision but has, as its only drawback, an increase in
the positioning time on the axle.
The exposed collimation is
not correct.
The collimated sizes do not
correspond with film size.
Check the adjustment of the collimator potmeters paragraphs 10.1.7 width, 10.1.8
height, 10.1.9 iris.
Check the data in cell 218 and modify it if the potmeter adjustment has not solved the
problem.
The fluoro collimation is not
correct.
The collimator sizes do not
correspond with I.I. fields.
Check the adjustment of the collimator potmeters paragraphs 10.1.7 width, 10.1.8
height, 10.1.9 iris.
Check the data in the cells 214÷217 and modify them according to dimensions of the
fields of the I.I. installed.
APOLLO
20-44
(Rev. 3)
SERVICE MANUAL
Maintenance and cleaning
21
MAINTENANCE AND CLEANING
As all electrical equipments, this unit requires not only a correct usage,
but also maintenance and checks on a regular basis.
This precaution ensures efficient, long-lasting functioning.
Apollo contains mechanical parts such as, bearings, cables and springs
that are subject to natural wear and tear.
To prevent any possibility of risk to the patient or operator, the
equipment must be checked and maintained regularly.
The electromechanical and electronic components contained in the units
must be adjusted correctly to ensure they work perfectly and to give
quality radiographic images, to provide top levels of electrical safety and
contain the dispersion of X-rays within the preestablished limits.
G
NOTE:
The Service Engineer has to take special care for all what concerns
electrical safety of the device and must make sure of restoring all
provisions for electrical safety which may be affected during a service
intervention and to solicit the customer to have the electrical safety tests
repeated every time the intervention has caused the replacement of
important parts or the intervention has significantly affected safety
provisions of the device.
Maintenance can be carried out by the operator (paragraph 21.1) or by
the authorised engineer (paragraph 21.2).
(Rev. 3)
21-1
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Maintenance and
21.1
Maintenance the operator can carry out
The check carried out directly by the operator are the following:
Frequency
Type of check
Method
Daily
Check the working of the light indicators and
LEDs located on the control desk
Visual
inspection
Daily
Functioning of joysticks and buttons located on
the control desk and on the panel on the side of
the table
Visual
inspection
Daily
Absence of contrast liquid residuals
Visual
inspection
Daily
Check smooth flow and noise of movements
Visual
inspection
Integrity of equipment and labels
Visual
inspection
Monthly
WARNING:
The operator is recommended to carry out the controls before each
working session.
In case of irregularities, high noisiness of motorised components, or
failures, the operator must immediately notify the Technical Staff.
APOLLO
21-2
(Rev. 3)
SERVICE MANUAL
Maintenance and cleaning
21.2
Maintenance that can be carried out by the
Authorised Technician
It is recommended that a technician authorised by Villa Sistemi Medicali
services the equipment once a year to ensure it always stays in tip-top
condition.
WARNING:
Preventive and/or corrective operations may only be carried out by Villa
Sistemi Medicali authorised personnel.
At the maintenance stage, the performance of the equipment is checked
and if possible adjusted in line with the indications in the previous
chapters as summarised in the following table:
Type of check
Method
Removal of the casing and cleaning of the parts underneath
with particular attention to the Spot Film Device covers
Visual inspection
X-ray beam centering check
Paragraph 19.2
X-ray field – light field correspondence check
Paragraph 19.2
Cassette size subdivision control
Paragraph 19.1
Checking of the movements and operability of the control
desk and the table-mounted control
Visual inspection
Checking of the tilting, angulation and tabletop centering
Visual inspection
Checking of the chain voltage
Chapter 6
Check of the level of lubricant in the reduction units
Practical control
Check of the motor belts
Practical control
Check of the state of main beam bearings, SID
Visual inspection
Check of the state of the Spot Film Device gripping
movement belts
Visual inspection
WARNING:
Only use original spare parts if components need to be replaced.
WARNING:
For cleaning and disinfecting operations carried out directly by the
Authorised Technician, you are recommended to adhere to the
information reported in chapter 8 of the User's manual.
(Rev. 3)
21-3
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Maintenance and
THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
APOLLO
21-4
(Rev. 3)
SERVICE MANUAL
Wiring diagrams and drawings
22
WIRING DIAGRAMS AND DRAWINGS
The connections of the cables used on the Apollo tables are made with
the use of connectors.
The wiring diagrams are shown with references on them detailing:
Pin number
Connection number
(Rev. 3)
22-1
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Wiring diagrams and drawings
22.1
List of wiring diagrams and drawings
1.
Interconnection diagram
2.
Power supply diagram
3.
Functional drawing
4.
Cabinet layout
5.
A1 CPU PCB layout
6.
A1 CPU PCB wiring diagram
7.
A2 Input PCB layout
8.
A2 Input PCB wiring diagram
9.
A3 Output PCB layout
10. A3 Output PCB wiring diagram
11. A4 Spot Film Device motor driver PCB layout
12. A4 Spot Film Device motor driver PCB wiring diagram
13. A7 Filter PCB schematic and layout
14. A8 Table keyboard PCB layout
15. A8 Table keyboard PCB wiring diagram
16. A10 Spot Film Device PCB layout
17. A10 Spot Film Device wiring diagram
18. A11 Base unit connector PCB layout
19. A11 Base unit connector PCB wiring diagram
APOLLO
22-2
(Rev. 3)
SERVICE MANUAL
Wiring diagrams and drawings
20. A12 Cabinet connector PCB layout
21. A12 Cabinet connector PCB wiring diagram
22. A13 Angulation connector PCB layout
23. A13 Angulation connector wiring diagram
24. A14 Control desk - CPU PCB layout
25. A14 Control desk CPU PCB wiring diagram
26. A15 Compressor PCB layout
27. A15 Compressor PCB wiring diagram
28. A16 Additional Collimator Filters PCB layout
29. A16 Additional Collimator Filters PCB wiring diagram
30. A17 Table Top Control PCB layout and wiring diagram
(Rev. 4)
22-3
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Wiring diagrams and drawings
THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
APOLLO
22-4
(Rev. 3)
SERVICE MANUAL
Wiring diagrams and drawings
ELECTRONIC CABINET
X33
22V∼
48V∼
TRDX+/-
IN56…IN59
X10
20V∼
X35
LIM+/-
X36
DC+/-
X37
X11
18V∼
X13
I19…I29
X0
A10
SFD
A12
A10
SFD
A12
INV.
A10
SFD
A11
A12
X14
X15
X16
X17
X18
I33…I37
ENC_A
ENC_B
+5V ENC
IN0…IN31
X3A
IN32…IN59
ENC_A
ENC_B
IA0…IA15
+5V ENC
Vref Pot
X3B
I0…I10
X5A
X21
I39…I54
X5B
OUT40…OUT71
X6
O10…O11
O18…O21
O32…O35
TPU0…TPU3
VOUTA..VOUTD
ORS
KVA
I12…I17
I30…I32
10V∼
10V∼
I12…I17
I12…I17
PCB
X39
X8
I11
X32
I18b
X22
X24
24Vdc
X107
18V∼
X23
18V∼
36V∼
X32
X15
X17
A2
INPUT
O8, O9
IK1L, OK1L
O2…O6
O36…O59
KVA
X60–B1:Cassette Encoder
X51 – R6: Gripping pot.
X61–B4/5:Cassette size sensor
X52 – R7: Cross subdivision pot.
X62–B2:Cass.present sensor (Emitter)
X53 – R8: Grid pot.
X63–B3:Cass.present sensor (Receiver)
A10
Spot
Film
X55 – M6: Cass. Left belt
Device PCB
X66–S33:Cassette gripping switch
A2
INPUT
X16
X56 – M7: Grid motor
(not present on
X57 – M8: Shutters motor “All Digital”
version)
X58 – M9: Gripping motor
X59 – M10: Cross subdivision motor
24V∼
A12
Interconnection
PCB
X21
A11
Interconnection
PCB
X46
(located on
base)
X47 – Enable for K2-K3-K4-K5
A2
INPUT
X49 – K1L: table emergency
X64,65–Anti-entrapment device
(Optional - standard on C-CSA-US vers)
Spot Film Device
X75–S32:Anticoll.Main/Middle beam
Emergency switch
X77–S46-47:Table Top Emerg.switches
X78–S48-49:Main beam Emerg.switches
X81–S54-55:Middle beam Emerg.switches
X83–R1:Main beam pot.
X88–R11:Table Top pot.
X93–Y3:Middle beam brake
X96–M13:Table Top motor.
X105
X27
X28
28Vdc
X29
A15
Compressor
PCB
X104
X99
X70 –Main beam motor
X30
Inverter
X69
X31
X18
A13
Interconnection
PCB
X74–Emergency switches circuit
X71 – Angulation motor
X72 – Middle beam motor
X73 – Scanning motor
X76–S44-45:SID Emergency switches
X79–S50-51:Angulation Emerg.switches
X80–S52-53:Scanning Emerg.switches
X82–R10:Compressor pot.
X85–R2:Angulation pot.
X45
X45
USMC
APOLLO Table
(located on
column)
X45
O0…O1
X98
X97
X48
U32…U35
X101,102,103–Emergency switches
X92–Y1:Main beam brake
X0
LUMN
CONM
X67–Test Point
X84–R3:Middle beam pot.
X20
X26
A3
OUTPUT
PCB
I12…I17
A2
INPUT
X68
X44
X38
A2
INPUT
OUT0…OUT39
X50 – R5: Shutters pot.
X54 – M5: Cass.Right belt
A2
INPUT
O60…O63
OUT64…OUT71
TPU0..TPU3
X19
X68
X44
X4
X2
X20
(not present on
“All Digital” version)
A2
INPUT
X25
X1
X19
A4
Spot Film Device GR+/Motor Driver PCB GN+/-
A1
CPU
PCB
X34
TRSA+/-
X12
X14
Collimator
Connector for FLAT CABLE –
Screws connectors
A2
INPUT
A8
T.S.O. PCB
D-SUB Connector
X86–R4:Scanning pot.
X87–R9:SID pot.
X89–S25:Tube at 0° position
X90–S26-27:Compres.end-run switches
X91–S28-29:I.I. lift end-run switches
X94–Y2:Angulation brake
X95–Y4:Scanning brake
A2
INPUT
X0
(Rev. 3)
CAN BUS
S.F. 24V∼
X41 – Foot switch
Control Desk
X42 – Hand switch
X99–M11-14:SID,compressor motors
X100–S31:L/H speed change switch
APOLLO
Interconnection diagram
1
Page 1 of 1
22-5
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Wiring diagrams and drawings
(Rev. 3)
APOLLO
Power supply diagram
2
Code 39849002 - Rev. 1
Page 1 of 1
22-7
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Wiring diagrams and drawings
(Rev. 5)
22-9
APOLLO
Functional drawing
3
Code 39849001 - Rev. 11
Page 1 of 19
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Wiring diagrams and drawings
(Rev. 5)
22-11
APOLLO
Functional drawing
3
Code 39849001 - Rev. 11
Page 2 of 19
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Wiring diagrams and drawings
(Rev. 5)
22-13
APOLLO
Functional drawing
3
Code 39849001 - Rev. 11
Page 3 of 19
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Wiring diagrams and drawings
(Rev. 5)
22-15
APOLLO
Functional drawing
3
Code 39849001 - Rev. 11
Page 4 of 19
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Wiring diagrams and drawings
(Rev. 5)
22-17
APOLLO
Functional drawing
3
Code 39849001 - Rev. 11
Page 5 of 19
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Wiring diagrams and drawings
(Rev. 5)
22-19
APOLLO
Functional drawing
3
Code 39849001 - Rev. 11
Page 6 of 19
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Wiring diagrams and drawings
(Rev. 5)
22-21
APOLLO
Functional drawing
3
Code 39849001 - Rev. 11
Page 7 of 19
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Wiring diagrams and drawings
(Rev. 5)
22-23
APOLLO
Functional drawing
3
Code 39849001 - Rev. 11
Page 8 of 19
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Wiring diagrams and drawings
(Rev. 5)
22-25
APOLLO
Functional drawing
3
Code 39849001 - Rev. 11
Page 9 of 19
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Wiring diagrams and drawings
(Rev. 5)
22-27
APOLLO
Functional drawing
3
Code 39849001 - Rev. 11
Page 10 of 19
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Wiring diagrams and drawings
(Rev. 5)
22-29
APOLLO
Functional drawing
3
Code 39849001 - Rev. 11
Page 11 of 19
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Wiring diagrams and drawings
(Rev. 5)
22-31
APOLLO
Functional drawing
3
Code 39849001 - Rev. 11
Page 12 of 19
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Wiring diagrams and drawings
(Rev. 5)
22-33
APOLLO
Functional drawing
3
Code 39849001 - Rev. 11
Page 13 of 19
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Wiring diagrams and drawings
(Rev. 5)
22-35
APOLLO
Functional drawing
3
Code 39849001 - Rev. 11
Page 14 of 19
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Wiring diagrams and drawings
(Rev. 5)
22-37
APOLLO
Functional drawing
3
Code 39849001 - Rev. 11
Page 15 of 19
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Wiring diagrams and drawings
(Rev. 5)
22-39
APOLLO
Functional drawing
3
Code 39849001 - Rev. 11
Page 16 of 19
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Wiring diagrams and drawings
(Rev. 5)
22-41
APOLLO
Functional drawing
3
Code 39849001 - Rev. 11
Page 17 of 19
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Wiring diagrams and drawings
(Rev. 5)
22-43
APOLLO
Functional drawing
3
Code 39849001 - Rev. 11
Page 18 of 19
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Wiring diagrams and drawings
(Rev. 5)
22-45
APOLLO
Functional drawing
3
Code 39849001 - Rev. 11
Page 19 of 19
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Wiring diagrams and drawings
(Rev. 5)
22-47
APOLLO
Cabinet layout
4
Code 83848060 - Rev. 3 (CE)
Code 83848250 - Rev. 1 (C-CSA-US)
Page 1 of 1
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Wiring diagrams and drawings
(Rev. 5)
22-49
APOLLO
A1 CPU PCB layout
5
Code 58838150 - Rev. 7
Page 1 of 1
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Wiring diagrams and drawings
(Rev. 3)
22-51
APOLLO
A1 CPU PCB
wiring diagram
6
Code 39849025 - Rev. 1
Page 1 of 9
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Wiring diagrams and drawings
(Rev. 3)
22-53
APOLLO
A1 CPU PCB
wiring diagram
6
Code 39849025 - Rev. 1
Page 2 of 9
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Wiring diagrams and drawings
(Rev. 3)
22-55
APOLLO
A1 CPU PCB
wiring diagram
6
Code 39849025 - Rev. 1
Page 3 of 9
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Wiring diagrams and drawings
(Rev. 3)
22-57
APOLLO
A1 CPU PCB
wiring diagram
6
Code 39849025 - Rev. 1
Page 4 of 9
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Wiring diagrams and drawings
(Rev. 3)
22-59
APOLLO
A1 CPU PCB
wiring diagram
6
Code 39849025 - Rev. 1
Page 5 of 9
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Wiring diagrams and drawings
(Rev. 3)
22-61
APOLLO
A1 CPU PCB
wiring diagram
6
Code 39849025 - Rev. 1
Page 6 of 9
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Wiring diagrams and drawings
(Rev. 3)
22-63
APOLLO
A1 CPU PCB
wiring diagram
6
Code 39849025 - Rev. 1
Page 7 of 9
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Wiring diagrams and drawings
(Rev. 3)
22-65
APOLLO
A1 CPU PCB
wiring diagram
6
Code 39849025 - Rev. 1
Page 8 of 9
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Wiring diagrams and drawings
(Rev. 3)
22-67
APOLLO
A1 CPU PCB
wiring diagram
6
Code 39849025 - Rev. 1
Page 9 of 9
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Wiring diagrams and drawings
(Rev. 3)
22-69
APOLLO
A2 Input PCB layout
7
Code 58838152 - Rev. 2
Page 1 of 1
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Wiring diagrams and drawings
(Rev. 3)
22-71
APOLLO
A2 Input PCB
wiring diagram
8
Code 39849027 - Rev. 4
Page 1 of 4
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Wiring diagrams and drawings
(Rev. 3)
22-73
APOLLO
A2 Input PCB
wiring diagram
8
Code 39849027 - Rev. 4
Page 2 of 4
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Wiring diagrams and drawings
(Rev. 3)
22-75
APOLLO
A2 Input PCB
wiring diagram
8
Code 39849027 - Rev. 4
Page 3 of 4
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Wiring diagrams and drawings
(Rev. 3)
22-77
APOLLO
A2 Input PCB
wiring diagram
8
Code 39849027 - Rev. 4
Page 4 of 4
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Wiring diagrams and drawings
(Rev. 3)
22-79
APOLLO
A3 Output PCB layout
9
Code 58838154 - Rev. 0
Page 1 of 1
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Wiring diagrams and drawings
(Rev. 4)
22-81
APOLLO
A3 Output PCB
wiring diagram
10
Code 39849029 - Rev. 3
Page 1 of 8
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Wiring diagrams and drawings
(Rev. 4)
22-83
APOLLO
A3 Output PCB
wiring diagram
10
Code 39849029 - Rev. 3
Page 2 of 8
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Wiring diagrams and drawings
(Rev. 4)
22-85
APOLLO
A3 Output PCB
wiring diagram
10
Code 39849029 - Rev. 3
Page 3 of 8
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Wiring diagrams and drawings
(Rev. 4)
22-87
APOLLO
A3 Output PCB
wiring diagram
10
Code 39849029 - Rev. 3
Page 4 of 8
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Wiring diagrams and drawings
(Rev. 4)
22-89
APOLLO
A3 Output PCB
wiring diagram
10
Code 39849029 - Rev. 3
Page 5 of 8
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Wiring diagrams and drawings
(Rev. 4)
22-91
APOLLO
A3 Output PCB
wiring diagram
10
Code 39849029 - Rev. 3
Page 6 of 8
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Wiring diagrams and drawings
(Rev. 4)
22-93
APOLLO
A3 Output PCB
wiring diagram
10
Code 39849029 - Rev. 3
Page 7 of 8
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Wiring diagrams and drawings
(Rev. 4)
22-95
APOLLO
A3 Output PCB
wiring diagram
10
Code 39849029 - Rev. 3
Page 8 of 8
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Wiring diagrams and drawings
(Rev. 3)
22-97
APOLLO
A4 Spot Film Device
motor driver PCB layout
11
Code 58838156 - Rev. 0
Page 1 of 1
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Wiring diagrams and drawings
(Rev. 3)
22-99
APOLLO
A4 Spot Film Device
motor driver PCB wiring diagram
12
Code 39849031 - Rev. 0
Page 1 of 3
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Wiring diagrams and drawings
(Rev. 3)
22-101
APOLLO
A4 Spot Film Device
motor driver PCB wiring diagram
12
Code 39849031 - Rev. 0
Page 2 of 3
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Wiring diagrams and drawings
(Rev. 3)
22-103
APOLLO
A4 Spot Film Device
motor driver PCB wiring diagram
12
Code 39849031 - Rev. 0
Page 3 of 3
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Wiring diagrams and drawings
(Rev. 3)
APOLLO
A7 Filter PCB
schematic and layout
13
Code 58848154 - Rev. 0
Page 1 of 1
22-105
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Wiring diagrams and drawings
(Rev. 3)
22-107
APOLLO
A8 Table keyboard
PCB layout
14
Code 58843050 - Rev. 1
Page 1 of 1
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Wiring diagrams and drawings
(Rev. 3)
22-109
APOLLO
A8 Table keyboard
PCB wiring diagram
15
Code 39849019 - Rev. 1
Page 1 of 1
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Wiring diagrams and drawings
(Rev. 3)
22-111
APOLLO
A10 Spot Film Device
PCB layout
16
Code 58833015 - Rev. 2 (CE)
Code 58843054 - Rev.0 (C-CSA-US)
Page 1 of 1
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Wiring diagrams and drawings
(Rev. 3)
22-113
APOLLO
A10 Spot Film Device
PCB wiring diagram
17
Code 39849014 - Rev. 2
Page 1 of 2
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Wiring diagrams and drawings
(Rev. 3)
22-115
APOLLO
A10 Spot Film Device
PCB wiring diagram
17
Code 39849014 - Rev. 2
Page 2 of 2
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Wiring diagrams and drawings
(Rev. 3)
APOLLO
A11 Base unit connector
PCB layout
18
Code 58841050 - Rev. 0
Page 1 of 1
22-117
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Wiring diagrams and drawings
(Rev. 3)
22-119
APOLLO
A11 Base unit connector
PCB wiring diagram
19
Code 39849010 - Rev. 0
Page 1 of 1
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Wiring diagrams and drawings
(Rev. 3)
APOLLO
A12 Cabinet connector
PCB layout
20
Code 58848150 - Rev. 0
Page 1 of 1
22-121
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Wiring diagrams and drawings
(Rev. 3)
22-123
APOLLO
A12 Cabinet connector
PCB wiring diagram
21
Code 39849012 - Rev. 0
Page 1 of 1
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Wiring diagrams and drawings
(Rev. 3)
APOLLO
A13 Angulation connector
PCB layout
22
Code 58843052 - Rev. 0
Page 1 of 1
22-125
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Wiring diagrams and drawings
(Rev. 3)
22-127
APOLLO
A13 Angulation connector
PCB wiring diagram
23
Code 39849021 - Rev. 0
Page 1 of 1
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Wiring diagrams and drawings
(Rev. 4)
22-129
APOLLO
A14 Control desk – CPU
PCB layout
24
Code 58838158 - Rev. 4
Page 1 of 2
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Wiring diagrams and drawings
(Rev. 4)
22-131
APOLLO
A14 Control desk – CPU
PCB layout
24
Code 58838158 - Rev. 4
Page 2 of 2
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Wiring diagrams and drawings
(Rev. 3)
22-133
APOLLO
A14 Control desk CPU
PCB wiring diagram
25
Code 39849033 - Rev. 1
Page 1 of 7
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Wiring diagrams and drawings
(Rev. 3)
22-135
APOLLO
A14 Control desk CPU
PCB wiring diagram
25
Code 39849033 - Rev. 1
Page 2 of 7
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Wiring diagrams and drawings
(Rev. 3)
22-137
APOLLO
A14 Control desk CPU
PCB wiring diagram
25
Code 39849033 - Rev. 1
Page 3 of 7
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Wiring diagrams and drawings
(Rev. 3)
22-139
APOLLO
A14 Control desk CPU
PCB wiring diagram
25
Code 39849033 - Rev. 1
Page 4 of 7
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Wiring diagrams and drawings
(Rev. 3)
22-141
APOLLO
A14 Control desk CPU
PCB wiring diagram
25
Code 39849033 - Rev. 1
Page 5 of 7
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Wiring diagrams and drawings
(Rev. 3)
22-143
APOLLO
A14 Control desk CPU
PCB wiring diagram
25
Code 39849033 - Rev. 1
Page 6 of 7
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Wiring diagrams and drawings
(Rev. 3)
22-145
APOLLO
A14 Control desk CPU
PCB wiring diagram
25
Code 39849033 - Rev. 1
Page 7 of 7
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Wiring diagrams and drawings
(Rev. 3)
22-147
APOLLO
A15 Compressor
PCB layout
26
Code 58848152 - Rev. 0
Page 1 of 1
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Wiring diagrams and drawings
(Rev. 3)
22-149
APOLLO
A15 Compressor
PCB wiring diagram
27
Code 39849016 - Rev. 0
Page 1 of 3
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Wiring diagrams and drawings
(Rev. 3)
22-151
APOLLO
A15 Compressor
PCB wiring diagram
27
Code 39849016 - Rev. 0
Page 2 of 3
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Wiring diagrams and drawings
(Rev. 3)
22-153
APOLLO
A15 Compressor
PCB wiring diagram
27
Code 39849016 - Rev. 0
Page 3 of 3
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Wiring diagrams and drawings
(Rev. 4)
APOLLO
A16 Additional Collimator
Filtres PCB layout
28
Code 58848156 - Rev. 0
Page 1 of 1
22-155
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Wiring diagrams and drawings
(Rev. 4)
22-157
APOLLO
A16 Additional Collimator
Filtres PCB wiring diagram
29
Code 39849051 - Rev. 0
Page 1 of 1
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Wiring diagrams and drawings
(Rev. 4)
APOLLO
A17 Table Top Control PCB
layout and wiring diagram
30
Code 58846140 - Rev. 0
Page 1 of 1
22-159
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Spare Parts
23
SPARE PARTS
1 – Electrical components
2 – Electrical cabinet and PCB’s inside the table
3 – Connections cables
4 – Control desk
5 – Keyboard (TSO)
6 – Foot control
7 – Tabletop movement
8 – Compressor group
9 – Spot Film Device – Cassette movement
10 – Spot Film Device – Shutters / Grid group
11 – Spot Film Device – Gripping group
12 – Spot Film Device – Cross division group
13 – Tabletop
14 – Collimator
15 – Covers
16 – Curved tabletop accessories
17 – Flat tabletop accessories
(Rev. 3)
23-1
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Spare Parts
1 – ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
Ref.
Order code
Description
Note
M2
6184420100
6184422100
Angulation motor
Angulation motor
CE version
C-CSA-US
version
M5
6283310700
DX cassette movement motor
with Encoder
--
6283310300
Encoder assy
M6
6283310600
SX cassette movement motor
M7
6283314900
Shutters motor assy
M8
6283317400
Grid motor assy
M9
6283304400
Gripping motor
M10
6283331300
Cross division motor assy
M12
6284250100
I.I. lift motor assy
M13
6184613100
Tabletop movement motor
M14
6284708800
Compressor motor assy
R2, R5, R6,
R7, R8, R11
4192005100
Potentiometer 10K – 10gg
R10
4192005200
Linear potentiometer 1.7K
S25
4233104900
Ball-microswitch
S26, S27
4208404000
Microswitch
S28, S29
4233104900
Ball-microswitch
S30
4291309400
XGG12-88Z1 UL/CSA
microswitch
S31
4291308400
“Crouzet” microswitch
S33
4291307800
“Crouzet” microswitch
S44, S45
4233104900
4291309000
Ball-microswitch
Microswitch
CE version
C-CSA-US
version
S50
4208404000
Microswitch
CE version
4291309200
UL/CSA microswitch
C-CSA-US
version
4291308400
“Crouzet” microswitch
CE version
4291309100
UL/CSA microswitch
C-CSA-US
version
S51
APOLLO
23-2
(Rev. 5)
R11
M13
(Rev. 3)
M2
R2
S50
S30
S51
S27
R10
S45
S44
S31
S26
M12
S28
S29
M14
R5
M8
M6
S25
23-3
R7
R6
M7
R8
M9
M5
S33
M10
SERVICE MANUAL
Spare Parts
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Spare Parts
APOLLO
Ref.
Order code
Description
M1
4391107900
Main beam actuator motor
M3
4391107800
Middle beam actuator motor
--
6684108600
Main beam/Middle beam
actuator end-travel group
M4
4391106700
Scan motor
CE version
4391107700
Scan motor
C-CSA-US
version
M11
6284413100
SID motor
R1, R3, R4,
R9
4192005100
Potentiometer 10K – 10gg
S32
4265712600
“Crouzet” microswitch
CE version
4291309300
UL/CSA microswitch
C-CSA-US
version
S46, S47,
S48, S49,
S54, S55
4233104900
Ball-microswitch
S52, S53
4291308400
“Crouzet” microswitch
--
6684112000
Fuses kit
23-4
Note
(Rev. 5)
(Rev. 3)
S52
S53
M4
R4
S46
S47
S32
M3
M11
R9
S48
S49
R3
M1
S54
S55
R1
SERVICE MANUAL
Spare Parts
23-5
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Spare Parts
2 – ELECTRICAL CABINET and PCBs INSIDE THE TABLE
Ref.
Order code
Description
A1
A2
A3
A4
5883815000
5883815200
5883815400
5883815600
A5, A6
A7
A12
A15
A16
4492706800
5884815400
5884815000
5884815200
5884815600
K1L
4291512300
K2M, K3M,
K4M, K5M
4291517300
K6M, K7M,
K8M, K9M
4291514200
K10M,
K11M
-Z1
Z34, Z35
4291505400
4571810600
4192211300
4192207100
Q1
V1, V2, V3
4291511700
4165121100
T1
4492821600
T2
T3
T4
R15
A10 (*)
4492820900
4492821000
4492821100
4192109400
5883301500
5884305400
CPU board A1
Input board A2
Output board A3
Spot Film Device motor drive
board A4
Inverter Mitsubishi
Filter board A7
Cabinat connector board A12
Compressor board A15
Additional Collimator Filters
board A16
Power rele 24V 50/60Hz
(4 NO + 1NO) K1L
3-phases power rele 24V
50/60Hz with filter
(3 NO / 1 NC + 2 NC) K2M, K3M,
K4M, K5M
Power rele 24V 50/60Hz with
filter (3 NO / 1 NC + 4 NC) K6M,
K7M, K8M, K9M
Rele 2 contact 7A 24Vac K10M,
K11M
Rele socket
3-phases filter 440Vac – 10A
1-phase filter 0.5uF 100ohm
160Vac Z34, Z35
3-phases breaker 6.3-10A Q1
Rectifier 25A 200V
V1, V2, V3
3-phases screened transformer
6kVA
3-phases screened transformer
6kVA
1-phase transformer 140VA
1-phase transformer 560VA
1-phase transformer 590VA
0.68ohm – 50W resistor
Spot Film Device board A10
Spot Film Device board A10
A11 (*)
A13 (*)
A17 (*)
5884105000
5884305200
5884614000
Base unit connector board A11
Angulation connector board A13
Table Top Control board A17
4492821700
Note
CE version
C-CSA-US
version
CE version
C-CSA-US
version
(*) Inside Apollo table
APOLLO
23-6
(Rev. 5)
SERVICE MANUAL
Spare Parts
(Rev. 5)
23-7
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Spare Parts
3 – CONNECTION CABLES
APOLLO
Ref.
Order code
Description
X0-X74
6284821000
Emergency switch cable X0-X74
X0-X99
6284820900
SID motor cable X0-X99
X0-X101
6284820600
Emergency red button cable
X0-X101
X8
6284821400
Console cable X8
X14
6284820300
SFD signal cable X14
X16
6284820400
TSO cable X16
X19
6284820200
SFD potentiometer cable X19
X20
6284820700
Table potentiometer cable X20
X44
6284820500
SFD power cable X44
X45
6284821300
Collimator cable X45
X46
6284820800
Board connection cable X46
X68
6284820100
SFD motor cable X68
X99
6284821100
Compressor motor cable X99
X105
6284821200
Board connection cable 105
10
6284821500
Ground cable N.10
23-8
Note
(Rev. 3)
SERVICE MANUAL
Spare Parts
4 – CONTROL DESK
1
2
3
(7x)
(Rev. 3)
Ref.
Order code
Description
--
8384800000
Control desk assy
1
6684802300
Policarbonate skin
2
6184801500
Joystick plate assy
3
6684802400
Knob for joystick (7x)
--
5883815800
Control desk CPU board A14
23-9
Note
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Spare Parts
5 – KEYBOARD (TSO)
1
2
APOLLO
Ref.
Order code
Description
--
6284320600
Table Keyboard A8 assy
1
5884305000
Keyboard PCB
2
6684320400
Keyboard skin assy
23-10
Note
(Rev. 5)
SERVICE MANUAL
Spare Parts
6 – FOOT CONTROL
(Rev. 5)
Ref.
Order code
Description
--
7184806000
Foot control assy
--
4291419400
Fluoro switch (2 microswitches)
--
4291419500
Exposure switch (4 microswitches)
--
6284806600
Connection cable
--
2300934200
Cable protection
23-11
Note
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Spare Parts
7 – TABLE TOP MOVEMENT
3
2
4
1
6
5
APOLLO
Ref.
Order code
Description
1
4990806200
Closed toothed belt 16 AT5/340
2
5284610400
Toothed pulley AT5-Z26
3
5284610700
Toothed pulley AT5-Z19
4
5284612000
Toothed pulley M1-Z100
5
6690806300
Open toothed belt 16 AT5
6
6184613600
Belt pulley intermediate assy
23-12
Note
(Rev. 3)
SERVICE MANUAL
Spare Parts
4
1
3
2
5
6
(Rev. 3)
Ref.
Order code
Description
1
4990806200
Closed toothed belt 16 AT5/340
2
5284612900
Toothed pulley AT5-Z34
3
5284613000
Toothed pulley AT5-Z26
4
5284611300
Toothed pulley AT5-Z19
5
6690806300
Open toothed belt 16 AT5
6
6184613600
Belt pulley intermediate assy
23-13
Note
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Spare Parts
8 – COMPRESSOR GROUP
APOLLO
Ref.
Order code
Description
M14
6284708800
Compressor motor assy
S26, S27
4208404000
UP/DOWN switch
S31
4291308400
Parking switch
S30
4291309400
Compressor force switch
R10
4192005200
Linear potentiometer 1.7K
1
2100262400
Compressor spring
2
4890311000
Cable chain
3
6184704600
Compressor cup assy
23-14
Note
(Rev. 5)
SERVICE MANUAL
Spare Parts
S31
M14
S26
R10
S27
S30
3
1
2
(Rev. 3)
23-15
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Spare Parts
9 – SPOT FILM DEVICE – CASSETTE MOVEMENT
APOLLO
Ref.
Order code
Description
1
6183309500
Tensioning pulley for cass.
movement
2
4990806100
Toothed belt T5x14 L=1925mm
3
5283308200
Sliding bar
4
4990805700
Closed toothed belt T5x12
L=600mm
5
6183309200
Rear pulley assy
6
5283307700
Driving toothed pulley
7
6683310000
Optical sensors with cable kit
M5
6283310700
DX cassette movement motor with
Encoder
--
6283310300
Encoder
M6
6283310600
SX cassette movement motor
8
6283323600
Light receiver with cable
9
6283323700
Light emitter with cable
10
6684322600
Leaf spring assembly
23-16
Note
(Rev. 5)
9
2
10
8
M6
1
4
3
6
7
5
M5
SERVICE MANUAL
Spare Parts
(Rev. 3)
23-17
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Spare Parts
10 – SPOT FILM DEVICE – SHUTTERS / GRID GROUP
APOLLO
Ref.
Order code
Description
1
4990806000
Closed toothed belt T5x8
L=215mm
2
4990805900
Closed toothed belt T5x10
L=200mm
3
4990805800
Closed toothed belt T5x10
L=220mm
M7
6283314900
Shutters motor assy
M8
6283317400
Grid motor assy
--
6690805500
Open toothed belt kit T5x8
(gripping, shutters, grid)
23-18
Note
(Rev. 3)
M7
2
M8
1
3
SERVICE MANUAL
Spare Parts
(Rev. 3)
23-19
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Spare Parts
11 – SPOT FILM DEVICE – GRIPPING GROUP
R6
M9
S33
1
APOLLO
Ref.
Order code
Description
--
7183300000
Gripping assy
M9
6283304400
Gripping motor assy
S33
4291307800
Microswitch “Crouzet”
R6
4192005100
Potentiometer 10K – 10gg
1
5783301200
Gripping spring
23-20
Note
(Rev. 3)
SERVICE MANUAL
Spare Parts
12 – SPOT FILM DEVICE – CROSS DIVISION GROUP
1
R7
M10
(Rev. 3)
Ref.
Order code
Description
1
4990805600
Closed toothed belt T5x10
L=840mm
M10
6283331300
Cross division motor assy
R7
4192005100
Potentiometer 10K – 10gg
23-21
Note
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Spare Parts
13 – TABLETOP
APOLLO
Ref.
Order code
Description
1
7184600600
Curved plastic tabletop
2
7184600000
Curved carbon fibre tabletop
3
7184600700
Flat plastic tabletop
23-22
Note
(Rev. 3)
SERVICE MANUAL
Spare Parts
14 – COLLIMATOR
(Rev. 3)
Ref.
Order code
Description
--
8611005100
Automatic collimator
1
5811227000
Push button collimator panel
board
2
4591606700
Halogen lamp 24V 100W
3
4192004000
Potentiometer 10k – 3gg
4
4391103000
Collimator motor 24V
5
5911310900
Collimator plexiglas cover
--
8611005000
Iris collimator
23-23
Note
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Spare Parts
15 – COVERS
APOLLO
Ref.
Order code
Description
Note
a
6184507200
SFD upper cover
CE version
6184507300
SFD upper cover
C-CSA-US
version
b
5484500700
SFD front cover
c
6184508100
SFD left lateral cover
d
6184508000
SFD right lateral cover
e
6184506900
SFD lower cover
f
5684504000
Base front cover
g1, g2
5484508200
Scanning cover
h
5484503200
Base left/right lateral cover
i
5484501400
Tabletop support arm front cover
l1
5684502700
Scanning left rear cover
l2
5684502800
Scanning right rear cover
m
6184505400
Angulation cover
n1
5684434700
X-ray tube left lower cover
n2
5684434800
X-ray tube right lower cover
o
5484434600
X-ray tube main cover
p
6184506400
I.I. lift cover
23-24
with I.I. lift
only
(Rev. 3)
a
c
e
b
d
i
l
l1
l2
p
m
o
f
n
n1
n2
i
g
g2
h
g1
SERVICE MANUAL
Spare Parts
(Rev. 3)
23-25
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Spare Parts
APOLLO
Ref.
Order code
Description
q
5484500100
SID rear cover
r
5484500300
Column rear cover
s
5484502600
Rear cables junction upper cover
t
5484502500
Rear cables junction lower cover
u1
5684502700
Scanning rear left cover
u2
5684502800
Scanning rear right cover
v1
5684504300
Base left rear cover
v2
5684504200
Base right rear cover
w
5684232300
Cables chains junction bracket
z
5684108200
Cables output cover
23-26
Note
(Rev. 3)
(Rev. 3)
23-27
u1
u
u2
z
w
q
t
s
r
v1
v
v2
SERVICE MANUAL
Spare Parts
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Spare Parts
16 – CURVED TABLETOP ACCESSORIES
1
3
2
6
5
4
APOLLO
Ref.
Order code
Description
1
6684621100
Headrest
2
6684623000
Patient support handgrip (1 pc.)
3
7184622900
Block patient footrest
4
7184623200
Legrest (2 pcs.)
5
7184624300
Band-tensioner with compression
band
6
7184626200
Lateral cassette holder
23-28
Note
(Rev. 5)
SERVICE MANUAL
Spare Parts
17 – FLAT TABLETOP ACCESSORIES
1
2
3
6
4
5
(Rev. 3)
Ref.
Order code
Description
1
7173150000
Headrest
2
6173120000
Patient support handgrip (1 pc.)
3
7173150000
Block patient footrest
--
6673145900
Unblocked footrest kit (2x)
4
8173142500
Legrest (2 pcs.)
5
7173129000
Band-tensioner with compression
band
6
7173115000
Lateral cassette holder
23-29
Note
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Spare Parts
THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
APOLLO
23-30
(Rev. 3)
Code 6984900703_Rev.5
Villa Sistemi Medicali S.p.A.
Via Delle Azalee, 3
20090 Buccinasco (MI) Italy
Tel. (+39) 02 48859.1
Fax (+39) 02 4881844
0051